Home

Installation and User Manual

1. 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 288 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual A Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Password Validation g Ender Pasou or Cancel 3 Click OK This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Each of the window s settings is described in the previous section First Time Configuration 4 Make the required changes and click OK when ready e Accepting Received Commands As part of the image exchange between computers on the NetMatrix system other computers exactly which computers are defined as part of your NetMatrix Monitor application s configuration are able to send commands to your NetMatrix Monitor The commands typically tell your NetMatrix Monitor to connect to or disconnect from an image feed from a particular camera As part of the configuration your NetMatrix Monitor application may have been set up to automatically accept all received commands in which case new image feeds will automatically be displayed in your NetMatrix Monitor window If your NetMatrix Monitor has not been set up to automatically accept all received commands you will be prompted to accept all received commands before they are executed When a command is received a small dialog will be displayed in the bottom
2. J 4 Inthe Axis Setup section specify settings for the available axes With a joystick you are typically able to navigate camera images three dimensionally along three axes an X axis a Y axis and a Z axis where the Z axis typically refers to the depth zoom level 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 189 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Example X Y and Z axes e Invert By default a PTZ camera will move to the right when you move the joystick to the right along the X axis move up when you move the joystick towards you along the Y axis etc By selecting Invert you are able to change this to the opposite You are thus able to freely determine whether the camera should for example move up or down when you move the joystick towards you and away from you respectively e Absolute By default joystick control takes place based on a relative positioning scheme This means that moving a joystick will move the joystick controlled object based on the object s current position rather than based on any fixed position By selecting Absolute you are able to change this and use an absolute rather than a relative positioning scheme e Action Lets you select the required action for an axis Camera Pan Camera Tilt Camera Zoom or No action e Preview Lets you quickly test the effect of your selections When
3. eter be eo en cha E f D h min C Hrm D ihmi FE Mam recente databasa EEN Di kiia b Larp ii Sadaba mhie H badhi g o Mana Paahi ai Lah ie This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 7 Inthe All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 116 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Cetpin Seitings tar siaine Cara A Degas Chats Bira LH Chica riom He See iT Degree This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list which lists all outputs available for manual control when viewing live video from the camera in question Good to know e You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the NetDVMS system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list e An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way However due to space restrictions in the Monitor only the top eight outputs in the list will be available as output buttons in the Monitor In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS there are no such limitations e If you have specified several outputs in the On Manual Control list you are
4. O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 4 Select scaling for the HTML page either No scaling default or the required scaling 640x480 800x600 1024x768 or 1280x1024 5 Click the OK link e Renaming Groups To rename a group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required group in the Views section 2 Inthe Group Control section overwrite the existing name in the Group Name field 3 Click the Rename button e Deleting Groups Note Deleting a group will delete all views within the group as well To delete a group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required group in the Views section 2 Inthe Group Control section click the Delete button You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the group and all of its views e Renaming Views To rename a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required view in the Views section 2 Inthe View Control section overwrite the existing name in the View Name field 3 Click the Rename button e Deleting Views To delete a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required view in the Views section 2 Inthe View Control section click the Delete button You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the view e Adjusting Camera Settings In the Setup tab s Camera Control section you are able to adjust camera settings To adjust camera settings select the position of the required camera in
5. O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Shared but not private o None at all To quickly determine which types of groups your user rights permit you to create and edit views in do the following 1 Select NetGuard s Setup tab Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab If you are not able to access the Setup tab you are unable to create views 2 On the Setup tab look at the Views section The Group folders to which you do not have access will be indicated by padlock icons Consult your system administrator if in doubt about your user rights e Using Static I mages in Views You are not limited to using camera images in a view you are able to use static images such as GIF or JPEG as well To use a static image in a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s Static Image link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position When you release the mouse button the Choose File window opens letting you select the required static image file e Using HTML Pages in Views In addition to viewing camera images and static images in a view you are able to import HTML pages and display them in the view This way you are able to include company web pages intranet pages navigation pages link collections etc together with the camera images in the view Ghip When your imported HTML pa
6. e PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name Window s Sections Each of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections are described in the following e PTZ View Section The PTZ View section lets you control the PTZ camera and watch the PTZ camera s movements You use this section to move the PTZ camera to the positions you then define as presets positions in the Preset Positions section To move the PTZ camera simply click the required position in the preview picture The PTZ View section also features sliders allowing you to move the PTZ camera along each of its axes the X axis allowing you to pan left right the Y axis allowing you to tilt the camera up down and the Z axis enabling you to zoom in and out the camera will zoom in when you move the slider towards Tele and zoom out when you move the slider towards Wide As an alternative to clicking the required position in the preview or using the sliders you can use the PTZ camera navigation buttons Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left Moves the PTZ camera up Moves the PTZ camera up and to the right Moves the PTZ camera to the left Moves the PTZ camera to its home position rib bbs Moves the PTZ camera to the right 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 43 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Moves the PTZ camer
7. Note Which authentication method to select depends on how your user account has been specified on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e User name Only required if the authentication method Windows authentication or Basic authentication is selected If using Windows authentication type your Windows user name If using Basic authentication type your surveillance system user name as specified by your surveillance system administrator The user name is case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing for example amanda and Amanda e Password Only required if the authentication method Windows authentication or Basic authentication is selected If using Windows authentication type your Windows password If using Basic authentication type your surveillance system password exactly as specified by your surveillance system administrator e Remember password When using Windows authentication or Basic authentication you have the option of selecting Remember password in which case you can simply click Connect the next time you want to log in Note Depending on your type of organization and work environment security restrictions may apply Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about whether it is safe to use this feature e Auto login If selected you will automatically be logged in to the NetGuard EVS when you log in to Windows For some authentication metho
8. Specify which local directory the database for the camera should be kept in Example C Program Files mysurveillancesoftware To browse for a folder click the browse button next to the Database path field Chip If you have several cameras and several local drives are available performance can be improved by distributing the databases of individual cameras across the local drives Select which action to take if the database becomes corrupted The number of available actions depends on whether archiving has been enabled You enable archiving for a camera in the Archive setup window accessed from the Administrator window by clicking the Archive Setup button e Repair Scan Delete if fails Default action If the database becomes corrupted two different repair methods will be attempted a fast repair and a thorough repair If both repair methods fail the contents of the database will be deleted e Repair Delete if fails If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be deleted e Repair Archive if fails Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted a fast repair will be attempted If the fast repair fails the contents of the database will be archived This action is recommended if archiving is enabled for the camera e Delete no repair If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the da
9. 4 Inthe configuration page s Host IP field specify the IP address of the server running the NetPDA NetCell In the example in step 3 the IP address of the server is 192 168 128 10 5 Inthe Port field specify the port on which the PDA Server is running Default is 8080 6 Inthe Application field specify the virtual directory in which the PDA Server is installed on the IIS Default is PDAServer 7 Tap OK to store the configuration You are now ready to use your NetPDA NetCell Client see Using the NetPDA NetCell Client for more information Using the NetPDA NetCell Client The NetPDA NetCell Client is used for viewing live and recorded images from the NetDVMS surveillance system on a PDA or smartphone e Starting the NetPDA NetCell Client Start the NetPDA NetCell Client by tapping your PDA or smart phone s Start button selecting Programs then tapping the NetPDA NetCell Client icon e Logging In to the NetPDA NetCell Client To log in to the NetPDA NetCell Client do the following 1 On the NetPDA NetCell Client s opening page tap the LOG IN link This will open the login page 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 263 lt gt O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Login Name Password arg 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o Tay ow iele ti yet jolali CAP alalal tain jie titel saumt f e v
10. Changes the camera displayed in the selected view position to the position s default camera Changes the cameras displayed in all view positions to the positions default cameras Changes the selected view to the view with the matching shortcut number Example if the required view has the shortcut number 8 you would press 8 ENTER Note that view shortcut numbers may not necessarily be used If view shortcut numbers are used you will be able to see them in the Views section where they will appear in brackets before the views names Shared View shortcut numbers are defined on the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Moves the view position selection one step to the right 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 227 4 numeric keypad only 8 numeric keypad only 2 numeric keypad only lt gt O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual By pressing the 6 key on the numeric keypad the view position selection is shifted one step to the right Note that the selected view position is always highlighted by a lighter blue top bar Moves the view position selection one step to the left Moves the view position selection one step up Moves the view position selection one step down Logging Out of NetGuard EVS To log out of the NetGuard EVS simpl
11. O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual If You Log in for the First Time If you have logged in for the first time you need to determine whether any views exist Views determine how images from cameras are displayed in NetGuard and are thus required in order to be able to use NetGuard One or more views may already have been created for you or you may need to create views yourself Read more about views including how to determine if any views have already been created for you in Creating Views Logging in on Different Computers Your user settings are stored on the NetDVMS server This means that your login can be used on any computer that has a NetGuard installed Creating Views The way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed in NetGuard is called a view A view may contain images from up to 16 cameras A NetGuard can handle an unlimited number of views allowing you to switch between various collections of camera images In order to help you maintain an easy overview when you navigate between various views in your NetGuard all views are placed in folders called groups A group can contain any number of views Groups in turn can be private or shared Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by the user who created them whereas views placed in shared groups can be accessed by all NetGuard users connected to the NetDVMS server 4 5 Private Group i View 9 Shared Grou
12. Only one VMD event can be defined per camera In order to avoid the risk of an excessively high number of VMD events being generated a VMD event cannot occur more frequently than every five seconds The Add VMD Event Motion Detection button works slightly different depending on whether the selected device is a single camera device or a multi camera device such as a video server e Single camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will instantly add a VMD event to the selected device provided a VMD event has not already been defined for the device e Multi camera devices Clicking the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button will open a simple dialog in which you select the required camera This way you are able to define a VMD event for each camera on a multi camera device 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 72 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Edit selected Lets you edit the settings for an item selected in the Defined events list For devices capable of handling a single input event only the button will open the Edit Event window for editing input events For devices capable of handling several input events the button will open the Multiple Input Events window If the selected item is a timer event the button will open the New Timer window If the selected item is an outp
13. Page 153 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Server End Providing Access Through a NetPDA NetCell Client Use of the NetPDA NetCell Client requires that a matching PDA Server is installed on the surveillance system The NetPDA is installed on an Internet Information Services IIS server and is used as a front end to the NetDVMS system s Image Server on which user rights are defined The PDA Server handles login and session requests between the PDA Client and the Image Server The NetPDA also handles resizing of surveillance images to fit the screen layout of the PDA Client For more information see Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA Your organization s choice of remote access solution will depend on the organization s requirements e Deciding Which Remote Access Solution to Use When deciding which remote access solution is the best choice for your organization system administrators may find it helpful to review the following Note Systems and requirements differ from organization to organization The following questions and answers are thus for guidance only Has your surveillance system s recording server been installed as a service rather than as the Monitor application e Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer The NetGuard EVS offers functionality otherwise only available through the Monitor application e No Determine your needs based on the questions and answer
14. Play reverse Plays back recordings backwards in time Play forward Plays back recordings forward in time Stop Stops playback Tip Dragging the playback slider to its leftmost position pauses playback To automatically skip gaps in recordings during playback select the Skip gaps during playback check box Such gaps are primarily evident when a camera has relatively few recordings Go To Time The Time Navigation section s Go To Time fields let you quickly jump to a specific point in time Specify required date in the first field and required time in the second field then click the Go To button e Sequences The Browse tab s Sequences section provides you with an overview of recorded sequences for the camera selected in the view How to Browse Sequences To use the Sequences section select the required camera in the view then click the Sequences section s Get Sequences button Clicking the Get Sequences button will retrieve a list of up to 40 sequences 20 sequences prior to the point in time displayed in the view and 20 sequences following the point in time displayed in the view Each sequence will be listed with date and time as well as the length of the sequence Clicking a sequence in the list will move all images in the view to the time of the sequence If the Preview check box is selected you are able to quickly view each sequence by placing the mouse pointer over the required sequence in the list Clicking the expand ico
15. Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 57 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Colored Bars The calendar uses colored bars to indicate active periods for each option Online E mail SMS etc e Inthe Online bar active periods are indicated in either pink or yellow e Pink indicates that the selected camera is continuously transferring images to the NetDVMS software e 6 Yellow indicates that the selected camera transfers images to the NetDVMS software when a specified event occurs e Inthe E mail bar active periods are indicated in blue e e Inthe SMS bar active periods are indicated in green e Inthe Sound bar active periods are indicated in red e Inthe Patrolling bar active periods are indicated in gray e Camera Alerts Scheduler Window s Copy and Paste Buttons Button Description Copy Schedule Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section When used in combination with the Paste Schedule button you are able to quickly re use schedules from one camera to another Paste Schedule Lets you paste a copied schedule for use with the selected camera The same copied schedule can be pasted to several cameras simply by selecting and pasting to one camera after the other Grip If you want to use a schedule for all cameras specify a schedule for one camera then use the Copy and Paste to All button to copy
16. button will open the New Timer window e Associating Event Buttons with External Outputs As is the case with input events see External Input amp Output you are able to associate an event button with specific external outputs This way external output for example the sounding of a siren can be triggered automatically when an event button is clicked Like with input VMD and generic events the association between event buttons and outputs is made in the I O Control window Add New Event Window for Adding Event Buttons Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Add New Event window for adding event buttons lets you specify the settings for an event button dahi iira Bevel E bam li a ie Bune rari sae i mal tee DEn ne F ha i ee fee G i Pa ere ti tance The Add New Event window for specifying event buttons 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 85 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Access You access the Add New Event window for adding event buttons from the Event Buttons window Select an entry either global or for a specific camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button e Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for adding event buttons c
17. 123 80 ba uthenin siis m materiai A Lise nare Parvi ke Aapember parmwamd ima 4 Specify your login information in the following fields e Server address Type the URL or IP address specified by your surveillance system administrator Internet connections may use different ports for different purposes therefore the URL or IP address may include a port number example 123 123 123 123 80 where 80 indicates the port number If you have logged in before you may simply select the required server from the Server address 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 170 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual list e Authentication Lets you select between three types of authentication i e the process of verifying that you are who you claim you are o Windows authentication current user with which you will be authenticated through your current Windows login and do not have to specify any user name or password This is the NetGuard EVS s default authentication method i e the method which is automatically used unless you select another method o Windows authentication with which you will be authenticated through your Windows login but you will need to type your Windows user name and password o Basic Authentication with which you must specify a special user name and password for accessing the surveillance system
18. 13 Click the Export button to begin the export The status bar in the upper part of the export dialog will display the status of the export 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 219 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Export status bar hip If you are exporting very long sequences export may depending on your selected export settings take a while You can continue to use the NetGuard EVS for other purposes while the export process is underway If the Close On Completion check box is selected default the export dialog will automatically close when the export is finished Upon completion you are able to view and distribute the exported file _ Example AVI file viewed in the Winamp player other common players include the Windows Media Player and the RealPlayer e Exporting in Database Format To export video evidence in the NetDVMS database format do the following 1 Select the NetGuard EVS s Browse tab 2 Select the view on which you want to base your export Grip You do not necessarily have to include all of the selected view s cameras in your export later in the process you will be able to specify exactly what to include in the export 3 Inthe Browse tab s Export section specify when the period to be covered by the export should start You do t
19. Administrator includes master Slaves handling handling of local IP address ranges etc Very flexible rights for accessing individual NetGuard and camera features are determined ona per user basis Limited Systems on which installation of client software must be optional Systems on which a Net client solution is not desirable NetDVMS User Manual Very flexible configuration through lI mageServer Administrator includes master Slaves handling handling of local IP address ranges etc Very flexible choice of creating dedicated user accounts or importing users and groups of users from Active Directory rights for accessing individual NetGuard EVS and camera features can be determined ona per user or per group basis Net based thus offering a high degree of flexibility for integration of new features plugins etc The client solution of the future Systems on which the recording server has been installed as a service rather than as the Monitor application Systems on which a Net client solution is desirable Systems on which a high degree of flexibility e g use of remote access plugin features will be required Systems on which NetGuard EVS s Active Directory Support lets you leverage existing user accounts Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 156 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Specific Differences Betw
20. Define User Rights window in which you define access rights for each user e Log Files Section In the Log Files section specify the number of days to keep log files in the Image Server s regular event log By default such log files are kept for ten days before they are deleted hip Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging e Audit Log Section Audit logging is the logging of NetGuard and NetGuard EVS user actions If this type of logging is required select the Enable Audit Logging check box When audit logging is enabled you are able to specify the following values e Days to log Number of days in which audit log files should be kept before they are overwritten Default is 30 days If you specify O zero audit log files will be kept indefinitely disk storage Space permitting e Minimum Logging Interval Minimum number of seconds between logged events Specifying a high number of seconds between logged events may help reduce the size of the audit log Default is 60 seconds e In Sequence Timespan Maximum number of seconds to pass for viewed images to be considered to be within the same sequence Specifying a high number of seconds may thus help limit the number of viewed sequences logged and reduce the size of the audit log Default is ten seconds Grip Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging e Language Support and XML Encoding Section In the Language Support and XML Encoding section select the langu
21. Event substring Lets you specify the individual items for which NetDVMS should look out when analyzing data packages Specify one or more terms then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis Examples e Single term User001 when added to the Event message include field the term will appear as User001 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 90 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Several terms as one item User001 Door053 Sunday when added to the Event message include field the terms will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday When you add several terms as one item appearing as e g User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field everything between the quotation marks must appear together in the package in the specified sequence in order to match your criterion If the terms must appear in the package but not necessarily in any exact sequence add the terms one by one i e so they will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field Event message Displays the string which will be used for the actual package analysis include The field is not directly editable However you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine
22. Hide pane onclick top showPane false gt lt br gt lt input type button value Show top title onclick top showTopTitle true gt lt br gt lt input type button value Hide top title onclick top showTopTitle false gt lt br gt lt input type button value Set time to New Year s Eve onclick top setTime Dec 31 2005 2a as os or lt body gt lt html gt Ghip You may copy the HTML and modify it for an HTML page of your own When viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 250 lt gt O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Fle Edt Yew Favorites Tool Help Change to Group view SettinetoNewvearsEve HTML page with buttons for navigation We have saved the HTML page locally in this case on the user s C drive When the HTML page is to be used for navigation saving the HTML page locally is necessary because of security features in Internet Explorer When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations e Example of an
23. O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e m Add Hirer wert Ed bread aad ena Pat aaah etree lyri Fag Send ead Fo aed ar Pet Prien trl Deant aut jarak Eyer ory See TE F Dri eee E Eemi nis preg Dyert misting H ten eee Pial e Event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp e Event Protocol Select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for Any i e TCP as well as UDP TCP only or UDP only which port is used NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 e Event rule type Select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing received data packages Match if the received package must contain only the exact message specified in the Event message include field see description in the following Search if the received package must contain the message specified in the Event message include field but may also have other content e Event priority Specify a priority between O lowest priority and 1000 highest priority for the event in case a received data package matches more than one event e Event rule string Specify what NetDVMS should look out for when analyzing the data packages then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which is used when analyzing received data packages You are
24. The I O Setup window JAccess You access the I O Setup window by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window Note Before you specify inputs and outputs for a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check NetDVMS release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used e I O Setup Window s Defined Events List and Buttons The I O Setup window features a Defined events list in which input output and VMD Video Motion Detection events defined for each device are listed The window furthermore features a number of buttons for use when adding and configuring the events Button Description Add new Used for defining input events on the device selected in the Defined events list event Depending on the type of device you may be able to define one or more input events on the device Some devices do not support input output at all Refer to the release notes for device specific information Devices Capable of Handling One Input Event Only If the device is capable of handling one input event only the button will open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only in which you define the input event and any e mail or SMS alerts to be associated with it If you have already defined an input
25. camera start or stop transferring images to the surveillance system when an event button is clicked in the Monitor e As start and stop events for use in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window For example you can make a camera use a higher frame rate when an event button is clicked in the Monitor or you can use an event button for manually triggering PTZ preset positions on event e For triggering outputs Particular outputs can be associated with the clicking of an event button you do this in the I O Control window e For triggering event based e mail and or SMS alerts e In combinations For example the clicking of an event button could make a camera start transferring images to the surveillance system while two outputs are triggered and an e mail alert is sent to relevant people Event buttons can be global available for all cameras included in the Monitor or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected in the Monitor Event Buttons Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Event Buttons window lets you specify buttons for manually triggering events controlled activity When specified event buttons become available in the Monitor application and NetGuard EVS in the NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them f
26. gt Setup tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Application ShowSetup gt Chip For advanced users it is possible to create many other types of buttons using the approximately 100 different function calls available for the NetGuard EVS See NetGuard EVS Scripting for more information In the following we have created two shared groups in the NetGuard EVS We have called them Group1 and Group2 Each group contains two views called Viewl and View2 We have also created an HTML page with buttons allowing users to switch between our four different views as well as between two of the NetGuard EVS s tabs Live and Browse When viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 193 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual RAS aT ae Le Fic Edt wew Favorites Tods Hep E Bl DX GD An Beran QB A E ciidemohm gt E Goto Shand Group Wise Go to Sharad Group views Go to Shard Groupe wiil Goto Sharad Groupe wiew _ Show Live Tab Show Browse Tab Dene eee Co HTML page with buttons for navigating between views and tabs We have saved the HTML page locally in this case on the user s C drive When the HTML page is to be used for navigation saving the HTML page locally is necessary because of security features in Internet Explorer Whe
27. lt gt O n SS l On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Alarms Live NetDVMS User Manual Example of overview Likewise clicking the right button provides you with an overview of the next four sequences in which motion was detected with information about each sequence You are able to jump to a sequence by clicking the thumbnail image representing it Clicking the Overview link lets you browse the four sequence overviews For each click you are taken forward in time Lets you browse sequences from the recent database of the selected camera in which motion has been detected Alarms browsing is based on a list of the sequences Clicking the left arrow lets you browse back in time in a list of sequences in which motion was detected The list displays information about start time first motion detection alarm time and end time for each sequence By clicking the list s links you are able to jump to the images matching each sequence s start time first motion detection alarm time and end time rea i CELE EET EL ELH gt ELEF 2 a LUE ts 1 La pra Laie N eae Ts PT al LL ee be HEN FEF ibm hae HU Sue Pima Ssh ae Co AEI a LLL ee tet Ta leet ete T ULETE ELH ee en Oe ea SETE PETET EHE T LEB Pee ET Ste al ber Lie Example of Alarmslist Likewise clicking the right arrow lets you browse forward in time in a list of sequences in which motion was detected The list displays information about start time first motion de
28. method e Server End Providing Access through a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Images viewed by NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users are provided by the NetDVMS surveillance system s Image Server The Image Server runs as a service on the NetDVMS server it does not require separate hardware The NetDVMS system administrator uses the mage Server Administrator window to manage NetGuard and NetGuard EVS access to the surveillance system e Server End Providing Access Through Regular Browser As an alternative to using NetGuard or NetGuard EVS images can also be provided through the NetDVMS surveillance system s built in Web Server and Realtime Feed Server When this is the case remote users connect to the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server through a regular browser no client software is required The Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server do by no means offer as advanced functionality as the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS neither at the server end nor at the client end However if remote users are to access the surveillance system through very slow connections such as 28 8 Kbps connections using the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server may be advisable For a remote user perspective of regular browser access through the Web Server and Realtime Feed Server see Remote Access through Web and Realtime Feed Servers 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com
29. or from a custom made web page to the required NetMatrix Monitor e The images are sent to the required NetMatrix Monitor automatically when a predefined event occurs The Event tab is used for configuring the automatic sending of live images based on predefined events it lets you define exactly which events and cameras to use You define this on a per NetMatrix Monitor basis MoiMairiz Configuration Config Event Td Guard Station E fe Hotin on A i Carer HF Connect Ari 221 Camera Meta pn Sary AP Camera orn Pi feners 1 NetMatrix Configuration window s Event tab To define what should happen on which NetMatrix Monitor when an event occurs do the following 1 Select the required NetMatrix Monitor 2 Right click the NetMatrix Monitor to select the required event Bile Cartel Mena Bak Dox Cet Wira a b Evente Office Cam P l E E Motion on Back Door West Wing Carrera b CATETE In this example the selected event is detected motion on a particular camera Note that if available you are also able to select other types of event including input events generic events VMD events event buttons including global event buttons and timer events When you select an event it will initially be highlighted by a red exclamation mark GE Alam Cenia Display l Haak Doa rei z 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www
30. sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Output occur 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 67 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual TUS vetting Wea Emaii Sues ft DSN poten con is coe id cand FAH code HH cj PLE aig EMG Cental Phone tia Fipan Pigg Hy Bese Faget h gone Toon bia bpm 10 ere T wet m Ca The SMS settings window J Access To access the SMS settings window click the Sms Settings button in the Genera Settings window e Enabling SMS Alerts You enable the use of SMS alerts by selecting the Enable SMS check box Note When enabling the use of SMS alerts also consider the SMS alert schedules configured for each camera in the Camera Alert Scheduler window e Specifying SMS Alert Settings Having selected the Enable SMS check box specify SMS alert settings in the following fields e GSM modem con to Select port connecting the computer running NetDVMS to the GSM modem e SIM card PIN code Specify PIN code for the SIM card inserted in the GSM modem e SIM card PUK code Specify PUK code for the SIM card inserted in the GSM modem e SMS Central Phone No Specify the number of the SMS central to which the GSM modem should connect in order to send an SMS e Recipient Phone No Specify th
31. the Delete button When removed from the list the user will no longer be able to log in 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 164 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Note Using this method to delete a Windows user imported from Active Directory will only remove the user s right to log in with the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS or if applicable NetPDA NetCell Client it will not remove the user s data from Active Directory e What Information to Provide to Users The information you need to provide in order to enable users to effortlessly log in to the surveillance system depends on whether the users are using NetGuards or NetGuard EVSs For PDA Client users see Using the NetPDA NetCell Client NetGuard Users When users log in with NetGuards they will use basic authentication Provide them with the following information User name Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it clear to the users if any parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case Password Users should enter their passwords exactly as you have specified them on the I mage Server Address P address or hostname of the Image Server Port Port to use when accessing the Image Server e g 80 NetGuard EVS Users When users log in with NetGuard EVSs they must select between using basic or Windows Active Direct
32. 229 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e How does the NetGuard Differ from the NetGuard EVS For a description of how the NetGuard differs from The NetGuard EVS see Remote Access Overview Downloading and Installing the NetGuard e Downloading and Installing the NetGuard If you wish to download and install the NetGuard do the following 1 Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator in order to connect to the NetDVMS server When you connect to the NetDVMS server you will see a welcome page 2 Inthe NetGuard section of the welcome page click the Download and install NetGuard locally link 3 Depending on your security settings you may receive a security warning Do you want to run or save this file When this is the case click the Run button 4 Depending on your security settings you may receive a further security warning Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button 5 The NetGuard Setup Wizard begins In the wizard click Next and follow the installation instructions Accessing NetGuard Accessing and configuring the NetGuard is very straightforward Even first time users will typically be able to start and set up their NetGuard in a matter of minutes Access The NetGuard may either be installed locally on the remote user s computer or it may be run fr
33. 83 POU TSI CITONS ooie A A AAA A E E E se a 83 Eyen t BULONS VV VIO sessen E A E EE 83 Add New Event Window for Adding Event ButtonS sesssssesssesssrssriesriessrersreesrrrssrirsrreserersrresn 85 Edit Event Window for Editing Event ButtonS eesesssssesseseseessreesressriessressressrressressrresereseriressressre 86 Generic Events Generic Events WINdKOW eesssssssssssssesssressressresssressreesrressressriessressriessressreeseressreessrese 88 Add New Event Window for Specifying Generic Events e eessssessreerrrssrreerersrressrrrsrrrssrererresn 89 Edit Event Window for Editing Generic Events 0 0 cece ccccccccesccesssccessscesssscesssecsssssesessseseaees 93 I O Control 1 0 Control WINKOW u 0 cece ccc ccceccccsscccssecesssecesssecssssccessecssssecesssccesssceessscessssceeseeeseaeas 98 Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name WINdOW 0ec cece ceeessceeseseeeseeeees 99 How to Add an Input BaSed EVe ntaui cee ccccsccccesssccessssscesssssccesesscesssssccsssssscsssssecessssesessaeees 101 HOW EO AGG an Event BUTEO sscccccssstcccscccrcaczccsvessesqoneasaeaaudsangarteabisansasnisausccsteansd besser enbiaaautonasaonausantianeaans 103 How to Add a VMD EV GIG seccsccscnccstccsceczecacaeondatecetsacsecaseteeieecxeaeeceoedutaczeyecacdbovdasbenavsebeesiudabacetasabacbduacehdaceesten 105 How to Add a Generic Ev nt eeseseeseeseeesseesseessressreessressresssrsssressrressresstsssresstsssteestsssteesressreeesreeseeees 107 HOW
34. A new group is created The new group is simply named New Group 4 Overwrite the default name New Group with a group name of your choice You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View within the Group To create a view in a group do the following 5 Inthe Setup tab s Views section make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected 2 Click the Create New View button Create New View button Select the required layout for your new view ixi zeg i Wide Era 1 Tae 1 5 1 3 Wide bab Sos 4x3 Wide 404 J Eke 2 4 Vide Example Selecting view layout You are able to select layouts for displaying up to 64 8x8 cameras in a single view Qhip Some of the selectable view layouts are marked Wide These view layouts are especially suitable for widescreen monitors A new view is created under the group you selected The new view carries the default name New View plus an indication of the selected layout 5 Overwrite the default name with a view name of your choice You are now able to add cameras to the view hip A group can contain an unlimited number of views You may also create any number of subgroups if required Chip For information about adding content cameras etc to views see How to Add Content to Views 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 176 O n SS On Net Surve
35. AVIs movie clips J PEGs still images as well as database files Tip The NetGuard EVS supports use of multiple windows This is especially useful if your computer has more than one physical display attached but from the Live and Browse tabs you can send individual views to separate windows as well This way you can watch more than one view at a time See Using Multiple Windows for more information e Selecting a View You are basically able to select a view for display on the Browse tab in two ways e By selecting the required view in the Browse tab s Views section e By selecting the required view from the Views list located in the upper part of the window Tip If views have been assigned shortcut numbers see How to Create amp Manage Views you will also be able to select a view by using keyboard shortcuts see Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts e Image Bars and Green Indicators Each camera in the view is identified by an image bar located in the top of each camera image The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name When images are displayed the image bar furthermore shows the date and time of the displayed image The image bar is dark blue When you select a particular camera in the view the image bar of the selected camera position becomes a lighter blue Dark blue
36. Also make sure that the camera for which you configured the event notification is displayed in your Monitor NetGuard or NetGuard EVS In Windows Start menu select Run and type the following in the Open field e If you are performing the test on the NetDVMS server itself telnet localhost 1234 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 110 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e If you are performing the test from a remote computer Substitute localhost with the IP address of the NetDVMS server Example If the IP address of the NetDVMS server is 123 123 123 123 type telnet 123 123 123 123 1234 Note In the above examples the number 1234 indicates the port on which the NetDVMS server listens for generic events Port 1234 is the default port for this purpose but it is possible to change this by specifying another port number in the Advanced window s Alert Port field If the alert port number has been changed on your system type your system s alert port number instead of 1234 This will open a Telnet window 7 Inthe Telnet window type the term so called event substring required to trigger your generic event In our case the required term is video a Telnet localhost 5 x While typing in the Telnet window you may experience so called echo This is simply the server repeating some or all of the characters
37. Basically the surveillance system administrator is able to restrict a user s rights to the following Access to the NetGuard EVS Access to each of the NetGuard EVS s tabs Live Browse and Setup Ability to use features on the NetGuard EVS s tabs Ability to create views views determine the way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed e Ability to view images from specific cameras The ability to use various features of the NetGuard EVS may therefore vary considerably from user to user Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about your user rights e How does the NetGuard EVS Differ from the NetGuard For a description of how the NetGuard EVS differs from The NetGuard see Remote Access Overview 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 169 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Download Installation amp Login Downloading and Installing NetGuard EVS The NetGuard EVS must be installed on your computer before you are able to use it Typically you download the NetGuard EVS from the NetDVMS server then install it on your computer Alternatively your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install the NetGuard EVS from a CD e Downloading and Installing the NetGuard EVS To download and install the NetGuard EVS do the following 1 Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or
38. Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected Path By default event log files are stored in the folder containing the NetDVMS software To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder Days to Keep A new event log file is created every day Event log files older than the number of days specified in the Days to keep field are automatically deleted By default event log files will be stored for five days To specify another number of days simply overwrite the value in the Days to keep field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of 0 in the Days to keep field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 thip Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging e Advanced The Advanced section lets you specify a number of additional settings Check Box Disable Screen i nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server Update has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Turns off screen update in the Monitor application If selected all camera image
39. Close the Internet Information Services and Administrative Tools windows if still open 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 8 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e NetPDA NetCell Client Operating System Microsoft Windows Pocket PC 2003 2003 SE Mobile 5 0 CPU Intel StrongARM or 100 compatible RAM Minimum 32 MB Network Ethernet 256 Kbit or higher recommended Graphics Card Minimum 320x200 16 bit colors e NetMatrix Monitor Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Server and Advanced Server Windows XP Professional 32 and 64 bit or Windows Server 2003 32 and 64 bit CPU Intel P3 or higher minimum 1 0 GHz RAM Minimum 256 MB Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended Graphics Card AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024x768 16 bit colors Hard Disk Space 50 MB free Installation Installing NetDVMS Note Read the End User License Agreement on the Product License Sheet enclosed with the software CD before installing NetDVMS To install NetDVMS do the following Prerequisites Shut down any existing software running including any Web and Realtime Feed Servers If upgrading it is highly recommended that you remove any previous versions before upgrading 1 Insert the NetDVMS software CD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetDVMS
40. Defined Cameras list select each camera to which the user group should have access via the NetGuard NetGuard EVS Chip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting cameras in the Defined Cameras list you are able to select several or all of the listed cameras in one go 4 Click the gt gt button to move the selected cameras to the Viewable by selected user list 5 For each camera now listed in the Viewable by selected user list specify the features to which the user group should have access by selecting the features in the User Rights for the Selected Camera section Note that the features are listed in two columns the left column lists features related to live viewing the right column lists features related to browsing existing recordings In the Live column the following features all selected by default are available e Live Ability to view live images from the selected camera e PTZ Ability to use NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s navigation features for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras A user group will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras e PTZ Preset Positions Ability to use NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s navigation features for moving a PTZ camera to particular preset positions A user group will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras with defined preset positions e Outputs Ability to trigger outputs e g switching on lig
41. E EA 294 WEB SERVER LOG FILES cpcrniytatus iea e a a r i eE 294 REMOVAL 296 REMOVING NetGuard EVS sazccccsccacsccscececesctecndtecetiacdecacetericecctade Vadedacadebindedbiudasiceadectedaowsabacedbbalacdosaceddacteadads 296 REMOVE NBN Ko1 Gl 0 co go aE nen en este ee nn nr oe Avan sea One en ender eee 296 Removing the NetPDA NetCell Software ec cccccccsssccesssccesssccesssccsssscssssscsssscesssseesseeneas 296 Removing the NetMatrix Monitor Application uu eee ccecccccssccesssccessscessssccsssscsssscessseessseneas 297 COPYRIGHT TRADEMARKS E UC iiscsescciscsssccsessccsccssessiesesscesceciscsscssezsscivenscsscesscasesseescanteasscenicenssenicenasseesiedes 298 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 5 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Introductions Product Overview With the purchase of NetDVMS you have chosen the right product for medium to large installations wanting robust surveillance software with full functionality for advanced management flexible scheduling fast searching and analysis NetDVMS is e Compatible with a wide range of different IP video products from the leading manufacturers so you choose the hardware you want in combinations too e Dependable with robust and stable performance proven in operation on thousands of cameras worldwide e Flexible with remote access features that let you use the sur
42. HTML Page with I mage Map Navigation You may also create an HTML page with more advanced content for example an image map allowing users to switch between views In the following example we have kept the two groups and two views from the previous example Instead of using buttons we have created an HTML page with an image of a floor plan and created an image map based on the floor plan Viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this fie lo fe fees OG E i D wd ae Dee ieee Gree Bp A Pe Ao cai g B e a ee a LE oe sc _ Frnt lead preset mer prs nero de beer bel o_o ane eee OnSSI City 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 251 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual HTML page with image map for navigating between views How you structure and create an image map is of course highly individual For this example we divided the floor plan into colored zones and defined an image map area for each zone This way users will be able to simply click a zone in order to go to the view displaying cameras from that zone For instance the red zone on our image map mirrors the Change to Group2 View2 button from the previous example When clicking the red zone users will go to View2 in Group2 e Importing the HTML Page Importing an HTML page for navigation is no different from importing any other type of HTML page into a vi
43. In the list select a camera and drag the camera to the required position in the view When you have dragged a camera to a position in the view the name of the camera will appear in the selected position You will not see images from the camera yet as the Setup tab is only for configuration not for viewing images Repeat for each camera required in the view Chip If you want to use all of the cameras under a server you may simply drag the required server to the view this will automatically place all of the server s cameras in the view beginning at the selected position Remember to have sufficient positions available in the view Chip You can always change the cameras in your view Either drag the System Overview section s Clear link to a position in the view to clear the position or simply overwrite a position by dragging a different camera to the position 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 234 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 4 You are now able to use your view You may your user rights permitting select the view on the Live tab see Viewing Live Images and on the Browse tab see Viewing Recorded Images hip In addition to cameras you are able to add static images and HTML pages to views See Further Configuration e Creating Views in Shared Groups To create view in a shared group you first create
44. On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Example Many results match the criterion User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday Remove Lets you remove the item immediately to the left of a cursor positioned in the Event message include field If no cursor has been positioned in the Event message include field the last item in the field will be removed e Notification Settings Section The Edit Event window for editing generic events contains the following fields in the Notificationsettings section Field Description Send Email if Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event occurs this event occurs Include image Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected from camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs this event occurs When you have edited the generic event click OK 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 97 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual I O Control I O Control Window In the I O Control window you are able associate particular events and event buttons with one or more particular outputs This way you are able to define that when
45. On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual NetMatrix Monitor NetMatrix Monitor Introduction NetMatrix is an integrated product allowing distributed viewing of video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS A computer on which NetMatrix triggered images can be shown is known as a NetMatrix Monitor Being able to view NetMatrix triggered images requires that the NetMatrix Monitor application is installed on the computer b ees eel ee ee l ie a LF Example Viewing images in the NetMatrix Monitor application Grip A NetGuard EVS may also be used as a NetMatrix Monitor without the need for any additional software There are two ways in which NetMatrix triggered images can appear on a NetMatrix Monitor e Another user wants to share important images and sends them from the surveillance system s Monitor application from a NetGuard EVS or from a custom made web page to the required NetMatrix Monitor e The images are sent to the required NetMatrix Monitor automatically when a predefined event occurs for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened or when the surveillance system detects motion in the images from a camera As part of the image exchange between computers on the NetDVMS NetMatrix system other computers exactly which computers are defined as part of the NetMatrix configuration are able to send commands to NetMatrix Monitors The commands typically tell the NetM
46. Server 2003 32 and 64 bit CPU Intel P4 or higher Xeon recommended minimum 2 4 GHz RAM Minimum 1 GB Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Graphics Card AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024x768 16 bit colors Hard Disk Type E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 rpm or faster Hard Disk Space 80 GB free depends on number of cameras and recording settings Software DirectX 9 0 or newer required to run the live view Monitor application To run the NetPDA the following is required Internet Information Services IIS 5 0 or later as well as Microsoft Net Framework 1 1 hip To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer click Start select Run and type dxdiag When you click OK the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab Should the server require a DirectX update the latest versions of DirectX are available from http www microsoft com downloads ip Information about how to verify install Microsoft Net Framework and IIS versions is available in Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 7 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual NetGuard EVS NetGuard e NetPDA NetCell Server The NetPDA NetCell Server is typically installed on the surveillance system server see the system requirements for the surveillance s
47. Stops all cameras When all cameras are stopped no images are transferred to NetDVMS from any of the cameras Output Displays all available output buttons for the selected camera Output buttons are used for manually triggering external output for example for switching on lights sirens or similar When Output is selected Output button depressed any output buttons for the selected camera will be displayed below the Events button Simply click an output button to trigger the associated output ipa E varii LUMEA 2 Dupi H 3 Dupa E QupeD H Ouiput E DupaF T Dupi B uput H Example of output buttons Up to eight output buttons can be displayed for each camera Output buttons are defined in the Administrator application Ask your system administrator if in doubt about using output buttons defined for use with cameras in your organization Events Displays all available event buttons for the selected camera Depending on configuration event buttons can be used for a wide variety of purposes including triggering combinations of actions For example the clicking of an event button could make a camera use a higher frame rate trigger two different outputs and send an e mail alert to three different recipients Event buttons can be global available for all cameras in the Monitor or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected in the Monitor When Events is selected Events button depresse
48. Tan Nestracet Sating Fip Server Pot 21 SMTP Fot 25 Poling Frequency 1 10 sec 10 CE ee The Advanced window access You access the Advanced window by clicking the Advanced button in the O Setup window e Advanced Window s Fields The Advanced window contains the following fields Field Description Ftp Server Port Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the device to the surveillance system via FTP Default port is port 21 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 81 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Alert Port Lets you specify port number to use for handling event based alerts including generic events Default port is port 1234 SMTP Port Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information from the device to the surveillance system via SMTP Default port is port 25 Polling For a small number of devices primarily I O devices see Using Dedicated O Frequency Devices it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the state 1 10 sec of the devices input ports in order to detect whether input has been received Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling The Polling Frequency field lets you specify the interval between state checks Interval is specified in tenths of a second Default value is 10 tenths of a
49. Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 130 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Monitor Application Monitor Application Orhe Monitor application is installation dependent and available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If installed the Monitor application is used for recording and displaying recordings from connected cameras with optional indications of registered activity Depending on user rights and configuration the Monitor may also be used for controlling PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras for manually starting and stopping cameras for manually triggering outputs etc From the Monitor you also have access to the Viewer with which you are able to browse and play back recordings print images send images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats The exact look and functionality of the Monitor depends on how the Monitor has been configured in the Administrator application Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Accessing the Monitor Access You access the Monitor application by double clicking the Monitor desktop
50. What is an Event Indication In the Monitor and NetGuard NetGuard EVS three different color indicators are available for each camera a yellow indicator a red indicator and a green indicator When event indication is used for a camera the yellow indicator will light up when the specified events have occurred Event indications can be valuable for camera operators as they will be able to quickly detect that an event has occurred even though their focus was perhaps on something else the moment the event occurred Available indicators the yellow indicator serves as the event indicator Ghip The other two indicators serve the following purposes The red indicator lights up when motion has been detected and the green indicator is used for indicating that images are received from a camera e Specifying Events for which Event Indication Should Be Used To specify which events should trigger an event indication for the camera do the following for each required event 1 Inthe Available Events list select the required event Grip You are not limited to events associated with a particular device You are able to select between all available events input events timer events event buttons from all cameras on the NetDVMS surveillance system 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected event to the Active Events list When an event listed in the Active Events list occurs the event indicator will light up 3 Repeat for each re
51. a bold border then make the adjustments in the Properties section nm Properties Camera Name IFK Camera 1 Image Quality Full Frame Rate Unlirnited IPIS Split Mode One by One CO Maintain Image Aspect Ratio C Only update image on motion Sound on Motion Detection Always off Sound on Evert Always off Example Setup tab s Properties section e Camera Name The Camera Name field displays the name of the selected camera The field is read only e Image Quality The Image Quality setting determines the quality of the images when viewed but also affects bandwidth usage If the NetGuard EVS is used over the internet over a slow network connection or if for other reasons you need to limit bandwidth use image quality can be reduced on the server side by selecting e g Low or Medium Grip You can quickly reduce the bandwidth usage for all cameras in the view by reducing the image quality for a single camera then clicking the Apply To All button e Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the selected camera Select between Unlimited default Medium 25 of original frame rate or Low one frame per second 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 186 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e IPIX Split Mode Available only if the selected camera is an IPIX camera IPIX is a te
52. application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected the camera s images will only be updated in the Monitor when motion is detected Disabled Cameras are by default enabled meaning that images from the cameras are by default transferred to NetDVMS provided that the cameras are marked as online also default in the Camera Alert Scheduler window If required you can disable the camera When the camera is disabled no images will be transferred from the camera to NetDVMS Note If the Monitor application is installed and images from a camera are displayed in the Monitor application configured in the Monitor Manager window the camera cannot be disabled When this is the case remove the camera from the Monitor Manager window s layout before disabling the camera ip Individual cameras can also be disabled enabled in the Administrator window s Device Manager section 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 28 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Audio Source In the Audio source section you are able to associate an audio source with the selected camera Note The ability to associate an audio source with the selected camera requires that at lea
53. button When previewing the IPIX rendered view the following navigation buttons become available for moving around within the preview image area Moves the IPIX rendered view up and to the left Moves the IPIX rendered view up Moves the IPIX rendered view up and to the right Moves the IPIX rendered view to the left Moves the IPIX rendered view to its home position Moves the IPIX rendered view to the right Moves the IPIX rendered view down and to the left Moves the IPIX rendered view down Moves the IPIX rendered view down and to the right Zoom out one zoom level per click PRERRREEEEE Zoom in one zoom level per click 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 49 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Ceiling Mounted Cameras If the camera is mounted on a ceiling you can adjust the behavior of the navigation buttons to reflect this by selecting the Ceiling Mount check box Setting a View as Home Position When previewing the IPI X rendered view you are able to set a particular position in the IPI X rendered view as the camera s PTZ home position Navigate to the required position using the navigation buttons then click the Set View as Home Position button e Image Resolution Image resolution values are automatically displayed in the lower part of the window next to the navigation buttons When using IPIX image
54. by smart search by dragging in the image When the Deselect check box is cleared areas you select in the image will be included in the smart search When the Deselect check box is selected areas you select in the image will be excluded from the smart search e Image Overlay Select check box to display the blue image overlay grid indicating areas excluded from the search e Motion in Image Select check box to highlight found motion in images e Digital I mage Control and Optimization With the Viewer s Image Controls control panel you are able to adjust the image selected in the camera layout The Image Controls control panel also lets you view areas of the selected image in greater magnification To access the Image Controls control panel click the Image Controls icon in the toolbar kc Image Controls icon IF O Saah eges No Deinterlseng r _ a Msi ajii a Image Controls control panel De interlacing Interlacing is a method determining how an image is refreshed when shown on a screen With interlacing the image is refreshed by first scanning every other line in the image then scanning every opposite line and so forth This allows for a faster refresh rate because less information must be processed during each scan However in some situations interlacing may cause flickering or the changes in only half of the image s lines for each scan may be noticeable If images from the selected camera are interlaced you are
55. camera selected in the view lt Previous image Moves to the image just before the one currently viewed gt Next image Moves to the image just after the one currently viewed a Previous sequence Moves to the first image in the previous sequence P Next sequence Moves to the first image in the following sequence First image Moves to the first image in the database for the selected camera Last image Moves to the last image in the database for the selected camera Time Sliders The Time Navigation section s time sliders let you browse recordings simply by dragging the sliders handles Drag to the left to move backwards in time drag to the right to move forward in time Use the upper times slider for fine browsing within a limited period of time use the lower slider for more coarse browsing within longer time spans Playback Slider and Buttons The Time Navigation section s playback slider lets you specify the required playback speed In the slider s middle position playback speed is real time 1 00x Drag the slider to the left for a slower playback speed drag to the right for a faster playback speed An indication of the exact playback speed is displayed in the upper right corner of the Time Navigation section s Master Time area Use the playback buttons to play back recordings Play reverse Plays back recordings backwards in time gt Play forward Plays back recordings forward in time Stop S
56. described in the following will not be available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Clicking the PTZ Menu button in the Monitor application s control panel gives you access to a menu for controlling a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera selected in the Monitor s camera layout 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 136 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Example of PTZ Menu with preset position buttons e PTZ Menu s Navigation Buttons The PTZ Menu s navigation buttons let you move the PTZ camera in steps Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left Moves the PTZ camera up Moves the PTZ camera up and to the right Moves the PTZ camera to the left Moves the PTZ camera to its home position Moves the PTZ camera to the right Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left Moves the PTZ camera down TUTTI TT Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right e PTZ Menu s Zoom Buttons and Slider With the PTZ Menu s zoom buttons you are able to control the zoom level of the PTZ camera Zoom out one zoom level per click a ja al Zoom in one zoom level per click As an alternative to using the zoom buttons use the slider located below the two zoom buttons to control the zoom level Note that the slider can be used only with absolute positioning PTZ cameras o
57. else e Search In order for the event to occur the received package must contain the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field but may also have more content Example If you have specified that the received package should contain the terms User001 and Door053 the event will be triggered if the received package contains the terms User001 and Door053 and Sunday as your required terms are contained in the received package Event priority The same data package may be analyzed for different events The ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria for several events The priority must be specified as a number between 0 lowest priority and 1000 highest priority When NetDVMS receives a TCP and or UDP package analysis of the packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority This way when a package matches the criteria for several events only the event with the highest priority will be triggered In case a package matches the criteria for several events with an identical priority e g two events with a priority of 999 all events with the priority in question will be triggered e Event Rule String Section The Add New Event window for specifying generic events contains the following fields and buttons in the Event rule string section Field Button
58. event For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the timer event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 113 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual How to Add a Manually Controlled Output Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered manually when viewing live video in the Monitor as well as the NetGuard Client and NetGuard EVS e Inthe Monitor the output can be triggered by first selecting a camera for which manual output has been defined then clicking the Monitor s Output button which provides access to up to eight buttons representing the defined output Clicking the required button will trigger the output e Inthe NetGuard and NetGuard EVS the output is triggered by selecting the required output from a list on the client s Live tab The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the specific camera from which Monitor and NetGuard NetGuard EVS view live video the output can be connected to any device on your NetDVMS system To add an output for manual control do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button MeV ES Adminai Dicer a Haam T Pied Coreen M Heke This will open the I O Setup window 2 Inthe I O Set
59. event on a device capable of handling one input event only the Add new event button will not be available when the device is selected in the Defined events list However if you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select the defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events see Timer Events in the following Devices Capable of Handling Several Input Events If the device is capable of handling more than one input event the button will 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 71 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual open the Multiple Input Events window in which you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input events Timer Events When you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events list and select a defined input event the Add new event button becomes available for defining timer events When clicked the button will open the New Timer window in which you are able to specify the settings for timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the input event under which they are defined Timer events may be used for a
60. events Jaccess You access the Add New Event window for specifying generic events from the Generic Events window by clicking the Add new event button The Add New Event window for specifying generic events is divided into three sections e General Event Settings Section The Add New Event window for specifying generic events contains the following fields in the General Event settings section Field Description Event Name Lets you specify a name for the event Each event must have a unique name Event Protocol Lets you select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for in order to detect the event e Any Listen for and analyze packages using TCP as well as UDP protocol 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 89 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e TCP Listen for and analyze packages using TCP protocol only e UDP Listen for and analyze packages using UDP protocol only 2 which port is used NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 Event rule type Lets you select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing received data packages e Match In order for the event to occur the received package must contain exactly the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field and nothing
61. events list and select a defined event you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window If dealing with event buttons in the Event Buttons window When selecting an already specified event button in the Defined Events list you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window If dealing with TCP and or UDP based events in the Generic Events window When selecting an already specified event in the Defined Events list you are able to click the Add new event button to access the New Timer window e New Timer Window s Fields The New Timer window contains the following fields Field Description Timer event is Read only field displaying the name of the event or event button under which the started by timer event is defined Timer event Lets you specify a name for the timer event name Timer event Lets you specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurs after occurring event button being clicked and the timer event Specify the required amount of time in either seconds or minutes Examples e The timer event should occur 15 seconds after the event under which it is defined has occurred e The timer event should occur 2 minutes after the event button under which it has been defined has been clicked Add New Output Window The Add New Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device dd blew Ota HEJ mirad ii r
62. example will log in to http ourserver with the current Windows user then minimize the NetGuard EVS application lt ScriptEngine gt lt Login gt lt ServerAddress gt http ourserver lt ServerAddress gt lt AuthenticationType gt WindowsDefault lt AuthenticationType gt lt Login gt lt ScCriptescS Application Minimize lt Seripr gt lt ScriptEngine gt Format 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 198 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Valid parameter formats are rir pate r i eT value Examples UserName Tommy UserName Tommy UserName Tommy Username Tommy Password Tommy Day to Day Use Viewing Live Images Live viewing takes place in NetGuard EVS through the NetGuard EVS s Live tab When you select the NetGuard EVS s Live tab the NetGuard EVS will connect to the NetDVMS server and display live video from the cameras in the selected view hip The NetGuard EVS supports use of multiple windows This is especially useful if your computer has more than one physical display attached but from the Live and Browse tabs you can send individual views to separate windows as well This way you can watch more than one view at a time See Using Multiple Windows for more information e Selecting a View You are basically able to select a view for display on the Live tab in two
63. field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password TOmMy5Pa55wO0rD AuthenticationType Simple From the user s point of view the called login dialog would look like this Lome te aren hos RA ba Band Aus ator usec _ Remember parvi If we were to use Windows authentication the example would be Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password TOmMy5Pa55wOrD AuthenticationType Windows If we were to use Windows authentication current user the UserName and Password parameters would not be necessary and the example would look like this Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver AuthenticationType WindowsDefault Script Refers to a full path to an scs script a script type targeted at controlling the NetGuard EVS The following example uses an scs script to login Client exe Script c startup scs Example of an scs script for logging in to http ourserver with the current Windows user lt ScriptEngine gt lt Login gt lt ServerAddress gt http ourserver lt ServerAddress gt lt AuthenticationType gt WindowsDefault lt AuthenticationType gt lt Login gt lt ScriptEngine gt You are able to use many of the NetGuard EVS s function calls see Viewing a List of Possible Function Calls elsewhere in this topic to add further functionality to scs scripts In the following example we have added a line so the scs script from the previous
64. have specified that images should be stored conditionally on event with a start event called Door Opened and a stop event called Door Closed With a pre post buffer of three seconds images will be stored from three seconds before Door Opened occurs to three seconds after Door Closed occurs e iIPIX Note Functionality in the iPIX section is only available if the use of IPIX technology has been enabled for the device to which the camera is attached For dedicated IPIX cameras the use of IPIX technology is automatically enabled If not dealing with a dedicated IPIX camera you enable use of IPI X technology for a device in the Edit device settings window accessed by selecting the required device in the Administrator wincow s Device Manager section then clicking the Administrator window s Edit Device button The iPIX section contains the following fields and buttons Enable iPI X Select check box to enable the use of IPIX a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced fish eye lens on the particular camera iPI X Settings Opens the iP X Camera Configuration window in which you configure the camera s IPIX functionality e Database Settings The Database Settings section lets you specify database settings for the camera such as where the database containing the camera s recordings should be kept how much to store etc You specify this information in the following fields Ghip By using archivin
65. image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 Inthe I O Setup window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing Add Pre pe ad dopi aN T ega es Petes isha ral Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 102 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual How to Add an Event Button Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stop
66. image stream while maintaining the last few previously received image streams in your view as well The positions ranking is applied automatically the first NetMatrix position you add to the view will automatically be the view s primary NetMatrix position the next one you add will automatically be the secondary one etc If required you can manually change the NetMatrix positions ranking in the Setup tab s Properties section Always latest stream Secondary position Always previous stream Tertiary position Always stream received before stream in 2 lt w EUC Example In this 1 3 view the large position has been defined at the primary NetMatrix position 1 and the three other positions as secondary 2 tertiary 3 etc The latest received image stream will always be shown in position 1 the image stream received before that will always be shown in position 2 and so on The choice of positions is an example only you are of course able to freely determine which of the view s positions should be primary secondary etc To add NetMatrix content to a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s NetMatrix link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position Grip Note that the position gets a thin blue border The blue border indicates that the position is used for NetMatrix content the blue border will also be evident when using
67. in the Old password field Specify the new administrator password in the New password field Repeat the new administrator password in the New password confirm field Click OK 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 63 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Joystick Setup Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights a nstallation dependent window Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this window is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Joystick Setup window lets you configure joystick control of PTZ cameras in the Monitor application J oystick configuration control requires that a joystick is attached to the computer running NetDVMS Mamcia a Bi eal BE ee ed Be ee d ee F Fi mrii ee Se or ee niar tne as da DE s EF The Joystick Setup window Daccess To access the Joystick Setup window click the J oystick Setup button in the General Settings window The Joystick Setup window is divided into two sections a Joystick Axes section and a Joystick Buttons section e Joystick Axes Secti
68. interconnected servers the message may also occur if the server from which you are requesting the camera s recordings is temporarily unavailable If the problem persists consult your surveillance system administrator e No images available for Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number Database might be empty Will appear on Browse tab only Indicates that it is not possible to show images from the camera the very likely reason being that there are no recordings in the camera s database Bear in mind that the settings determining when recordings from the camera are stored in the database are determined by the surveillance system administrator Sometimes the surveillance system administrator may specify that recordings should only be stored within particular time periods or when particular events occur This may explain why you are perhaps able to view live images from the camera on the NetGuard EVS s Live tab while at the same time you may find that no recordings have been stored for viewing on the NetGuard EVS s Browse tab e No motion Indicates that motion is currently not detected in the camera s images the images you see will not be updated until there is motion This message will only appear if the surveillance system administrator has specified that images should only be updated when there is motion a feature which can help reduce server load and bandwidth consumption Consult your surveillance system administrator if in do
69. later and connect to the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator in order to connect to the NetDVMS server When you connect to the NetDVMS server you will see a welcome page 2 In the NetGuard EVS section of the welcome page click the Download and install NetGuard EVS locally link 3 Depending on your security settings you may receive a security warning Do you want to run or save this file When this is the case click the Run button 4 Depending on your security settings you may receive a further security warning Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button 5 The NetGuard EVS Setup Wizard begins In the wizard click Next and follow the installation instructions Logging in to NetGuard EVS Logging in to the NetGuard EVS is very straightforward So is the initial configuration of the NetGuard EVS upon your first login in fact configuration may in some cases not be required at all To log in to the NetGuard EVS do the following 1 Double click the NetGuard EVS shortcut on your desktop If no NetGuard EVS desktop shortcut is available select the NetGuard EVS from Windows Start menu exactly how you do this is determined by where and how you have installed the NetGuard EVS on your computer 2 A splash screen is displayed while the NetGuard EVS loads this typically takes a few seconds only 3 The NetGuard EVS login window appears Server odis hep 29 123 120
70. link Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the file NetDVMS exe from the location you have saved it to ip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button 2 When the installation wizard starts click Next to continue the installation 3 Read and accept the End User License Agreement 4 Select required language version and click Next 5 Select the Licensed Version option and click Next 6 Type your Software License Code as listed on your Product License Sheet 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 9 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual beirithe bel i d E T m hn jemet b Bau AAS par ae i mi b hm im TEF Upa Ter Lyras ie ien gh aos hr Bre m En reds jal er Di hey m ie bi Ge a You have the option of installing the software for anyone using the computer or for yourself only If installing for yourself only bear in mind that if your login is not an administrator login you will need to change the login name for the Image Server service so it matches your own login i e uses the same user name and password When ready click Next 7 Select how NetDVMS s recording server should run The recording server is a
71. list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window rip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 4 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list Setup Notifications on Events Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Setup Notifications on Events window lets you select events for triggering event indications for the camera when displayed in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 40 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Co sk anus riir sira be rame K ry Conan CE e The Setup Notifications on Events window access You access the Setup Notifications on Events window from the Camera settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Event Notifications button e
72. maps in the view for including photos of wanted persons etc To add a static image to a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s Image link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position When you release the mouse button you are able to select the required static image file e Adding HTML Pages Static images can be used in views for a variety of purposes for including company web pages navigation pages online map services link collections e learning pages etc Grip When an imported HTML page contains links it is highly recommended that the links have the target blank attribute example lt a href otherwebpage htm target blank gt Link lt a gt This will make the links open in separate windows which will help you avoid losing view of the NetGuard EVS window itself due to a link opening a web page in the same browser window as the NetGuard EVS To add an HTML page to a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s HTML Page link to the required position in the view When you release the mouse button over the required position the Open URL window opens pn nn gl Erter the WAL c pah bo a AT MIL pepe on thee rinnat paa CELS 0 pour metveodk thst pou wean bo apiy Oper Ergen Cangal Open URL window 2 In the Open URL window s Open field type the URL of the required HTML page example http www mywebsit
73. marked Wide These view layouts are especially suitable for widescreen monitors 4 A new view is created under the group you selected The new view carries the default name New View plus an indication of the selected layout oF Overwrite the default name with a view name of your choice You are now able to add cameras to the view Grip A group can contain an unlimited number of views You may also create any number of subgroups if required Grip For information about adding content cameras etc to views see How to Add Content to Views e Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Views On the Setup tab you are able to assign shortcut numbers to views Shortcut numbers allow users to select views using the NetGuard EVS s standard keyboard shortcuts To assign a shortcut number to a view do the following 1 Inthe Setup tab s Views section select the required view 2 Specify the required shortcut number in the Shortcut field and press ENTER on your keyboard 3 The specified shortcut number will now appear in brackets in front of the view s name This will also be the case on the Live and Browse tabs allowing users to quickly find a view s Shortcut number 4 Repeat as necessary for other views e Renaming Views or Groups To rename a view or group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Select the required view or group in the Views section 2 Click the Rename button 3 Overwrite the existing group name with a new nam
74. may be selected this way e The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for manual triggering in the Monitor as well as NetGuard and NetGuard EVS This is further described in How to Add a Manually Controlled Output 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 9 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be triggered automatically when motion is detected by the selected camera Note that the automatic output triggering will be controlled entirely by your motion detection settings for the camera in question See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window for more information 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 121 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Archiving About Archiving Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights With the daily archiving feature in NetDVMS you are able to keep recordings for as long as required limited only by the available hardware storage capacity You enable and configure archiving in the Archi
75. of 360 degree panoramic images License key for using the IPIX technology obtained when registering the software e Network Settings for Video Device Section The Network Settings for Video Device section contains the following fields Field Description I P address Or DNS Host Name Use DNS host name Default Http Port IP address or DNS host name of the device in question By selecting the check box you are able to use a DNS host name for identifying the device instead of using the device s IP address When check box is selected the IP address field changes its name to DNS Host Name ready to accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address When selected HTTP traffic to the device will go through the default port port 80 If you want to use another port for HTTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the left of the check box 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 22 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Default Ftp Port When selected FTP traffic to the device will go through the default port port 21 If you want to use another port for FTP traffic to the device clear the check box and specify required port number in the field to the left of the check box Root Password Password required in order to log in to the device u
76. of the Live or Browse tab s other features and it can only show one view at a time Any hotspots carousels NetMatrix positions still images or HTML pages included in the view will work as usual 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 224 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual To send a view to a Secondary Display do the following 1 In the Live or Browse tab s Views section right click the required view This will bring up a menu Select View Secondary Display 1 Secondary Display 2 2 Inthe menu select Send View To gt Secondary Display If more than one secondary display is available they will be numbered e Sending a View to a Floating Window Sending a view to a Floating Window will show the view in a small separate window on your main display _ E Example of a view sent to a Floating Window The main NetGuard EVS window is immediately available behind the floating window The floating window will only show the selected view none of the Live or Browse tab s other features A floating window can only show one view at a time but you can use any number of floating windows You are able to change the size of a floating window to suit your needs Any hotspots carousels NetMatrix positions still images or HTML pages included in the view will work as usual in a floating window To send a v
77. of the camera The port address would normally be O or 1 If using daisy chained PTZ cameras the port address will identify each of them and you should verify your settings with those recommended in the cameras manuals Camera Administration About Camera Administration Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Adding Cameras In NetDVMS you do not have to worry about having to add individual cameras to the system Cameras are connected to devices so once you have added the required devices to your NetDVMS system see How to Add a Device all cameras connected to the devices are connected to the system as well Configuring Cameras You are able to specify a wide variety of settings for each camera connected to the NetDVMS system Your entry point for such camera configuration is the Administrator window To configure a camera select the required camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Administrator window s Settings button This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you have access to settings for the camera in question including e How the camera should record frame rate image quality etc e Where and when to store recorded images from the camera e Motion detection sensitivity e How images from the camera should appear when displayed in the Monitor a
78. only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event the Start event list lets you select the required start event 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 56 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Stop event When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer images to the NetDVMS software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event the Stop event list lets you select the required stop event Note The use of event based online periods requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Patrol scheme When you set a Patrolling period for a PTZ camera with patrolling the Patrol scheme list lets you select the required patrol scheme Note The Patrol scheme list is only available if you have selected a PTZ camera for which a patrol scheme has been set up e Camera Alert Scheduler Window s Calendar Section The Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section lets you specify exact periods of time for each option for each camera selected in the window s Camera list Set and Clear Modes Depending on your selection in the Mode list you Set or Clear periods in the calendar Your selection is indicated by
79. outputs in the list will be available as output buttons in the Monitor In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS there are no limitations to the number of available outputs You are able to determine each output s position among the Monitor s output buttons or NetGuard s and NetGuard EVS s output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons located to the right of the list The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Likewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step To remove an output from the On Manual Control list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in images from the camera Grip This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window To select an output for use when motion is detected in images from the camera 3 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window rip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the wind
80. resolution will automatically be set to the highest available resolution Camera Name and Number Window The Camera Name and Number window lets you edit the name of a selected camera and if required assign a shortcut number to the selected camera access You access the Camera Name and Number window from the Administrator window s device Manager section Right click the name of the required camera then select Edit from the menu that appears BR Stairs 10 10 63 1 Te Ceme pisable Edt e The Camera Name and Number window contains two fields Field Description Camera Name Displays the name of the camera If required you are able to overwrite the existing camera name with a new one Camera Users of the NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts Number some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera Each camera s shortcut number is specified in the Cam Number field A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 123456789 It is highly recommended that you use a unique camera shortcut number for each camera Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in the NetGuard EVS In other applications such as the Monitor or the
81. right corner of your screen The dialog will display the IP address or hostname of the sender as well as information about the command itself Methairls Command izved from TW 18S He SS Connect to P Comers 1 To accept the command click the Accept button If you do not want to accept the command click the Decline button e Alerts upon Executed Commands As part of the configuration your NetMatrixMonitor application may have been set up to automatically display alerts each time a command is executed When this is the case a small alert box will be displayed in the bottom right corner of your screen upon each executed command The alert box will inform you about the executed command Pad ae re Connected tn Song AZ S Comers 1 The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds If required you can close the alert box manually at any time 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 289 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Shortcut Menus Two shortcut menus are available when working with the NetMatrix Monitor application NetMatrix Monitor Window Shortcut Menu By right clicking anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window you get access to a shortcut menu Ful Screen wf Always On Top Config Ce Hide indica The shortcut menu has the following options e Full Screen Lets you view the NetMatrix M
82. s Type column the user will appear as a Basic User A Basic user is furthermore indicated by a blue dot next to the user icon Example a Wayne Massey Basic user e How to Add a New Windows User or Group You add a new Windows user or group by importing information about the user group from Active Directory 1 Inthe User administration window click the Add Windows User button This will open the Select Users and Groups window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 163 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Select Users or Groups L2Jed Seibel Bhat Geet ipi Upit Gites ct Eur Siniri pirap Cibgesct Typi Fron thes bocata Erite Dinecizsy Loci Enba Hee obiad ramea bo geet sso f iidyvanced Cancel By default you will be able to make selections from your entire directory If you want to narrow this click the Select Users and Groups window s Locations button and select the location you require 2 Inthe Enter the object names to select box type the required user or group names then click the Check Names feature to verify that the user and or group names you have entered are recognized by Active Directory Note If typing several user and or group names separate each name with a semicolon Example Alonso Sarah Walters Management Brian Security Hannah Carter Stanislaw Dwayne Smith
83. second i e One second For I O devices it is highly recommended that the polling frequency is set to the lowest possible value one tenth of a second between state checks For information about which devices require polling see the release note 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 82 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Event Buttons About Event Buttons Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Event buttons are configurable buttons allowing users to manually trigger events from the Monitor application only available if the recording server has been installed as an application rather than a service and NetGuard EVS In the NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list You are able to configure event buttons to suit the exact needs of your organization Your main entry point for configuring event buttons is the Administrator window Clicking the Administrator window s Event Buttons button will open the Event Buttons window in which you specify each individual event button Event buttons can be used for a wide variety of purposes for example e As start and stop events for use in the Camera Alert Scheduler window For example you can make a
84. select the button action in the list then click the Unselect button To free all joystick buttons from their associated actions click the Unselect All button E Mail Setup Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The E Mail setup window lets you enable and configure the use of e mail alerts Such e mail alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events See About Input Events amp Output occur By default SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used when sending e mail alerts Compared with other mail transfer methods SMTP has the advantage that you will avoid automatically triggered warnings from your e mail client when an e mail alert is to be sent Such automatically triggered warnings may otherwise inform you that your e mail client is trying to automatically send e mail messages on your behalf E ail yl F E E reabh E Aad l fii b Erabi E Hia fi eee Fogel Conder Sting Saree eia ahha Chie a AT F an raping b Sea npa tir LEET n Fami Subesi ba Bed es hins ial irci ira Teme ba mak jorrai Boo Taw Ce Cancel The E mail setup window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 65 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual JAccess To acces
85. selected detected motion will be highlighted in the camera s images when viewed in the Monitor 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 27 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Motion highlighted in green when viewed in Monitor Chip You are able to select the motion detection highlight color by clicking the Motion Color button in the Motion Detection Settings section Show Regions Q nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected areas in which motion detection has been disabled will be highlighted in the camera s images when viewed in the Monitor Default highlighting color is blue Mip You are able to change the color used to highlight areas with disabled motion detection by clicking the Region Color button in the Exclude Regions Settings section Area with disabled motion detection highlighted in red when viewed in Monitor Default highlighting color is blue Update on Or nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server motion only has been installed as an application the Monitor
86. shared groups For example the surveillance system administrator may create and maintain a number of views and place them in shared groups When NetGuard users log in the views placed in the shared groups will automatically be available to them and the users will basically not need to create further views unless they want their own views in private groups To quickly determine which types of groups your user rights permit you to create and edit views in do the following 1 Select NetGuard s Setup tab 2 On the Setup tab look at the Views section The Group folders to which you do not have access will be indicated by padlock icons Consult your system administrator if in doubt about your user rights e Creating Views in Private Groups To create your first view in a private group you first create a group then create the required view within the group If you have created views in private groups before you may create new views in existing private groups or you may create a new private group for the view 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 233 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Creating a Private Group To create a private group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Inthe Setup tab s Views section select the Private folder or if you have created private groups before any folder labeled Priva
87. shortcut When you start the Monitor all cameras scheduled to be online will start transferring images to NetDVMS Scheduling is handled by the system administrator in the Administrator application However even if a camera is not scheduled to be online users with sufficient user rights can start a camera i e make it transfer images to NetDVMS from the Monitor by using the Monitor s Manual Mode feature See further information in the description of the Monitor s control panel The Monitor application opens in full screen view This provides you with the best possible view of the camera images displayed The Monitor basically consists of two sections a camera layout section in which camera images are displayed and a control panel with buttons for controlling the various features of the Monitor e Monitor s Camera Layout The Monitor s camera layout section displays images from each camera specified by the system administrator Depending on the system administrator s settings in the Administrator application the camera layout may contain images from up to 64 different cameras I mage Bars Each camera from which images are displayed in the camera layout is identified by an image bar located in the top of each camera image 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 131 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The imag
88. stream is received a first in first out principle begins to apply NetMatrix quickly transfers the previously received image stream to your view s secondary NetMatrix position and presents the latest image stream in your view s primary NetMatrix position and so on This way you can always watch the latest image stream while maintaining the last few previously received image streams in your view as well Primary position Always latest stream secondary position Always previous stream Tertiary position i Always stream received before stream in 2 Example In this 1 3 view all the positions are used for NetMatrix content The large position has been defined at the primary NetMatrix position 1 and the three other positions as secondary 2 tertiary 3 etc Images from the latest image stream will always be shown in position 1 images from the stream received before that will always be shown in position 2 and so on Which of the view s positions should be primary secondary etc is determined on the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab Watch animation a e F53 T i hae Example of NetMatrix position ranking principle Note Animation runs once only NetMatrix would continue indefinitely To replay animation click Watch animation link twice Note how the live images are shifted to a lower ranking NetMatrix position each time new NetMatrix triggered live images are received Also note the first in first out principle at
89. the DLK field will already be filled with the DLK for the device Click Next 6 Assign a unique and descriptive name to the device Upon completion of the wizard the name will be used when listing devices and associated cameras in the Administrator window s Device Manager section The name may for example refer to the physical location of the camera s attached to the device Device Setup Wirard EJ Fiane mia naa Ghat hadi pan ba Ba re eeo deve i She roa Bha Pj aag b hee jag heen F i iih Dii fa Canmi Seto buon bi oh up cae naran eed PT iro ee tha roa Cates Lena EA w Assigning a name to the device Grip You may click the Camera Setup button to access the Camera Settings for window in which you are able to specify certain settings related to camera name and PTZ control The latter requires that the camera is a PTZ Pan tilt Zoom camera 7 Click Finish 8 The device will be listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section To view a list of cameras attached to the device click the plus sign next to the device name Grip Cameras are listed for each device with default names such as Camera 1 etc If you want to change the name of a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears rip Individual cameras listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that images from the cameras are by default
90. the end of the animation the first received live images those with a person walking along a red wall are pushed out of view e Events If manual triggering of events has been defined on your surveillance system you can trigger events from the NetGuard EVS what is an event An event is a predefined incident occurring on the surveillance system Depending on the surveillance system s configuration events may be caused by input from external sensors connected to cameras by detected motion by data received from other applications or manually through user input Events are used by the surveillance system for triggering actions Typically most events on the 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 204 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual surveillance system are generated automatically For example detected motion can be defined as an event which in turn triggers an action such as recording on a camera Depending on configuration manually triggered events can be used for a wide variety of purposes including triggering combinations of actions For example the manual triggering of an event could make a camera record with a particular frame rate activate two different outputs and send an e mail alert to three different recipients Manual events can be global or tied to a particular camera device Exactly what happen
91. the exact date and time of the motion detection event etc triggering the recording Sequences may often begin some seconds before a motion detection event etc and end some seconds after This so called buffer allows you to be able to see what happens immediately before and after an incident the buffer length is determined by the system administrator a A 12 20 2005 4 19 05 PM d4 seconds F 12 20 2005 4 19 08 PM fend a 12 20 2005 4 19 05 PM alarm fF 12 20 2005 4 19 04 PM start Expanded sequence indication Date and time format may be different on your computer e PTZ Control The Browse tab s PTZ Control section lets you navigate recorded images from IPIX cameras IPIX is a technology allowing creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images Note The Browse tab s PTZ Control section cannot be used for controlling PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras as the Browse tab is used for viewing already recorded images Point and Click Control Many IPIX cameras may be controlled simply by pointing and clicking inside the images from the camera If you see a set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer over the images from an IPIX camera point and click control is supported for the camera Refer to the release note for information about point and click support PTZ Navigation Buttons As an alternative to point and click IPIX control use the navigation buttons in the PTZ Control section to move around the view from the selecte
92. the schedule and paste it to all cameras in one go Copy and Paste Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section and paste it to all to All cameras in one go 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 58 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual General Settings General Settings Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The General Settings window lets you manage a variety of settings such as user rights e mail and SMS settings logging etc Access To access the General Settings window click the General Settings button in the Administrator window The General Settings window is divided into a number of sections e Administrator Settings The Administrator Settings section lets you password protect access to the Administrator application and restrict user rights When the Enable Protection check box is selected users must supply the administrator password in order to be able to access the Administrator application and in order to be able to use any of the features to which access has been restricted Changing the Administrator Password To change the administrator password click the Change Password button to open the Change Password window When an administrator password is in use users ac
93. the view on the Browse and Live tabs as 2 eT Thin blue border indicates NetMatrix 3 When the NetMatrix position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section e Image Quality Select between Full the default setting SuperHigh for megapixel High Medium or Low 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 184 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Frame Rate Select between Unlimited default Medium 25 of original frame rate or Low one frame per second e Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected the cameras original image aspect ratio will be maintained this will provide you with non distorted images but may lead to black bars appearing above below images If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the NetMatrix position this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images This setting will apply for all cameras displayed in the selected NetMatrix position e NetMatrix Window Lets you change the NetMatrix position s ranking 1 is the primary position in which images from the latest event are always shown 2 is the secondary position in which images from the previously detected event are always shown 3 is the tertiary position in which images from the event detected before the event
94. time Feed Server icon If the icon is not present you must start the Realtime Feed Server To start the Realtime Feed Server do the following 1 Open Windows Start menu 2 Select All Programs 3 Select NetDVMS gt Realtime Feed Server The RealtimeFeed Server icon now appears in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar BB cattimerees Server icon 4 Click the Realtime Feed Server icon This will open the NetDVMS Realtime Feed Server window If the Autostart check box is selected the Realtime Feed Server will automatically start If the Autostart check box is not selected the Realtime Feed Server must be started manually by clicking the Start button 5 Connecting users IP addresses and progress can be viewed in the NetDVMS Realtime Feed Server window s Connections section Stopping the Realtime Feed Server To stop the Realtime Feed Server click the NetDVMS Realtime Feed Server window s Stop button This will stop the Realtime Feed Server without shutting it down This means that you will quickly be able to start the Realtime Feed Server again by clicking the Start button Shutting Down the Realtime Feed Server To shut down the Realtime Feed Server click the NetDVMS Realtime Feed Server window s Shut down button This will shut down the Realtime Feed Server and you will have to access it from Window s Start menu in order to start it again When clicking the Shut down button you will be aske
95. time in the Browse tab s time navigation Required HTML syntax lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top setTime Mmm dd yyyy hh mm ss gt In the following example we have created two shared groups in NetGuard We have called them Shared Group1 and Shared Group2 Each group contains two views called View1 and View2 We have also created an HTML page with examples of all available button types including the ability to switch between our four different views The HTML for the page looks like this lt html gt lt body gt lt input type button value Change to Groupl Viewl onclick top changeView Shared Group 1 View 1 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Change to Groupl View2 onclick top changeView Shared Group 1 View 2 7 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Change to Group2 Viewl onclick top changeView Shared Group 2 View 1 3 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Change to Group2 View2 onclick top changeView Shared Group 2 View 2 gt lt br gt lt input type button value Live onclick top selectPane live gt lt br gt lt input type button value Browse onclick top selectPane browse gt lt br gt lt input type button value Setup onclick top selectPane setup gt lt br gt lt input type button value Show pane onclick top showPane true gt lt br gt lt input type button value
96. users ability to export data e Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer The NetGuard EVS offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI movie clip J PEG still image as well as NetDVMS database formats e No Use NetGuard access through the mageServer or regular browser access through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server The NetGuard offers the ability to individual user rights permitting export evidence in the AVI and JPEG formats With regular browser access through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server users are individual user rights permitting able to export in the AVI format 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 154 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Will you use a Net based client application NetDVMS User Manual The Net software development platform allows the interconnection of computers and services for the exchange and combination of data and objects The platform makes extensive use of so called web services which provide the ability to use the web rather than single applications for various services This in turn provides the ability for centralized data storage as well as automated updating and synchronization of information The Net platform enhances software developers ability to create re usable and customizable modules which makes it possible to de
97. using the following procedure connect the PDA or the cellphone to the PC install the ActiveSync program on the PC and set up synchronization with the PDA To install the NetPDA NetCell Client do the following L 6 On the PC insert the NetDVMS software CD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetPDA NetCell Client link Make sure to choose the correct client to match your handheld device model Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the NetPDA NetCell Client installation file Setup exe from the location you have saved it to Grip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button Read and accept the license agreement Select the folder in which to install the NetPDA NetCell Client software on the PC Click Next twice to begin the installation process When installation is complete click the Close button After installing the NetPDA NetCell Client on the PC the ActiveSync program will display the Add Remove Programs dialog which lets you transfer and install the NetPDA NetCell Client on the PDA or cellphone Click Yes to install the NetPDA NetCell Client in the default location on the PDA or cellphone e Checking the Wireless Connection Before using the NetPDA NetCell Client verify that the wir
98. views e g customize your NetGuard EVS with private views do you need to create further views on the Setup tab e If the Views section contains only the two top level folders Private and Shared without any content in any of the two folders neither private nor shared views are available When this is the case you must create at least one view on the Setup tab before you can begin using the NetGuard EVS Grip You can use your views private as well as shared on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed This is because information about your views is stored centrally on the surveillance system server as part of your user login information How to Create amp Manage Views Depending on your user rights you may be able to create and edit the following types of views e Private and shared e Private but not shared e Shared but not private e Neither private nor shared in which case you simply rely on shared views created by others Typically only a few people in an organization are able to create and edit shared views For example the surveillance system administrator may create and maintain a number of shared views When NetGuard EVS users log in the shared views will automatically be available to the users and the users will basically not need to create further views unless they want their own private views e Checking which Types of Views You are Able to Create and Edit To quickly determine which types of views your user ri
99. vital part of the surveillance system it is used for recording and displaying images from connected cameras You can install the recording server either as a Windows service or as an application rT H BATI FJ LE a E E m i pul oe raed w Firsar wim Fam Fr Fei erir tere Pkl rr t dipae a a i a eS da mi ic ees ee megam iy g eee ryp hiriw e f you install the recording server as a Windows service it will automatically load whenever the NetDVMS server is started it will not require any further login or similar in order to run However when the recording server runs as a service you will not automatically have a local client application for viewing live and recorded video on the surveillance system server instead you will have to connect to the surveillance system server through one of NetDVMS s feature rich remote access clients You typically select this option if your surveillance system server is placed in a separate server room or a similar location to which regular access is not practical e f you install the recording server as an application the application called the Monitor application will be available on the surveillance system server for viewing of live and recorded images However the Monitor application will require a local login in order to run With this solution images are only transferred to the surveillance system server while the Monitor application is running the Monitor application must therefore run whene
100. want to create views yourself for example if no shared views are available in your organization the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab lets you create groups and views and specify which cameras should be included in each view e How to Check if Shared Views are Available Especially if you are a first time user of the NetGuard EVS you will want to know whether any shared views have already been created for your organization s NetGuard EVS users Typically your surveillance system administrator will have told you if shared views are used in your organization Alternatively to quickly determine whether any shared views are available do the following Note This method requires that your user rights permit you to access the NetGuard EVS s Live tab and or Browse tab Most users will have access to at least one of these tabs 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 174 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 1 Goto the NetGuard EVS s Live or Browse tab 2 On the Live or Browse tab look at the Views section e If the Views section contains any folders under the Shared top level folder shared groups are available When this is the case you may your user rights permitting immediately begin using the shared views for viewing live and recorded images see Viewing Live Images and Viewing Recorded Images Only if you want to add more
101. ways e By selecting the required view in the Live tab s Views section e By selecting the required view from the Views list located in the upper part of the window Grip If views have been assigned shortcut numbers see How to Create amp Manage Views you will also be able to select a view by using keyboard shortcuts See Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts e Image Bars and Colored Indicators Each camera position in the view is identified by an image bar located in the top of each camera image Office Camera 1 Camera position enlarged detail shows image bar 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 199 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar will display the word Live when live images are displayed and the word Stopped if the camera is stopped and live viewing is not possible If the image bars of all cameras display Stopped it may indicate that the connection to the surveillance server is lost consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt The image bar is dark blue When you select a particular camera in the view the image bar of the selected camera position becomes a lighter b
102. which you are able to disable Regions motion detection in specific areas of the camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 32 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background Region Color Opens the Select Color window in which you are able to select between three colors to be used for highlighting areas with disabled motion detection when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application e Image Quality The Image Quality button opens the Configure Device window in which you are able to configure image resolution compression etc for the camera e Event Notifications The Event Notifications button opens the Setup Notifications on Events window in which you are able to select events for triggering event indications for the camera when displayed in the Monitor application NetGuard or NetGuard EVS e Outputs The Outputs button opens the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you are able to specify which outputs e g the sounding of a siren or the switching on of the lights should be associated with motion detection and or with
103. wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e A camera starts based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds e A camera starts and the lights are switched on based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes Add new output Opens the Add New Output window in which you are able to specify a name for event the required output event which of the device s output ports to use and how long to keep the output for Add VMD Event Lets you add a VMD Video Motion Detection event to the device selected in the Motion Defined Events list Detection VMD events are events triggered when NetDVMS detects motion on a specific camera based on the motion detection settings defined in the Adjust Motion Detection window Note In addition to NetDVMS s motion detection some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address Events based on motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events they are input events since they are based on input from the device VMD events can be used just like regular input events For example a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera could move to a specific preset position when a VMD event occurs
104. your mouse pointer turning into either a pencil Set or an eraser Clear when inside the calendar section KKA Mouse pointer turns into pencil Set or eraser Clear when inside calendar section Zoom Feature When placing your mouse pointer inside the day band in the top part of the calendar section you get access to the calendar s zoom feature With the zoom feature you are able to toggle between the calendar s default seven day view and a single day view The single day view provides you with five minute interval indications allowing you to specify periods precisely Sunday Bondar 3 Tuesday Honday 14 05 Calendar s zoom feature allows you to toggle between seven day and single day views e How to Set or Clear Periods in the Calendar To set or clear a period in the Camera Alert Scheduler window s calendar section simply click at the required start point in the calendar and drag to set clear a period depending on whether you have selected Set or Clear in the window s Mode list Good to Know when You Set Online Periods When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer images to the NetDVMS software continuously within the specified period Always or only when an event occurs within the specified period On Event If using On Event remember to specify required start and stop events in the Start event and Stop event lists 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901
105. 0 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 291 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Connecting NMMConnectGuid NMMAddress NMMPort NMMPassword DevGuid e Disconnecting NMMDisonnectGuid NMMAddress NMMPort NMMPassword DevGuid Example A link for sending a command to a NetMatrix Monitor on the IP address 10 10 10 222 using port 12345 with the password pass telling the NetMatrix Monitor to connect to a reception area camera with the GUID XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXK XXXXXXXXXXXX would look like this lt a href onClick NMMConnectGuid 10 10 10 222 12345 pass XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX return false gt Reception lt a gt 4what is a GUID GUID is short for Globally Unique Identifier a unique 128 bit number used to identify components on a Windows system e How to Find GUI Ds of Individual Cameras You find the GUIDs of individual cameras by using the SystemI nfo function The SystemInfo function lets you view the entire NetDVMS system information for an individual user Camera access is user rights dependent therefore the information which can be gathered using the SystemInfo function is tied to a particular user at a time To use the SystemInfo function do the following 1 Open a browser and go to the following URL http host port systeminfo xml Where host and port is replaced with the hostname IP address and port of the Image Server Ex
106. 0 ccccssccccccsssscsccesssscsscessssscsecessssussccessssssecesssseesccessssessceessesesecesssuseccesseaescs 222 Using Multiple WV GOW SS oesiccciacsensccccsctsiseetasncoxtucnenavelocnewetanthcavsecentyetenteanetacsbesutendbawvohcaneustagabenutecctassteatboostse 224 Using Standard Keyboard SNOT CUIUS xicccecicciccticssececenstcnesdnccassnesiscaetenseanversccacetatsccssest iebssbtaseseceaaseneatdeceis 227 LOT GUIS OUT OF NE TGUARD EV oerna E E S 228 ATE TGA RD CCIT N E ceirar aar E A EEA AEA AAAS ASETE AAE AAE EA AAAS 229 NetGuard Introductio M aesinciiroiiiiinisianenrasiaiininianiina i aiaa aa 229 Downloading and Installing the NetGuard eeeessseseseeesresereessressresssressressrressressrressressriessresereessress 230 ACCE SNO NTO Ua Ea E EE E E SE ER 230 VND VSL AS Serera AE E A N NN 240 P int and Click CO CO ice cas ee acces tacts sere ceeentee see a EA A 242 PTZ NAVIGATION BUTTONS ic ssecssceteidasacecaietindvedetanavesitacavadveveveantiadectevacevossieausleiaveiaantadiehinecntitedielhuokwtees 242 PEA PSS POS ION Sresi cece tec ct acne A seat teas E A AE E E EA 242 IPRA PTZ POSON eeen E EEEE OE A EE E EE S 242 Viewing Recorded IMagES auare E T Orne eee ene re re 243 Master TME A dors Pane ee EE I AEAEE E TAE E EEEE ONAE E 243 BOWS BUU ONS cenean E Eai 244 TOE OS a EA E AAE A AE EE EA NAA E a tnaaetetiiat 244 Playback Slider and ButtonS cxecsteesctscsctctesentvacehssesvoisvarenedundeivabocbeancbevetisescnsiaueledbtliohasbeasgbevedessieasseyedesduecedd
107. 10 or Microsoft Video 1 are recommended Click the Next button to start the export Export format Database files Note The Viewer s database export option may not be available in your version of NetDVMS See the Release Notes available on the software CD as well as from www onssi com for further information Note that the database export option with the possibility of including a standalone Viewer is available in the NetGuard EVS a Select required Export Path if you keep the default setting the database files will be exported to an Exported Images folder on your desktop Select whether the Viewer program files should be included in the export If you include the Viewer in the export the exported databases can be viewed on any PC Click Next Fill in the Operator and Operator s Note fields Then click Next to start the export Export format J PG WAV files a Select required Export Path if you keep the default setting the files will be exported to an Exported Images folder on your desktop Select whether timestamps from the surveillance system should be added to the exported J PGs Click Next to start the export 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 151 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual How to View Archived Recordings 0 nstallation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Mo
108. 2 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 76 NetDVMS User Manual tiin A nl ny A OVAL etup WINQOW Include image Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected from camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs this event occurs The Edit Event window for editing input events lets you edit the settings for an existing input event on devices capable of handling one input event only En Hewat Fa iera cores pererin ky ei Oar vi atten he ied pe ji ee ae Eal ra eed all f he eee F AF erg DO Ted Se a eee aa CEJ e The Edit Event window for editing input events Jaccess You access the Edit Event window for editing input events by selecting the required device and clicking the Edit selected button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window will open when the Edit selected button is clicked e Edit Event Window s Fields The Edit Event w
109. 45 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 16 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual enable disable the audio source and change its name if required O Setup Opens the O Setup window in which you are able to define events based on input events for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened and VMD Video Motion Detection The I O Setup window also lets you specify output e g a siren When defined events can be used for a variety of purposes For example an input event can be used for triggering output for starting a particular camera and for triggering that an e mail or SMS message is sent to a particular user notifying the user of the recorded event See also the description of the I O Control button Event Buttons Opens the Event Buttons window in which you are able to define events for use on event buttons Event buttons can used in the Monitor application and NetGuard EVS for manually triggering events Generic Opens the Generic Events window in which you are able to define events based Events on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols O Control Opens the O Control window in which you are able to attach outputs to input events This way you can for example define that a siren should sound when a sensor detects that a door is opened Exit Closes the Administrator application thip Clicking the icon in the left cor
110. 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 218 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Tibet th ad barber TP DS las PH L uesday September 27 3005 1 06 03 PM Example of timestamp arrow indicates actual position Date and time format may be different on your computer 8 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the J PEG format go to step 9 Select required frame rate for the export With the Full option all images between the start and end times will be included in the export with the Half option only every second image will be included yet still play back in real time 9 If you used digital zoom on the camera s images before exporting you are able to export the digitally zoomed images rather than the regular images Select Yes if you want to export the digitally zoomed images select No if you want to export the camera s regular non zoomed images If you did not use digital zoom before exporting this option will not be available 10 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the J PEG format go to step 11 In the AVI Codec list select required AVI codec The list will contain the video codecs available on your PC rip A video codec is a particular compression decompression technology used when generating video files Your choice of codec will affect the quality and size of the
111. 669 4 Patkstet Fant Amete ive eee T Approximate round trip tines in milli seconds Ain imum Bes Rasim Ans Average E Hnging 185 10 67 108 w Requect timid mit Raqguekt Emid oat Feqguerct timad out Feyi egt timed owt Ping tatistica Far 18 18 69 E 2 4 Example 2 Unsuccessful pinging ping request times out 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 261 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Starting and Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Client You start the NetPDA NetCell Client by tapping your PDA Cellphone s Start button selecting Programs then tapping the NetPDA NetCell Client icon When first started your NetPDA NetCell Client must be configured before it is able to connect to the NetPDA NetCell Server To configure your NetPDA NetCell Client do the following 1 Tap anywhere on your NetPDA NetCell Client s opening page NetPDA Handheld Video Client 2 Hold down the pointer pen until the a menu is shown 3 Inthe menu select Configuration This will open the NetPDA NetCell Client s configuration page 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 262 lt gt O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Server comfiquration Host IF Port Angkatan een rere
112. 69 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 95 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Lets you add an end parenthesis to the Event message include field AND Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message include field With an AND operator you specify that the terms on both sides of the AND operator must be present Example User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday In the above example the term User001 as well as the term Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with AND the fewer results you will retrieve User001 Door053 Example Few results match the criterion User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday OR Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message include field With an OR operator you specify that either one or another term must be present Example User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday In the above example the term User001 or the term Door053 or the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with OR the more results you will retrieve 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 96 O n SS
113. 69 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 270 Telim Ed WRD GEMAH ED HTTP pri Kaul Sl at Lapintie Fike tte fo Tree for omero Eo Miraria Hehea aega 0 Lia Une kinrara Deirg rji a prija Ur meu low aeran na pper bo prki use ore Pant ao ae Gy a ot Settings window NetDVMS User Manual The Settings window lets you configure the Web Server The Settings window is divided into two sections the Web Server setup section and the User administration section Web Server Setup The Settings window s Web Server setup section contains the following fields HTTP port Indicates the port used by the Web Server Default is port 81 Field is editable only when the Web Server is stopped Auto Start The Web Server must be started before it is active and remote users are able to connect to it The Auto Start check box lets you enable automatic start of the Web Server With automatic start enabled the Web Server will start automatically when you click the Web Server icon in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar fee Server icon The use of Auto Start is recommended When automatic start is not enabled you must start the Web Server manually by clicking the Start server button in the NetDVMS Web Server window You access the NetDVMS Web Server window by clicking the Web Server icon in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar Log Activity to Select check box
114. AVI file The Indeo video 5 10 codec if available on your PC generally provides a very good compromise between quality and file size 11 Specify export destination in the export dialog s Export Destination section e Desktop If you select Desktop your exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder on the desktop of your PC e Path If you select Path you are able to specify a path yourself The exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder under the path you specify example If you specify a path like C My Stuff My Files the exported file will be saved in C My Stuff My Files Exported Images When specifying a path this way the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones if they do not already exist they will be created automatically 12 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the J PEG format go to step 13 By default the AVI file will get a file name based on the export start time in the 24 hour format along the structure yyyymmdd hhmmss avi year month day hour minute second example 20050927 130603 for a file with a start time of 13 06 03 on 27th September 2005 The name will automatically appear in the AVI FileName field The default file name format is independent of regional settings on your computer You are always able to change the default file name to a name of your choice simply by overwriting the default file name
115. Add new event button Note that you are also able to make the event button globally available i e available to users regardless of which camera device they have selected in the Monitor or NetGuard EVS To make the event button globally available simply select Global at the top of the list instead of a particular camera device Meee ret irii gaia Thiig mrri Lii rp ed This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 103 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 3 Inthe Add New Event window for adding event buttons the Button related to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device If you are adding a globally available event button the field will display Global Ada Vm eer Basiea Fear ee Lais mapy rere E Hia crags ord paa fi eer ecu i bey ore AS fe eer oc T Dreni Now specify information in the following fields e Manual event name Specify a name for the event button Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp Grip If intending to use the event button in the Monitor application do not use a name consisting of more than approximately 10 characters as the Monitor s event buttons are quite small View example Event buttons in the Monitor can only contain a lim
116. C Ce Cree When ready click the Page Setup window s OK button to return to the NetGuard EVS Surveillance Report window 6 Optional If you want to preview your printout click the NetGuard EVS Surveillance Report window s Preview button 7 Click the Print button to print the image and associated details e Exporting Recordings With the Browse tab s Export section you are able to export recordings in the AVI movie clip J PEG still image and database formats Grip With the database format you are able to include audio in the export See Exporting Video Evidence for detailed information about exporting recorded images Exporting Video Evidence With the NetGuard EVS you are able to quickly export video evidence in the AVI movie clip J PEG still image and NetDVMS database formats ip When exporting in the database format you are able to include audio in the export with the AVI J PEG export option you are not e Exporting in AVI and J PEG Formats To export video evidence in the AVI or JPEG formats do the following 1 Select the NetGuard EVS s Browse tab 2 In the Browse tab s Export section specify when the period to be covered by the export should start You do this by typing the required date in the first Start Time field and the time in the second field 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 217 O n SS On Net Sur
117. Description Desired framerate Enable speedup On motion 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern Specify required number of frames in first field and select required unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list Example 8 frames per second Ghip When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields NetDVMS is able to increase the frame rate of a camera if motion is detected or if an event occurs Select the check box to enable increased frame rate on motion detection or on an external event then specify the required conditions in the following fields Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Select check box to use a higher frame rate when motion is detected Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Desired speedup framerate fields NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 26 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The camera will return to the original frame rate two seconds after the last motion is detected On event Note Use of speedup on event requires that events have been defined in the O Setup window accessed by clicking the I O Setup button in the Administrator window Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected Select check box to use a higher frame rate when an external event o
118. EVS you will see one of the following error messages Error Message You do not have access to any part of the application live browse or setup Please contact the system administrator Failed to connect Maximum number of clients are already connected Failed to connect Please check the server address Failed to connect Please check the username and password New Client Available Update is recommended Update is required The new version can be downloaded from Issue Since no access rights to any part of the NetGuard EVS have been defined for you you cannot access the NetGuard EVS at all What to do Consult your surveillance system administrator who will be able to change your access rights if required Issue The maximum number of remote access clients allowed to connect to the surveillance system server simultaneously has been reached What to do If possible wait for a while before connecting again If access to the surveillance system is urgent contact your surveillance system administrator who may be able to extend the allowed number of simultaneously connected clients Issue It was not possible to connect to the surveillance system server at the specified server address What to do Verify that you have typed the correct server address Bear in mind that the http prefix as well as a port number is typically required as part of the serv
119. GURE DEVICE WINDOW eres cicneicescnedenwnotenenctcveceuenctanssaddnecteantacuneisseasctuendianeratesaceuendicneiaiubattaendicneatseceencneeeuns 34 ADJ UST MOTION DETECTION WINDOW eeeeeccccccccccsssecccccccesssceecccccccessseecceccesaessseecccecesaeaseecececeaauaeeeeeecenes 35 COLOR TIN terse E E 36 DEFINE EXCLUSION REGIONS WINDOW veascccecounsscnsasdasassanassesancandaunuasneauaasganaunns onsmappanedeanoadesannnebasacnnnenoonsaaandauaaaanss 37 SELECT COLOR WINDOW sitsisacecdsscaceacssancardacaasdadssanenadsdansSasaiascbadadadsadsiandesdasdnsesdiguseasdsiensbndaguadeadadcncbndagaaeeedadansantenens 38 OUTPUT SETTINGS FOR DEVICE NAME CAMERA NAME WINDOW 0 cc cc ceececccccccececeeeeesessssssstececceceeeeeecees 39 SETUP NOTIFICATIONS ON EVENTS WINDOW eee eccceccececceccecececeececeseceeesesececeseseseseeeeeseseseseeseseseseeeeeeeees 40 PTZ PRESET POSITIONS FOR DEVICE NAME CAMERA NAME WINDOW ccccccccccccccceeeeseeeeeessntnneecees 42 EVENT WINDOW FOR PTZ PRESET POSITIONS ON EVENTS ccccccccccccccecccsesesssssssssssseccceccceececeessssssssssntaeeeees 46 Se PUP PEZ PATROLLING INDO oases rae sect toes A aus suacsens Staioesbesdseesiensesasiess 46 IP X CAMERA CONFIGURATION WINDOW Qu eeeeeeeeeseesesesssessesseesessssssesseesessssesssesesesesesesesseessessseeeeeseeeeeeeees 48 CAMERA NAME AND NUMBER WINDOW u000 ccccecceeceeccccccccececceccececceeceeceecesececeessesseeeeseseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeees 50 AUD
120. Ghip Typing part of a user or group name is often enough Example Typing Alon then clicking the Check Names button may be enough to quickly select the user Alonso Rodriguez 3 When ready click OK The required users and or groups will be imported and listed in the User administration window A user imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory User in the list s Type column The user will furthermore be indicated by a user icon without the blue dot used for Basic users Example Sean McDonnell Windows or Active Directory user A group imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory Group in the list s Type column The group will furthermore be indicated by a group icon Example al Test LAB Windows or Active Directory group e How to Edit an Existing User Name or Password Editing an existing user s user name or password is only possible if the user in question is of the type Basic user the details of Windows users imported from Active Directory are edited through Active Directory To edit the user name or password for an existing Basic user do the following 1 Select the required user in the Current users list and click the Change password button 2 Edit the user name and or password as required then click OK Remember to inform the user about the change e How to Remove an Existing User To remove a user from the User administration window s list of users select the user in the list and click
121. Guard s Live or Browse tab 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 232 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 2 Onthe Live or Browse tab look at the Views section e If the Views section contains any expandable folders labeled Shared shared groups are available and you may your user rights permitting begin using the views in the shared groups for viewing live and recorded images See Viewing Live Images and Viewing Recorded Images Only if you want to add more views e g customize your NetGuard with views in private groups do you need to create further views on the Setup tab e If the Views section contains no expandable folders at all no views are available and you must create at least one view on the Setup tab before you can begin using NetGuard e If the Views section contains one or more expandable folders labeled Private you have already created one or more views in private groups e Which Types of Groups are You Able to Create Views in Depending on your user rights you may be able to create and edit views in the following types of groups e Private and shared e Private but not shared e Shared but not private e None at all in which case you simply rely on views created by others and placed in shared groups Typically only a few people in an organization are able to create and edit views in
122. IO SOURCE ADMINIS TRATION curries orice soceratpnateaeatostoneauawyontaseiesneenatesetaucintoeeauevnse ETE 51 AUDIO DEVICE SETTINGS WINDOW ec eeeeessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssnaaaas 51 MONITOR ADMINISTRATION MONITOR MANAGER WINDOW Qu eeeeeessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseaaas 51 RECORDING SERVER SERVICE MANAGEMENT ccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssaaas 54 SERVICE MANAGER WINDOW essccciscuacocaianasassaenotataxivaunenvadslaiacayisdenvasdsatarivaseendsdnlainesdiudeavasduatandvaseossedvlaiausaacopeendianies 54 EC UTI sorires iner A E A EEEE ETER 55 CAMERA ALERT SCHEDULER WINDOW ccs atesccgetetecreeepavacenaasanaieo tenance seaueseeavaneunwseauatsestenaiastsceterssveneetnaeoualeeserabanins 55 GENERAL SETTINGS ccccccccscscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesesssesssesesssssessssssssssscsssesssesessessseceees 59 aN ee y 4 Mae 1 Ts Esa INDON errr ie ere SE 59 CHANGE PASSWORD WINDOW 000 ccccceccecccccccccccececcccececcececcesceceeeeeeececseseeeeeeesesseeseseseseseseseseseseseseseeeseseeseseseeeeeees 63 FOYSTICK SETUP WINDOW sicsiisicssisariatisnin taster aisntgans n ETAO AEE OAA EE ATAT EEEE ENO 64 ESMA SETUP ANIN DOWN eaa TA TA E TAE E AE TES 65 SMS SETTINGS WINDOW eee eeccccccecccccccccccceccceccecececcesceseseceeeeeseeeseseeseeeeeeseeesesesseseeesesteseses
123. MS Events can in turn be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions making images automatically appear on NetMatrix monitors etc Events can also be used for activating output Output units can be attached to output ports on many devices allowing you to activate lights sirens etc from NetDVMS Such external output can be activated automatically by events or manually from the Monitor application and NetGuard NetGuard EVS Four Types of Events You specify which types of input should generate which types of events Basically four types of events exist e On many devices you are able to attach external input units to input ports on the device Events based on input from such external input units typically sensors attached to doors windows etc are called input events Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc typically configured in the devices own software in which case you are also able to use such detections from the device as input events e Input may also be received in the form of TCP or UDP data packages which can be analyzed and if matching specified criteria used to generate events Such events are called generic events e Events may be based on NetDVMS detecting motion on a camera Such even
124. Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from the NetGuard EVS Archive Setup Window The Archive setup window lets you enable and configure the archiving feature in NetDVMS It also lets you specify where archives should be stored for each camera Access To access the Archive setup window click the Archive Setup button in the Administrator window e Archive Setup Window s Fields and Buttons The Archive setup window contains the following fields and buttons Field Button Enable Select check box to enable the daily archiving feature Archiving Delete Lets you specify how many days you want to keep archived images for databases in the backup Archived images older than the specified number of days will automatically be directory older deleted than Send email on Select check box if NetDVMS should send an e mail alert if archiving fails for archive error example because the disk is full Send SMS on Select check box if NetDVMS should send an SMS alert if archiving fails for archive error example because the disk is full Daily archiving Lists specified archiving time Archiving will take place every day at the specified 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 124 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS Us
125. NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used thip More information about using keyboard shortcuts in the NetGuard EVS is available in Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 50 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Audio Source Administration Audio Device Settings Window The Audio Device Settings window lets you change basic settings for an audio source access You access the Audio Device Settings window from the Administrator window Selecting an audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section then click the Settings button Box Device name Displays the name of the audio source If required you are able to overwrite the existing audio source name with a new one Enabled Lets you enable disable use of the audio source Chip You can also enable disable an audio source in the Administrator window right click the required audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section the select Disable or Enable from the menu that appears Monitor Administration Monitor Manager Window oar nstallation dependent window Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Monitor Manager window is not ava
126. NetMatrix configuration and on what other users wish to share with you you are not able to control this in the NetGuard EVS If a position in one of your views contains NetMatrix content you will be able to recognize it by the following characteristics e It automatically displays live images when predefined events occur or when other users wish to share important live images with you e It may display images from different cameras depending on which events have occurred or what other users wish to share with you e Itis surrounded by a thin blue border Thin blue border indicates NetMatrix As with other images you can enlarge images from a NetMatrix position by double clicking the blue image bar above the image A view may contain several NetMatrix positions This way you are able to watch live video from more than one NetMatrix triggered source at the same time View example oe 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 203 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual If your view contains several NetMatrix positions the positions are always ranked One of the positions will be the primary NetMatrix position another will be the secondary NetMatrix position and so on When the first live image stream is received NetMatrix automatically presents the stream in the primary NetMatrix position in your view When the next image
127. O n S S On Net Surveillance Systems I nc NetDVMS IP Based Surveillance Management System Installation and User Manual 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 U S A Phone 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Table of Contents INTRODUCTIONS pacer cca cence ce ccc ne cnc te cece ee eset ncn cee ce nate enn ecto caeeetcccieeecs tects 6 PRODUCT OVERVIEW nscicucwessnasenassncuowonseaseansntuswnnsirasieisestuGuemenaiedelaeabinoweinoirdsiotn SESSE SEESE ESSEE ESSES SEESE SESSE SESSE SEESE SSES eneee 6 OPPA TE E E A A N J SOFTWARE UPGRADE PLAN SUP uuu eee ee eeeeesssssssccccccccccccecccecsessssssssecacsccceceeeecceeeeesssssscsaaasceeceeeeeceseeeesnees 7 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS teresa acincrcan race teariatssoa bats Cata san aha satbae deiaiabealoa b s etd diac vn AA EE AAEN EAA TA J INSTALLATLTON oceni E Saa 9 INSTALLING NETDVY MS wii csccecennonsnenascsendeseomspsobedeondwaonebived obemtietowspsobednemtionn EEEE ETENA AET 9 ADMINISTRATOR APPLI CATION cccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssscees 12 ADMINISTRATOR LOGIN WINDOW uuu ci cc ceessseseccccecccccccccccesssseesssssseececccecscecessauuuaeasssseeeccecesceseeeuuuuaaaassseeeseeesess 12 ADMIN TRATOR WINDOW eaa EA EE EE sonessoon tes 12 ADDING DEVICES evoeteceasaetetoncceseseteentommscoouesestmuteiobusesomesueetusmauomsecestm
128. Online box when you want to set or clear online periods for the selected camera E mail Check the E mail box when you want to set or clear periods with e mail alerts for the selected camera Such e mail alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Output occur SMS Check the SMS box when you want to set or clear periods with SMS mobile phone text message alerts for the selected camera Such SMS alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events see About Input Events amp Output occur Sound Q nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Check the Sound box when you want to set or clear periods with sound alerts for the selected camera in the Monitor application Patrolling Check the Patrolling box when you want to set or clear periods with patrolling for a selected PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera Start event When you set an Online period you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to transfer images to the NetDVMS software continuously within the specified period Always or
129. Realtime Feed Serve ieee ccecccesssccesssccesssccsessccssssccessscsessseesssscesseeeeseeens 275 Remote Access through Web and Realtime Feed Se rvelr uu cee ccecccesssccessceessscesssscesseeeens 276 NETMATRI G10 e fe Ceeeeeene ere ee enn nee enn re ne ee er eae 281 NetMatrix Monitor MEFOQUCTION iesciccscincccacanacaveceseczeacncacadecevasseacavecevaesbendvacawacstaddaocceoinsadeshseapedsdunsteedeaceeaaens 281 Installing the NetMatrix Monitor Application ccc cccssscccsssccesssccssssccsssscsssscssssscesseeeeas 281 Configuring the NetMatrix Monitor Application cece cccessccessecssssecesssccssscessssceseeeeeeeeens 282 Day to Day Use of the NetMatrix Monitor Application ee cccccccsssccessseesssscessseeesseeeees 287 Controlling NetMatrix Monitors from a HTML Page uo cece cccccceecsccesssecessscesssscesssecesseeeseeeens 29 OGG ING orca cineca E E A A E E E 293 ADMINISTRATOR LOC FILES reinar ep eare EEE E EE NEE TINE EEE E AE T ENE ONE EEN EENES 293 MONITOR APPLICATION LOG FILES osica N E E E 293 RECORDING SERVER SERVICE LOG FILES sicctssssvsssnsasvnnsnsisneassisiievadsisavnavedenmnnsudiesiensssdanevsbetinsalaasadenvendeslasdaatedsnennbedales 293 EVENT LOC TICE arrarir a A E E E E EE OOE 293 IMAGE SERVER LOG FILT S catenins race cn EE E E ENE EAN EE AAR 294 MAGE SERVER AUDIT LOG FILES ienisesssisinsiensaneaies saeutesowndvaisnnncitinsamnnneslenseniaeununsvenstensilsmsimananslansagationsuaawenstensubmsveauorndeons 294 EXPORT EOI E ena E E A EA
130. Search Smart search lets you search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from a particular camera To use smart search do the following 1 Select the required camera in the camera layout 2 Single view is required to use smart search If you are not already viewing images from the selected camera in single view click the Single View icon in the toolbar to switch to single view L3 Single View icon 3 Click the Smart Search icon in the toolbar to open the Smart Search control panel Saach Setup Boundary Start Seach Sencie Medium Y jeee sa oc Mew Irbi Image every 10 second wundey Shop Peer D Demit E mag Dela Previn irren Hach eget Mark jaca _ sa a Smart Search control panel When the Smart Search control panel opens a blue grid will also appear as an overlay on the image in the camera layout 4 Click and drag inside the image to select the areas in which you want to perform the smart search The areas you select will become visible through the blue overlay The blue overlay thus indicates areas to be excluded from the smart search THeOFer 7 io is E ja bi T Example of selected area 5 In the Smart Search control panel select required sensitivity in the Sensitivity list 6 Select required image interval in the Interval list If you select All Images all images will be analyzed if you select e g Image every 10 seconds only one image per ten seconds of
131. Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 294 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The log check file is by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Any inconsistencies will be reported in the form of error messages written in the log check file The following table lists possible error messages other non error messages may also appear in the log check file Error Message Description Log integrity information was not found Log integrity can t be guaranteed Log information does not match integrity information Log integrity can t be guaranteed Log file name not found Log file name is empty Last line changed removed in log file name Encrypted data missing in log file name near line Inconsistency found in log file name near line Inconsistency found in log file name at beginning of log file 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 The log file could not be checked for integrity The log file exists but does not contain the expected information Thus log integrity cannot be guaranteed The log file was not present The log file was present but empty The last line of the log file did not match validation criteria The encrypted part of the log line in question was not present The log li
132. VMS will automatically be created in the new cameras Camera Alert Scheduler window The automatically created schedule can be edited manually at any time If not selected no schedule will automatically be created meaning that the camera will not automatically be transferring images to NetDVMS When required schedules can be added manually in the Camera Alert Scheduler window e Email Settings Clicking the Email Settings button opens the E Mail setup window in which you enable and configure the use of e mail alerts e Sms Settings Clicking the Sms Settings button opens the SMS settings window in which you enable and configure the use of SMS alerts Note Use of the SMS alert feature requires that an external Siemens TC 35 GSM modem has been attached to a serial port on the computer running the NetDVMS software Change Password Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Change Password window lets you change the administrator password for your NetDVMS solution arn A Cie parega j Npa pri Hem pae 0 ed cm The Change Password window Access To access the Change Password window click the Change Password button in the General Settings window e How to Change the Administrator Password To change the administrator password do the following 1 Specify the current administrator password
133. VMS system s Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server handles login and session requests between the NetPDA NetCell Client and the Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server also handles resizing of surveillance images to fit the screen layout of the PDA Client NetPDA NetCell Client The NetPDA NetCell Client is used for viewing live and recorded images from the NetDVMS surveillance system on the PDA Ghip See system requirements for the NetPDA NetCell Server and NetPDA NetCell Client under System Requirements Moving On Everything else you need to know about the NetPDA NetCell Server and Client is described in the following topics Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Server Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Client and Using the NetPDA NetCell Client 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 253 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Server The NetPDA NetCell Server is installed on an Internet Information Services IIS server and is used as a front end to the NetDVMS system s Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server handles login and session requests between the NetPDA NetCell Client and the Image Server The NetPDA NetCell Server also handles resizing of surveillance images to fit the screen layout of the NetPDA NetCell Client Before the NetPDA NetCel
134. Z camera should stay at each preset position 2 Inthe Time for each PTZ camera movement to complete field specify the number of seconds required for the PTZ camera to move between preset positions In order not to generate false motion alarms motion detection for the PTZ camera is automatically disabled while the camera moves between two preset positions After the specified number of seconds motion detection is automatically enabled again It is thus important that the camera is able to reach all of the patrolling scheme s preset positions within the number of seconds you specify If not false motion is likely to be detected Bear in mind that it takes longer for the PTZ camera to move between positions that are located physically far apart e g from an extreme left position to an extreme right position than between positions that are located physically close together 3 The total number of seconds between each preset position will be listed below the two fields e PTZ Patrolling Actions on Detected Motion You are able to combine a PTZ patrol scheme with motion detection so that when motion is detected the PTZ camera will pause its patrolling and remain at the position where motion was detected for a specified period of time To use this feature do the following 1 Select the Disable patrolling schedule if motion is detected check box 2 Select whether the PTZ camera should resume patrolling e When a certain number of second
135. Z camera type from the list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 23 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM1 port select None P T Z type Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras controlled check box is selected through COM2 If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM2 port on the video server device select the required PTZ camera type from the list If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM2 port select None e Camera List and Fields The camera list contains a line for each camera channel on the device First line from the top corresponds to camera channel 1 second line from the top corresponds to camera channel 2 etc To change camera settings select the required camera channel from the list specify required information in the following fields and click the Apply button Camera Name Name used to identify the selected camera Existing names such as the default camera names Camera 1 Camera 2 etc can be changed by overwriting the existing names Note Camera names must be unique for each device Cam Number Users of the NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify
136. a down and to the left Moves the PTZ camera down Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right Zoom out one zoom level per click Zoom in one zoom level per click a ja E a a e Preset Positions Section Having specified a camera position in the PTZ View section you define the required position as a preset in the Preset Positions section Button Description Check Box Use preset Available only for cameras supporting this feature positions from device Check box to use preset positions defined on the camera or video server device Using preset positions from the camera or video server device will clear any preset positions you have defined for the PTZ camera you will therefore be asked to confirm your selection Note In order for preset positions from the camera or video server device to work with NetDVMS the names of the preset positions must contain only the characters A Z a z and 0 9 and must not contain spaces If preset position names on the camera or video server device contain other characters or spaces change the preset position names on the device before selecting the Use preset positions from device feature Set Position Associates the preset position selected in the list with the position specified in the PTZ View section If the preset position selected in the list is yet undefined you will be asked to specify a name for the preset position Chip Since the name will appear on buttons in the Monitor
137. a group then create the required view within the group If you have created views in shared groups before you may create new views in existing shared groups or you may create a new shared group for the view Creating a Shared Group To create a shared group do the following on the Setup tab 1 Inthe Setup tab s Views section select the Shared folder or if you have created shared groups before any folder labeled Shared 2 In the Setup tab s Group Control section type a name for the group in the Group Name field then click the New button Grip Bear in mind that since the group is shared it will also appear in other users NetGuards therefore use a name which other users will immediately be able to understand Your new group will now appear in the Setup tab s Views section with the name you have specified and labeled as Shared You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View in a Shared Group To create a view in a shared group make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected in the Setup tab s Views section and do the following 1 Inthe Setup tab s View Control section type a name for the view in the View Name field Qhip Bear in mind that since the view will appear in a shared group it will also appear in other users NetGuards therefore use a name which other users will immediately be able to understand 2 Click one of the View Control section s seven availabl
138. a selected event occurs or when a particular event button is clicked one or more selected outputs will be triggered The I O Control window Jaccess You access the I O Control window from the Administrator window by clicking the I O Control button e Associating Events with Particular Outputs When associating an event with one or more outputs you are able to select between all outputs defined on the NetDVMS system you are not limited to selecting outputs defined on a particular device To associate a particular event with a particular output do the following 1 Select the required event in the Available Events list in the left side of the I O Control window Grip Events as well as event buttons may be listed thip When you select an event or event button in the Available Events list you can view detailed information about the selected event or event button under Event Information in the lower part of the window 2 Select the required output in the list of available outputs the list in the middle of the window 3 Click the gt gt button located below the Selected Outputs list This will copy the selected output to the Selected Outputs list When the selected event occurs or when the selected event button is clicked the selected output will be triggered You are able to associate an event or an event button with more than one output Simply repeat the process for each required output To remove an output from th
139. able If your organization has chosen to apply a conservative approach regarding Net based software using the NetGuard will be the perfect solution for you Installation Differences The NetGuard can be installed on the remote user s computer or the user can connect to the NetDVMS server and run the NetGuard straight from the server The NetGuard EVS must always be installed on the remote user s computer Net Framework 2 0 downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running the NetGuard EVS Feature Differences The NetGuard EVS offers considerably more advanced features than the NetGuard For information about the features of each client refer to NetGuard Introduction and NetGuard EVS Introduction 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 157 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Image Server Administration I mageServer Administrator Window The Image Server provides access to the surveillance system for remote users logging in with a NetGuard ora NetGuard EVS If the PDA Server front end is installed the Image Server also handles access for NetPDA NetCel Client users The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server i e the computer running the NetDVMS software Surveillance system administrators use the ImageServ
140. able to control the sequence in which the outputs will be displayed in the Monitor as well as the NetGuard Client and NetGuard EVS By using the up and down buttons located to the right of the list you can change a selected output s position in the sequence e The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window also lets you select output for automatic triggering on detected motion This is further described in How to Add a Motion Triggered Output 8 When ready click the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window s Exit button to return to the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 9 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click OK to return to the Administrator window 10 Close the Administrator The defined output will now be available in the Monitor and NetGuard Client NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individual users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or output in the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the ImageServer Administrator window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 117 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual How to Add a Motion Triggered Output Output e g lights sirens etc connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered automatically when motion
141. able to de interlace the image by viewing only odd or even lines in the image Zoom Controls With the zoom controls you are able to view areas of the selected image in greater magnification Use the large zoom in and zoom out buttons to find the required zoom level When you have zoomed in on an area of an image you are able to move around within the zoomed image by clicking the arrow buttons To quickly return to normal view of the selected image i e without zoom click the H i e home button Ghip To move around within the zoomed image you may also simply click and drag the image in the required direction Smoothening and Scaling 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 147 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual To digitally smoothen images from the camera select the Smooth Images check box To display images from the selected camera in the resolution they were recorded in select the Scale 1 1 check box If images are larger than the resolution available in the camera layout s camera slot they will be reduced in size to fit the camera slot The correct aspect ratio will be maintained when reducing size this way e Printing Sending and Exporting Evidence With the Viewer you have several options for generating video and audio evidence You are able to e Print evidence o Send evidence via e mail e Export en
142. ack speed When the slider is in its middle position playback is real time regardless of the recorded frame rates e Browsing Recordings with the Motion View Motion view lets you view a graph displaying sequences of recordings from the selected camera The motion levels indicated in the graph can be used as an indication of what has been recorded The graph is draggable allowing you to browse the sequences Motion view graph To use motion view click the Motion View icon in the toolbar to open the Motion View control panel in which the draggable graph is displayed ne ES Motion View icon A change in the color of the graph indicates the start of a new motion sequence The black vertical line at the center of the graph indicates the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layout Browsing using motion view To browse recordings using motion view click inside the graph area and move your mouse sideways to browse recordings Images are updated when you release the mouse button e Browsing Recordings with the Alarm Overview Alarm overview lets you view a list of sequences with detected motion for a selected camera Listed motion sequences or events are clickable allowing you to quickly jump to the time at which motion was detected or an event occurred To use the alarm overview click the Alarm Overview icon in the toolbar to open the Alarm Overview control panel in which the list is disp
143. age character set used on the NetDVMS server This will ensure that the right language and character encoding is used in clients communication with the server 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 160 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Define Local I P Ranges Window The Image Server s Define local IP ranges window lets you define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network Define local IP ranges g ae C a a at Delete Faja Slat Fiarepe ard Ghose Define local IP ranges window Jaccess You access the Define local IP ranges window by clicking the Local IP Ranges button in the ImageServer Administrator window To define a local IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window do the following 1 Specify the beginning of the IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window s first field and the end of the IP address range in the second field 2 Click the Add button The IP address range will be added to the list in the lower part of the Define local IP ranges window You may define as many local IP address ranges as required If required an IP address range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 3 When ready click the Define local IP ranges window s Close button to return to the mageServer Adm
144. ageous if you want to disable motion detection in most areas of the image in which case you can simply clear the few sections in which you do not want to disable motion detection Clear All Lets you quickly clear all grid sections in the preview image Auto By clicking the Auto button you can make NetDVMS automatically detect areas with noise insignificant changes in individual pixels which should not be regarded as motion in the image and automatically mark such areas as areas in which 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 37 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual motion detection should be disabled As the automatic detection is based on an analysis of a number of images it may take a few seconds from you click the Auto button to noisy areas are detected and marked as areas in which motion detection should be disabled e Adjust Motion De Show Grid With the Show grid check box selected default the preview image contains a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections With the Show grid check box cleared the grid in the preview image is removed This may provide a less obscured view of the preview image Selection of areas in which motion detection should be disabled takes place the same way as when the grid is visible Select Color Window Note Access to features in the Administ
145. al through the camera video server s built in web page For relative positioning PTZ cameras allowing definition of preset positions through the NetDVMS system you define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section e How to Define a Preset Position To define a preset position do the following Note Some PTZ cameras of the relative positioning kind do not allow you to define preset positions as described in the following for such cameras you should define preset positions on the camera video server itself 1 First use the controls in the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s PTZ View section to move the PTZ camera to the required position 2 Having moved the PTZ camera to the required position select an undefined item may be labeled Undefined or with a position number in the Preset Positions section s list of preset position names and click the Set Position button to define a name for the preset position For detailed information about the functionality of PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window such as the ability to test your preset positions the ability to combine preset positions with events or the ability to use preset positions in PTZ patrolling schemes see Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window s sections in the following
146. al Zoom check box you are able to use digital zoom on images from any camera displayed in the view Grip Your use of digital zoom will not affect any recording of the images any recording will still take place in the camera s regular format If you later wish to browse the recordings you can use digital zoom on the NetGuard EVS s Browse tab as well When digital zoom is enabled you will see a small overview frame in the bottom right corner of each of the view s camera positions Once you zoom in on an area of an image the overview frame will help you maintain an overview of the complete image 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 206 lt gt O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Overview frame inside image To zoom in click inside the required image and drag around the area you want to zoom in on The area you select will be highlighted by a white border When you release the mouse button the zoom will take effect White border around zoom area Even when you have zoomed in on an area you are able to move to other areas of the image while maintaining your zoom level simply drag the highlighted area in the overview frame to the required position aF an ae zi a oy _ Zoom area highlighted in overview frame To get access to a slider for adjusting the zoom level click inside the required image and move y
147. al Zoom check box you are able to use digital zoom on images from any camera displayed in the view When digital zoom is enabled you will see a small overview frame in the bottom right corner of each of the view s camera positions Once you zoom in on an area of an image the overview frame will help you maintain an overview of the complete image Overview frame inside image To zoom click inside the required image and drag around the area you want to zoom in on The area you select will be highlighted by a white border When you release the mouse button the zoom will take effect White border around zoom area _ Even when you have zoomed in on an area you are able to move to other areas of the image while maintaining your zoom level simply drag the highlighted area in the overview frame to the required position 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 215 NetDVMS User Manual Zoom area highlighted in overview frame To get access to a slider for adjusting the zoom level click inside the required image and move your mouse up or down while pressing the SHIFT key on your keyboard Zoom level slider Selecting a zoom level of 0 lets you view the whole image again Ghrip If you mouse has a scroll wheel you can also use the scroll wheel to control the zoom level On many mice clicking the scroll wheel or middle mouse button q
148. alled on remote user s computer or accessed from server Feature rich Very easy to use Setup of camera views can be handled locally as well as centrally With central views handling remote users can begin using their NetGuard instantly upon first login None the ImageServer runs as a service on the NetDVMS server NetGuard EVS Access through I mageServer Client must be installed on remote user s computer Net Framework 2 0 IS required on computers running the NetGuard EVS Very feature rich Includes features otherwise only available in Monitor application Very easy to use Setup of camera views can be handled locally as well as centrally With central views handling remote users can begin using their NetGuard EVS instantly upon first login None the ImageServer runs as a service on the NetDVMS server Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 155 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc System Administrator s Feature Set System Administrator s Access Control Options Client Flexibility re Future Features and Plugins Recommended Use 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Limited configuration primarily through Web Server Limited user rights primarily determined ona per camera basis Very limited Systems with remote users on very slow connections Very flexible configuration through lmageServer
149. amera e Outputs are used for activating external output units for example for switching on lights or sounding a siren 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 70 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The I O Setup window is used for defining which input events VMD events and outputs should be available on your system Input and VMD events can be used for triggering outputs or for triggering various actions on the surveillance system itself such as for starting or stopping cameras configured in the Camera Alert Scheduler window or for moving a PTZ camera to a particular preset position configured in the Event window for PTZ preset positions on event Once you have defined input events VMD events and outputs you are able to associate specific input events or VMD events with specific outputs in the I O Control window so that for example lights are switched on when a door is opened or when motion is detected on a camera Outputs may also be triggered by motion detection on a Specific camera even without a defined VMD event or manually through output buttons in the Monitor application both are configured in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Le Satap ka ete ET geaky ae co Due D ma 1 Eri i uthr a pT pg ae i Cs z Pii Fr eel Bande had eee Rire vere hian Degman hora
150. amera Name window Access You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Outputs button e Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs e You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the NetDVMS system e The same output may be used for manual control through an output button as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually through output buttons in the Monitor application or from a list in the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Output buttons will become available in the Monitor when the camera is selected and the Monitor s Output button is clicked In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will be able to trigger outputs by selecting them from a list To specify an output for manual triggering in the Monitor or NetGuard NetGuard EVS do the following 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Grip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output u
151. ample http 123 123 123 123 80 systeminfo xml 2 This will bring up a dialog in which you specify the user name and password of the required user Note The user must exist in the Image Server s list of users and the user should have access to the camera you wish to find the GUID of If you are a Surveillance system administrator with access to all cameras specify your own user information to be sure of finding the required GUID When ready click OK The SystemInfo function will now return an XML page with the entire NetDVMS system information for the user in question 3 In the returned XML page each individual camera is listed with a camera ID example lt camera cameraid Reception Camera 1 gt Once you have located the camera ID of the required camera you will see the camera s GUID listed on the lt guid gt line immediately below the camera ID cone param fs Cameras lt camera cameraid Reception Camara 1 gt C lt guid gt DD6CCBBE SA6A 407C B992 2B8013A59F29 lt qud gt ALLA Pe eo DB ee BA Fee Bee Ghip If the Image Server is a master server in a master slave setup information about the user s access rights to all slave servers will also be included in the returned XML page 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 292 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Logging Various types of log f
152. an Parean EEEa i Achei Techie Ripta Hes Er jot GPO WHT A AHS chris WS Sareact HPE E Examples of the same HTML page viewed with different scaling values e Enable HTML scripting Select only if the HTML page is a custom made HTML page to be used for navigating or triggering features inside the NetGuard EVS itself see examples of such custom made HTML pages in Using an HTML Page for NetGuard EVS Navigation If selected a client script required for navigating and controlling a number of features inside the NetGuard EVS will be added to the HTML page For HTML pages which are not going to be used for such purposes the client script cannot be used and may even cause the HTML page to malfunction Navigating the HTML Page The HTML page can be navigated using the links on the HTML page itself Furthermore each HTML page in a view will feature four navigation buttons in the top bar O O 2 From left to right the buttons are Back Forward Refresh and Home e Adding NetMatrix Content NetMatrix is an integrated product that allows distributed viewing of live video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS With a typical NetMatrix configuration live images are automatically presented on the required monitor when defined events occur for example when movement is detected or when another user wishes to share important live images Provided NetMatrix has been configured on the surveillance syste
153. application specify a name that is short enough to appear on a button If the name is too long it will be truncated when used on the button in the Monitor The NetGuard NetGuard EVS is capable of displaying even long preset position names Edit Name Lets you edit a preset position name selected in the list Only works for an already defined preset position name Test Lets you test a defined preset position Select the required preset position in the list then click the Test button The effect is displayed instantly in the PTZ View section Delete Lets you delete a preset position selected in the list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 44 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual When a preset position name is deleted it will appear as undefined in the list Move up Lets you move a preset position selected in the list up and down respectively Move down The selected preset position is moved one step per click By moving preset position up or down you are able to control the sequence in which available preset positions are presented in the Monitor application and in the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS In the Monitor preset position buttons are grouped in five preset banks A E of five buttons each 1 5 By moving a preset position up or down you can thus determine which preset bank and which button number s
154. arking Lot Back Side MJPEG The sequence in which cameras will appear in the carousel is automatically determined by their names which are typically made up along the structure Device name Camera name The cameras will appear in alphabetical order even if you select cameras from more than one server then loop continuously When you have selected cameras specify the carousel s other properties which are e Image Quality Select between Full default SuperHigh for megapixel High Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras included in the carousel e Frame Rate Select between Unlimited default Medium 25 of original frame rate or Low one frame per second The setting will apply for all cameras included in the carousel 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 180 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected the cameras original image aspect ratio will be maintained this will provide you with non distorted images but may lead to black bars appearing above below images If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the carousel this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images The setting will apply for all cameras included in the carousel e Interval seconds Specify the interval be
155. articular preset positions when particular events occur and for specifying a PTZ patrolling scheme Defined preset positions will also become selectable in the Monitor application as well as in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS allowing users of these applications to move the PTZ camera to the preset positions e Absolute and Relative Positioning PTZ Cameras Your configuration options depend on whether the PTZ camera in question is of the absolute positioning or relative positioning kind e Absolute For an absolute positioning PTZ camera you are able to define up to 50 preset positions All 50 preset positions can be used in the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS However only the first 25 preset positions can be used in the Monitor application You define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with the controls in the PTZ View section then naming the position in the window s Preset Positions section e Relative For a relative positioning PTZ camera the number of preset positions will depend on the camera video server and PTZ driver used For some relative positioning PTZ cameras you will only be able to use preset positions defined on the camera video server itself when this is the case the preset positions are typically defined 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 42 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manu
156. as you are watching e PTZ Control and Digital Zoom PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX technology allowing creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images cameras can be controlled from the NetGuard EVS The PTZ Control section also lets you use Digital Zoom on any camera in the view hip You may be able to use a joystick for controlling your PTZ cameras Joystick control is configured in the NetGuard EVS s Application Menu see Further Configuration 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 205 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Point and Click Control Many PTZ cameras may be controlled simply by pointing and clicking inside the images from the camera If you see a set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer over the images from a PTZ camera point and click control is supported for the camera o 4 Crosshairs indicate point and click control For some cameras crosshairs may look different For some cameras crosshairs surrounded by a square may be displayed When this is the case you are able to zoom in on an area by dragging a square around the required area in the image For such cameras zoom level is controlled by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while moving the mouse up or down this will display a zoom level slider inside the image Zoom with Mouse Wheel For PTZ and IPIX cameras you a
157. ation icon in the Viewer s toolbar I Database Information icon This will open the Database Information control panel 2 Select a camera slot in the camera layout by clicking the required slot 3 In the Database Information control panel s Video Feed select the camera you want to assign to the selected slot An image from the selected camera will show up in the selected slot unless the selected time happens to be before the first recorded image from the camera Chip Your cameras may not all transfer images in a size that exactly matches the size of the camera layout s slots This may result in black bars around images from some cameras when displayed in the camera layout If you want to adjust the images from all cameras to fit the camera layout s camera slots select the Stretch Images To Fit check box in the Settings control panel This may distort some images slightly but will help you avoid any black bars around images 4 If audio is enabled you may also select a microphone from the Audio Feed list in which case recordings from the selected microphone will be coupled with recordings from the selected camera 5 Repeat for all cameras you want displayed in the camera layout I mage Bars Each camera slot in the camera layout is identified by an image bar located in the top of each camera slot The image bar is blue When you select a particular camera in the camera layout the image bar of the selected camera image becomes a l
158. ation window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 282 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Pie Bla ee Monis Contra ja Pamma Faroe Parre a Fior biaia Bhs Oi Tigh io Aceari Al Coria F Deg Cara hiu D Eam Valles Appel Ha e Hn On ig Carers Le Pad Dn porai Fe Shey ii fe ghe auier r Cetera fot Shee ile fe Hii ira 2 Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor in the Password and Retype Password fields The password must match the password that has been specified for your NetMatrix Monitor on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt hip Memorize the password you will need it if you want to change your NetMatrix Monitor application s configuration at a later stage 3 Specify the port number on which your NetMatrix Monitor will listen for commands e g about connecting to a camera By default port 12345 is used The port number must match the port number that has been specified for your NetMatrix Monitor on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt 4 Specify which hosts other computers are allowed to send commands to your NetMatrix Monitor If commands from any host should be accepted simply select Allow All Hosts If only commands f
159. ator rights The Color window lets you select a color to be used for highlighting detected motion when images from a camera are viewed in the Monitor application J Access You access the Color window by clicking the Motion Color button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window e Selecting a Color for Highlighting Detected Motion To select a color pick the required color from the Basic Colors palette and click OK The ability to define custom colors is not available 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 36 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Define Exclusion Regions Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Define Exclusion Regions window lets you disable motion detection in specific areas of a camera s images Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background Define Excluvion Peg boris Phase ube the keiunght mouse bullies D Gabe CUCe Dec aiea in the rogge that iPoukl be eluded fran ma deieceon Men eal net be deterte d m tha sans marked vath blue ese SS a at WHER es ee me Sl N F hi
160. atrix Monitors to connect to or disconnect image feeds from a particular cameras In the following you will find information about installing the NetMatrix Monitor application configuring the NetMatrix Monitor software and day to day use of the NetMatrix Monitor software Installing the NetMatrix Monitor Application Note Read the License Terms on the Product License Sheet enclosed with the software CD before installing the NetMatrix Monitor application To install the NetMatrix Monitor application do the following 1 Insert the NetDVMS software CD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetMatrix Monitor link Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the file NetMatrixMonitor exe from the location you have saved it to hip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 281 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 2 When the installation wizard starts click Next to continue the installation 3 Read and accept the License Agreement 4 Specify your User Name and Company Name eee i T mimm limn Maes Ln leew F Lowes See l qe eo un bn
161. atrol Scheme Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list you are able to specify which of the PTZ camera s preset positions should be used for the selected patrolling scheme 1 Inthe Preset Positions list select the names of the preset positions you want to use A preset position can be used more than once in a patrol scheme for example if the preset position covers an especially important location hip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting from the Preset Positions list you are able to select several or all of list s preset positions in one go 2 Click the gt gt button to copy the selected preset positions to the Patrolling list 3 The camera will move between preset positions in the sequence they appear in the Patrolling list starting at the preset position listed first If you want to change the sequence of preset positions in the Preset Positions list select a preset position name and use the move up or move down buttons to move the selected preset position name To remove a preset position from the Patrolling list select the preset position in question and click the lt lt button e Specifying Timing Settings for a PTZ Patrol Scheme Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list you are able to specify timing settings for the patrol scheme 1 Inthe Stay at each position in the patrol schedule field specify the number of seconds for which the PT
162. aying live images from the same camera may slow down the performance of the camera The camera performance issue does not apply for NetGuard EVS NetMatrix Monitors which work differently regular NetMatrix Monitors connect straight to the camera which may load the camera heavily if several NetMatrix Monitors connect simultaneously whereas NetGuard EVS NetMatrix Monitors connect through the surveillance system s Image Server which reduces load on the camera Disconnecting Cameras from NetMatrix Monitors You are able to quickly disconnect all cameras from a particular NetMatrix Monitor 1 Select any camera in the Monitor s camera layout 2 Right click inside the camera images This brings up a menu 3 Select Disconnect all cameras from then the required NetMatrix Monitor 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 139 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual jard HHan Any live streams sent from the Monitor to the selected NetMatrix Monitor will be disconnected Bear in mind however that depending on NetMatrix configuration on your surveillance system server live streams may still be sent to the NetMatrix Monitor automatically triggered by predefined events Viewer Using the Viewer 0 nstallation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an ap
163. ble a previously disabled camera or audio source simply right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Enable AR Stairs 10 1069 1 l ER O rip Individual cameras can also be disabled enabled in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window Individual audio sources can also be disabled enabled in the Audio Device Settings Window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 14 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Administrator Window s Buttons The Administrator window features the following buttons Button Description Monitor Manager OF Recorder Manager Scheduler General Settings Q nstallation dependent feature The Monitor Manager button is available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application The Recorder Manager button is available only when the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences e The Monitor Manager button opens the Monitor Manager window in which you specify which cameras should record and display images in the Monitor application It also lets you configure the layout of the Monitor application e The Recorder Manager button ope
164. ble only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If you want NetDVMS s Web Server and RealtimeFeed Server a very basic remote access solution recommended only if remote users connect through very slow connections to run automatically each time the computer loads Windows select Add Web Servers to Startup group When ready click Next 10 Click Finish on the last step to complete the installation Grip For descriptions of how to install NetDVMS s various remote access clients see information about each individual client A good starting point is the Remote Access Overview Installation of the NetMatrix Monitor software is covered in Installing the NetMatrix Software 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 11 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Administrator Application Administrator Login Window For users without administrator rights access to certain features in NetDVMS may in some organizations have been restricted When this is the case you will be asked to specify the administrator password in the Administrator Login window in order to get access to the restricted features pee ee Login AF Pet irh se Shere id r eel The Administrator Login window You will only be asked to specify the administrator password in three situations e When you open the Administ
165. ble to specify a path yourself The exported database will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder under the path you specify example If you specify a path like C My Stuff My Files the exported file will be 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 221 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual saved in C My Stuff My Files Exported Images When specifying a path this way the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones if they do not already exist they will be created automatically 11 If you want to include a stand alone version of the Viewer application in the database export select the Include Viewer Program Files check box Grip If you include the Viewer in the export the exported databases can be viewed on any PC no additional NetDVMS software will be required Ghip A Viewer included in a database export will if possible match the language version of your NetGuard EVS If the Viewer is not available in a matching language version an English language version of the Viewer will be included 12 Click the Export button to begin the export The status bar in the upper part of the export dialog will display the status of the export 55 Export status bar Ghip If you are exporting very large databases export may take a while You can continue to use the NetGuard EVS for other p
166. camera is not selected Light blue camera selected Green Indicators Each image bar features a recordings indicator which is useful when browsing recordings The indicator lights up green each time a new image is displayed 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 208 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Enlarging mages from Particular Cameras in a View To enlarge images from a particular camera in a view double click the camera position s blue image bar Double clicking blue image bar enlarges view To return to normal view simply double click the blue image bar again Tip If you have selected reduced image quality for the camera on the Setup tab images from the camera will be displayed in full quality when enlarged e Camera Shortcut Menus By right clicking an image in one of a view s camera positions you get access to a shortcut menu e Copy Available for all cameras Lets you copy the displayed image as a single bitmap image to your clipboard The copied image can then be pasted into other applications such as word processors etc e Camera Only available for single camera view positions not for hotspots carousels or NetMatrix positions Lets you select another camera for display in the view position This way you are able to switch between viewing images from different cameras in the same view posit
167. ccurs and until another external event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists The camera will increase its frame rate when the start event occurs and return to the original frame rate when the stop event occurs Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Desired speedup framerate fields Desired Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected speedup framerate Specify required number of frames to be used when motion is detected and or an external event occurs in first field and select required unit per Second per Minute or per Hour from the list The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified in the Desired framerate field Example 16 frames per second Grip When you specify a frame rate the interval between images is automatically calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields e Camera Monitor Setup In the Camera Monitor Setup section you are able to specify how images from the camera are displayed primarily when viewed in the Monitor application Field Description Show Motion Oi nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If
168. cessing the Administrator application or wishing to use protected features must type the administrator password in the window before access is granted Restricting Users Rights To restrict how users who are not administrators use the Monitor application select the Enable Protection check box then select the features to which users who are not administrators should have access Q nstallation dependent features The ability to restrict users access to the Monitor application is available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the ability to restrict users rights is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences e Application Startup Allows users to start the Monitor application without having to specify the Administrator password e Application Shutdown Allows users to close the Monitor application e Manual Control Allows users to start and stop cameras manually in the Monitor application e Start Administrator from Monitor Allows users to open the Administrator application from the Monitor application without having to specify the administrator password e Browser Allows users to start the Viewer feature in the Monitor application The Viewer lets users browse stored images export images etc e PTZ Control Allows users to use the Mon
169. chiving date and time are also automatically created The sub directories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_VideoServerChannel DateAndTime Example With the default archiving folder located under C videodata images from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st June 2005 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video server device with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination C videodata Archives 00408c51e181_2 2005 06 01 23 15 If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video server device with several channels the video server channel indication in the sub directory named after the device s MAC address will always be _ 1 Example e g 00408c51e181 1 Storing Archives at Other Locations than the Default Archiving Directory You are of course also able to store archives at other locations than locally in the default archiving directory You may for example specify that your archives should be stored on a network drive 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 122 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual When archiving to other locations than the default archiving directory NetDVMS will first store the archive in the local default archiving directory then immediately move the archive to the archiving location you have specified Whi
170. chnology that allows creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images The NetGuard EVS supports up to four different viewpoints from a single IPIX camera The IPIX Split Mode list lets you select the required spilt mode e One by One lets you view a single viewpoint e Two by Two lets you view four different viewpoints at a time When viewed on any of the NetGuard EVS s tabs the IPIX camera will appear as specified with either one or four viewpoints from the same image Chip When viewing different viewpoints from an IPIX camera on the Live or Browse tabs you are able to navigate each viewpoint independently by clicking inside each viewpoint or by using the buttons in the Live or Browse tabs PTZ Control sections e Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected images will not be stretched to fit the size of the camera position Rather images will be displayed with the aspect ratio with which they have been recorded This may result in horizontal or vertical black bars appearing around the images from some cameras If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the position in the view this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images Example The same image viewed with Maintain Image Aspect Ratio selected left and cleared right e Only Update Image on Motion If selected the camera s images will only be updated on the NetGuard EVS s Live tab whe
171. cify that the terms on both sides of the AND operator must be present Example User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday In the above example the term User001 as well as the term Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with AND the fewer results you will retrieve 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 91 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual User001 Door0S53 Example Few results match the criterion User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday OR Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message include field With an OR operator you specify that either one or another term must be present Example User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday In the above example the term User001 or the term Door053 or the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be met The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is present As a rule of thumb the more terms you combine with OR the more results you will retrieve Example Many results match the criterion User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday Remove Lets you remove the item immediately to the left of a cursor positioned in the Event message include field If no cursor has been positioned in the Event message include field the la
172. cking inside the images from the camera If you see a set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer over the images from a PTZ camera point and click control is supported for the camera a 8 Crosshairs indicate point and click control For some cameras crosshairs may look different For some cameras crosshairs surrounded by a square may be displayed When this is the case you are able to zoom in on an area by dragging a square around the required area in the image For such cameras zoom level is controlled by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while moving the mouse up or down this will display a zoom level slider inside the image PTZ Navigation Buttons Alternatively use the navigation buttons in the PTZ Control section to move the selected PTZ or IPIX camera The round middle button lets you quickly move the camera to its home i e default position The plus and minus buttons lets you zoom in and out respectively PTZ Preset Positions If preset positions have been defined for the selected PTZ camera you are able to select such positions from the Presets list Selecting a preset position from the list will make the PTZ camera move to the specified position Preset positions are defined by the system administrator the Presets list will be empty if no preset positions have been defined for the selected PTZ camera I PIX PTZ Positions You are able to move to a specific position in an IPIX view and then save tha
173. clicking the blue bar above the image 4 Click and drag inside the image to select the area in which you want to perform the smart search 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 213 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Tip You are able to select more than one area The areas you select will become visible through the blue overlay The blue overlay thus indicates areas to be excluded from the smart search Example of selected area With the Smart Search section s Include and Exclude options you are able to toggle between including excluding areas when you drag With the Smart Search section s Invert button you are able to quickly invert your selection if required Tip As an alternative to using the Invert button simply press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while clicking dragging to select an area 5 Click the Smart Search section s Save button to save your search area settings Tip If you want to experiment with further changes to the search area you can return to your Saved search area settings by clicking the Load button 6 Inthe Smart Search section select required search sensitivity Very Low Very High in the Sensitivity list 7 Select required image interval in the Interval list If you select All Images all images will be analyzed If you select e g 10 seconds only one image per ten seconds of recor
174. ct We Favorites Tosh Hep amp k I i 5 i P F Search pt Ferrveites fe z E cidan htm tal gt i e z ie Laine oe gt g i k gt iG Cone Si My Computer HTML page with image map for navigating between views How you structure and create an image map is of course highly individual For this example we divided the floor plan into four colored zones and defined an image map area for each zone This way users will be able to simply click a zone in order to go to the view displaying cameras from that zone For instance the red zone on our image map mirrors the Go to Shared Group2 View2 button from the previous example When clicking inside the red zone users will go to View2 in Group2 Importing the HTML Page Importing a navigation HTML page into a view is in principle no different from importing any other type of HTML page into a view in the NetGuard EVS The two important things to remember are e The HTML page should be stored locally on the user s PC e You should make sure HTML scripting is enabled on the HTML page when importing it To import the HTML page do the following 1 Go to the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab 2 From the Setup tab s System Overview section drag the HTML Page link to the required position in the required view 3 This will open the Open URL dialog in which you specify the required HTML page 4 Having imported the HTML page select its position in the view and go to the Setup tab s P
175. cu ae eT rs i T Hra O Cancel Now specify information in the following fields e Timer event name Specify a name for the timer event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp e Timer event occurs after Specify the amount of time that should pass between the event occurring event button being clicked and the timer event in either seconds or minutes When ready click OK 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 112 3 Click OK to return to the Administrator window O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual In the window from which you opened the New Timer window your newly defined timer event will now be listed Timer event in this example associated with a VMD event listed in I O Setup window You may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event Timer event associated with an event button listed in Event Buttons window You may have to click the expand icon I in front of the name of the required device as well as the required main event to see the timer event Timer event associated with a generic event listed in Generic Events window You may have to click the expand icon Lt in front of the word Generic as well as the required main event to see the timer
176. d any global event buttons as well as any event buttons for the selected camera will be displayed below the Events button Simply click an event button to trigger the associated event 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 134 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Quick Browse Mute Audio Admin Login Administrator Exit Ewart i Example of event buttons Up to eight event buttons can be displayed for each camera Event buttons are defined in the Administrator application Ask your system administrator if in doubt about using event buttons defined for use with cameras in your organization Available only when a hot spot is enabled Quick Browse lets you browse images from the selected camera in the hot spot Use the back and forward buttons below the Quick Browse button to move backwards and forwards Chip The Viewer offers more advanced browsing features Note Use of the Quick Browse feature may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button Lets you mute audio from cameras on which audio is enabled Recording is not affected by muting audio in the Monitor For users without administrator rights access to certain features in NetDVMS may in some organizations have been restricted Provided you know the administrator password the Admin Login button lets you access such pr
177. d Note however that the export location may be changed as part of the export process Export log files are named according to the structure ExportYYYMMDD log e g Export20053112 log Note however that database exports may be encrypted and or compressed in which case export log files are also encrypted compressed and further file extensions such as mzi or men may appear in export log file names Web Server Log Files These files log activity on the Web Server if logging is enabled in the NetDVMS HTTP Server window By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Web Server log files are named according to the structure www_YYYYMMDD log e g www_20051231 log e Log File Structures Most log files generated by NetDVMS use a shared structure complying with the W3C Extended Log File Format Each log file consists of a header and a number of log lines e The header outlines the information contained in the log lines e The log lines consist of two main parts the log information itself and an encrypted part The encrypted part makes it possible through decryption and comparison to assert that a log file has not been tampered with e Integrity Checks and Possible Error Messages Log files are subjected to an integrity check once every 24 hours The result of the integrity check is automatically written to a file named according to the structure LogCheck_YYYYMMDD log e g LogCheck_20061231 log 222 Route 59
178. d sound for five seconds when triggered ddd Hra Puipui EJ External output conmencteditc Suns Quigut cormected on Outset i Keep aia iO secre e a Enteral uni eara Erer Tew a cren ip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing iO riip Teir erei Foes l i Eier T ton Esi ees mern Add nss Ge a dipj aT T eena Tba ee Soe re shoa rl Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 5 In the Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 115 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button Tamms tatting Tv tay Carnet t horus Late Dam Hoo Sada r Thr fa beep a Qi egali bi ma D tosl SF sabe penip Upstate m eo ri E Lin ma a J f F p aaiim F inmi wj r Carr arip tmu E baii Sd Ged e a mages
179. d IPIX camera The round middle button lets you quickly move the camera to its home i e default position The plus and minus buttons lets you zoom in and out respectively PTZ Preset Positions The Presets list does not apply for navigating recorded images from IPIX cameras IPI X PTZ Preset Positions You are able to move to a specific position in the IPIX view and then save that position by clicking the Save button When you later want to return to the saved position click the Load button e Printing Images 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 245 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual With the Browse tab s Print section you are able to print recorded images To print an image do the following 1 Select the required camera from the Print section s Source list Alternatively you may select the camera in the view 2 Select the required date and time by using the controls in the Time Navigation section 3 Click the Print section s Print button This will open a separate window with a preview of the image to be printed as well as information about camera name image capture time print time and user name of the user printing the image You also have the option of including a user s note for example a description of the recording 4 Click the separate window s Print link to print the image and associated details e E
180. d Live I mages to NetMatrix Monitors Othe Monitor application is installation dependent and available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 138 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Provided one or more NetMatrix Monitors have been installed and configured on your surveillance system you are able to send live images from the Monitor s camera layout for immediate display on particular NetMatrix Monitors To send live images to a particular NetMatrix Monitor do the following 1 Select the required camera in the Monitor s camera layout 2 Right click inside the camera images This brings up a menu listing available NetMatrix Monitors 3 Select the required NetMatrix Monitor The live images will automatically appear on the selected NetMatrix Monitor In case it is not possible to connect to the selected NetMatrix Monitor you will receive an error message More than one NetMatrix Monitor can display the same live video stream at the same time Bear in mind that having several NetMatrix Monitors displ
181. d another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes To define a timer event do the following 1 A timer event requires that an input event VMD event generic event or event button has already been defined Begin by selecting the required event or event button e If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Input or VMD Event Click the Administrator window s I O Setup button to open the I O Setup window In the I O Setup window s Defined events list click the plus sign next to the required device select the required input or VMD event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window e If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Event Button Click the Administrator window s Event Buttons button to open the Event Buttons window In the Event Buttons window s Defined Events list select the required event button then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window e If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Generic Event Click the Administrator window s Generic Events button to open the Generic Events window In the Generic Events window s Defined Events list select the required generic event then click the Add new event button to open the New Timer window 2 Inthe New Timer window the Timer event is started by field will show the name of the selected event or event button Hirar Timar Eg Teed eevee of d iy Espai Bain T T a n Fate ma meri oc
182. d to confirm that you want to shut down the Realtime Feed Server 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 275 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Remote Access through Web and Realtime Feed Servers Q nstallation dependent features Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server are not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Provided the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server are running on the NetDVMS surveillance system remote users are able to connect to the surveillance system through a regular Microsoft Internet Explorer browser When accessing the surveillance system this way remote users will their access rights permitting be able to view live images from cameras on the surveillance system browse recorded images as well as generate and export AVI movie clips of recorded events Remote users should be aware that a more advanced and feature rich way of accessing the surveillance system may be available Ask your NetDVMS system administrator if it is possible to connect with a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS e Logging in to the Surveillance System Note To log in to the surveil
183. demarks etc Copyright 2007 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Trademarks NetDVMS is a registered trademark of On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners Disclaimer This help system is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty On Net Surveillance Systems Inc reserves the right to make adjustments without prior notification All names of people and organizations used in this help system s examples are fictitious Any resemblance to any actual organization or person living or dead is purely coincidental and unintended 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 298
184. der The orange border indicates that the position is used for a hotspot the orange border will also be evident when using the view on the Browse and Live tabs Thin orange border indicates hotspot 3 When the hotspot position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section e Image Quality Select between Full default SuperHigh for megapixel High Medium or Low The setting will apply for all cameras displayed in the hotspot e Frame Rate Select between Unlimited default Medium 25 of original frame rate or Low one frame per second The setting will apply for all cameras displayed in the 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 181 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual hotspot e Maintain Image Aspect Ratio If check box is selected the cameras original image aspect ratio will be maintained this will provide you with non distorted images but may lead to black bars appearing above below images If check box is cleared images will be stretched to fit the hotspot this may lead to slightly distorted images but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the images The setting will apply for all cameras displayed in the hotspot e Adding Static Images Static images can be used in views for a variety of purposes for company logos for including floor plans or
185. dings will be analyzed Selecting a long interval will greatly reduce the time required to complete the search However with a long interval the search may not find motion sequences that are shorter than the specified interval 8 Click the Next move forward in time or Previous move back in time buttons to search through sequences with motion detected in the selected areas Note Smart search is always carried out from the time of the image you are viewing and forwards or backwards 9 The smart search begins and a progress window displays search progress When a sequence with motion inside the selected area s is found it will be displayed in the view Motion will be highlighted Tip The Browse tab s Time Navigation section control panel will show exact corresponding time information 10 If required click the Next or Previous button again to continue the smart search e PTZ Control and Digital Zoom The Browse tab s PTZ Control section lets you navigate recorded images from IPIX cameras IPIX is a technology allowing creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images it requires either a dedicated IPIX camera or a regular camera equipped with a special I PIX lens The PTZ Control section also lets you use Digital Zoom on any camera in the view Note As the Browse tab is used for viewing already recorded images the PTZ Control section cannot be used for controlling PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras To control PTZ cameras use t
186. displayed prominently as coming from the latest event simply because the NetMatrix Monitor is already showing the images in a less prominent position By selecting Disconnect then connect you can avoid this issue and ensure that images from the latest event are always displayed prominently e Disconnect Disconnect the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step Use if a particular event should cause images from a particular camera to stop being displayed in the NetMatrix Monitor even if they are not yet old enough to be oushed out of the NetMatrix Monitor When you have selected an action another red exclamation mark will indicate that there is still some configuration to be done ca sla Deria Ding Motor on Back Don Wisal Wira Caers i Comect 4 Right click the action to select which camera to apply the action on EF Alas Conta Dipl Motion on Back Door Wes Wing Camera Connect Cealete Commect En Cites East Wirey Carnera Rack foo West Wing Camera b Evene Office Cami Canera In this example we have specified that when motion is detected on Camera b the selected NetMatrix Monitor should connect to Camera b ca Alan Cena Depi at Motion on Black Dou Wad fing Camera b bap Cornet a Back Dou Wert wing Comes h 5 Repeat as required Bear in mind that you define events and actions for a single NetMatrix Monitor at a time 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901
187. dition to IP video camera devices and IP video server devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to NetDVMS When such I O devices are added they can be used in events based system setup in the same way as a camera For more information about using I O devices see Using Dedicated O Devices For information about which I O devices are supported refer to the release note 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 18 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Once a device is added in NetDVMS any cameras attached to the device are automatically recognized by the software and listed in the Administrator window s Device Manager section Devica Maret BE Beck Doa 1010683 Th Comeat s Meeting Foon 10 10 50 10 Th Comers 1 Ta Camera 2 Ta Cnead Te Canea 4 Detail from the Administrator window s Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached To add a device use the following procedure Prerequisites You must have configured IP address password etc on the device itself as described by the manufacturer 1 Open the Administrator window 2 Inthe Administrator window click the Add Device button This will start the Device Setup Wizard 3 On the first step of the wizard identify th
188. ds the Remember password check box must be selected in order for the auto login feature to be available Note Depending on your type of organization and work environment security restrictions may apply Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about whether it is safe to use this feature When ready click Connect thip If a problem or other issue occurs during login you will receive an error message see Login Error Messages for more information 5 Only relevant if you have logged in before if logging in for the first time move to step 6 The NetGuard EVS will ask you if you want to keep the view s you last used Restore Views Egl Restore viesa from aig kT hiim iy a ae Your options are 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 171 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Main View If the check box is selected the view you last used in the NetGuard EVS s main window will be restored If check box is cleared no view will initially be displayed in which case you must select the required view yourself e Detached Views Available only if you used views in primary display on secondary displays or in floating windows the last time you were logged in on the computer in question see Using Multiple Windows for more information If check box is selected the views you last sent to Pri
189. e 244 COTO TINO eaa E E EE E EEE EEE 244 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 4 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual FOU aC COI CO aca tc ws tect oases E E E 245 PFZ Navigation BURTONS Sasceacccastcccsecseesceestcotcc ge stasccosnsnsccazdeossceasenaicanseaostouacasiceasteantesteabasenstacseanneeeeanceaoceasaee 245 PIZ Preset FOS ONG vara tatesterseasaceiresatteessses acs atesetncetaeaieceasteaadeas te icdsauen in a aiii 245 IPIX PIZ Preset gt 9 gc pe ee Ee ae 245 Exporting Video EVIDENCE ee cecccccecccccsscccsssscessssccsssecssssecesssscesssecessscessecesseesssecessesensscessseceeseeceeas 246 STS SS sec EA ects tea sere tame teed Gace ence cass R 248 Using an HTML Page for Navigation in N tGuard n ccc cece cccsccesssscsessscesssscsssecesseesseeeens 249 Logging Out OF INGE GU AN goss eae nceseceettdtvcanetesavenceedetcecevonntasdedcabauaitonuconarsdntasttinatonetdantevetenezesceeioncceceatesaees 232 NETPDA NETCELL CHIEN TG SERVER sccesinczecorssenesniasoantsnsheonsnsunierstuabenuedemumnbischiseshdanesebesniassmasinanaeteahdantnsmeurtelieth 253 NetPDA NetCell Client amp Server NtrodUuctiOn cece cccessccessccesssccssssccssscsssscessesessseeeeeas 253 Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Server uuu ce cccecsccesssecsssscsssscesssseeseeenees 254 IEP eR SC LOW aee E ET E E E A A EE 257 Installing amp Con
190. e Database Start Will appear on Browse tab only Indicates that the time selected is before the time of the first recording in the camera s database The first image in the camera s database will be shown in the camera position in order to indicate that recordings from the camera are available but only from a time later than the selected time Connected to Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number Indicates that a connection to the camera has been established e Connecting to Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number Indicates that a connection to the camera is currently being established e Connection refused Reason Indicates that connecting to the camera in question is not allowed for example because your rights to access recordings from the camera have been changed by the surveillance system administrator Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Connection to Device Name Camera Name on IP Address Port Number lost Reconnecting Indicates that connection to the camera has been lost and that another connection attempt is currently being made e Connection to engine failed Retrying Indicates that a connection to the surveillance system server could not be established and that another connection attempt is currently being made This message may occur if connection to the surveillance system is temporarily lost If your surveillance system consists of several
191. e Log Files These files log activity in the recording server when it runs as the Recording Server service A log file is created for each day the service is used Q nstallation dependent These log files are only generated when the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service If the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application these log files are not generated See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section Recording Server service log files are named according to the structure RecordingServerYYYYMMDD log e g RecordingServer20051231 log Event Log Files These files log information about registered events read more about events in About Input Events amp Output A log file is created for each day on which events have occurred By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Event Recording Settings section Event log files should be viewed using the Monitor application s Viewer or NetGuard EVS e Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events butto
192. e New View layouts Your new view is automatically added to the selected group Grip A group whether private or shared can contain an unlimited number of views More than one private and shared group can exist Adding Cameras to the View Having created a view within a group you are able to specify which cameras should be included in the view 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 235 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual To add cameras to a view do the following 1 Inthe Setup tab s Views section select the required view When you select a view the layout of the selected view is outlined in the main section of the NetGuard window 2 Inthe Setup tab s System Overview section click the plus sign next to the required server to view a list of available cameras 3 Inthe list select a camera and drag the camera to the required position in the view When you have dragged a camera to a position in the view the name of the camera will appear in the selected position You will not see images from the camera yet as the Setup tab is only for configuration not for viewing images Repeat for each camera required in the view hip If you want to use all of the cameras under a server you may simply drag the required server to the view this will automatically place all of the server s cameras in the view begin
193. e Selected Outputs list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located below the Selected Outputs list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 98 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window you are able to associate a camera with particular external outputs defined in the O Setup window for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as manually through output buttons available in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS in the Monitor application and NetGuard Chat pat aerrirggs A EA BI pipi iisa ihai D j hama i TD ej The Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window J Access You access the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window by clicking the Outputs button e Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs e You are able to select between all available outputs i e outputs defined as output events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as o
194. e The NetGuard and NetGuard EVS Choice of two types of remote access clients each providing users with intuitive remote access to the surveillance system The NetGuard and NetGuard EVS let users view live images play back recorded images activate outputs print and export evidence etc The NetGuard lets users view live images play back recorded images activate outputs print and export evidence etc The NetGuard can be downloaded from the surveillance system server and installed locally on remote users PCs or the users can access it straight from the surveillance system server through an Internet Explorer browser The extra feature rich NetGuard EVS should always be downloaded and installed on remote users PCs e The Web Server and Realtime Feed Server Simple alternatives to the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS for providing remote access to the surveillance system the Web Server and Realtime Feed Server let system administrators manage remote access Remote users access the Web Server and Realtime Feed Server through an Internet Explorer browser 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 6 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Updates OnSSI regularly releases service updates for its products offering improved functionality and support for new devices If you are an OnSSI system administrator it is recommended that you ch
195. e bar is blue When you select a particular camera in the camera layout the image bar of the selected camera image becomes a lighter blue Sony R230 1 Camera 1 Camera image enlarged detail shows image bar The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar also features three colored indicators e Event indicator the leftmost of the three indicators solid yellow Lights up when events specified in the Administrator application occur Click anywhere inside the image to reset the event indicator This indicator may appear black if event indication has not been specified for the camera in question of if no specified events have occurred Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Motion indicator the indicator in the middle solid red Lights up when motion is detected in the image Click anywhere inside the image to reset the motion indicator e Online indicator the rightmost of the three indicators blinking green Changes state every time an image is received from the camera Hot Spot If enabled in the Administrator application a hot spot provides you with an enlarged view of images from a selected camera When enabled the hot spot can either appear inside the camera layout or as a separate floating window e If the hot spot is located
196. e com mywebpage htm or If the HTML page is stored locally on your computer specify its location on your computer example C myfiles mywebpage htm or click the Browse button to browse for the required HTML page 3 Click the OK link Changing the Properties of an HTML Page Once an HTML page is added to a view you are able to change its properties by doing the following 4 On the Setup tab select the imported HTML page in the view Properties of the selected HTML page will appear in the Setup tab s Properties section 5 Change the required property 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 182 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e URL Click the New button to specify a new URL or location of the required HTML page e Scaling Select the required scaling of the HTML page The optimal scaling depends entirely on the content of the imported HTML page and how you want to display it As a rule of thumb with a high scaling value e g 1280x1024 text on the HTML page will appear relatively small and a considerable amount of content will be visible without the need for scrolling With a low scaling value e g 320x200 text on the HTML page will appear relatively large and a relatively small amount of content can be displayed without the need for scrolling EIYE Blocada WT na DOi E i Laing Ay Fyk ta fo P
197. e number of the telephone to which SMS alerts should be sent e Message Specify required message text for SMS alerts Message text must be no longer that 100 characters and must only contain the following characters a z A Z 0 9 as well as commas and full stops Note that camera information as well as date and time information is automatically included in SMS alerts e Time btw transmissions Specify required minimum time in minutes to pass between the sending of each SMS alert per camera Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each SMS alert per camera even if motion is detected or events occur in between If specifying 0 SMS alerts will be sent each time motion is detected or events occur potentially resulting in a very large number of SMS alerts being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore consider the motion detection sensitivity configured for each camera in the Adjust Motion Detection window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 68 NetDVMS User Manual e Testing Your SMS Alert Configuration You are able to test your SMS alert configuration by clicking the Test button This will send a test SMS to the specified recipients Inputs Events amp Outputs About Inputs Events amp Outputs Input received from a wide variety of sources can be used to generate events in NetDV
198. e of your choice e Deleting Views or Groups To delete a view or group do the following on the Setup tab 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 178 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 1 Select the required view or group in the Views section 2 Click the Delete button x You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the selected view or group e Using Your Views on Different Computers Your user settings including information about your views are stored centrally on the surveillance system server This means that you are able to use your views private as well as shared on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed provided you log in to the NetGuard EVS with your own user name and password Qhip For information about adding content cameras etc to views see How to Add Content to Views How to Add Content to Views Once you have created views in the NetGuard EVS you are able to add content to the views Content can be images from individual cameras carousels for viewing images from alternating cameras in a single view position a hotspot for viewing selected camera images in high quality static images such as gif jpeg etc HTML pages or NetMatrix triggered images e Adding Individual Cameras To add a camera to a view do the following 1 Inthe Setup tab s Views section select
199. e required device either by e Typing the IP address of the device Grip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard or e Typing the DNS host name of the device This requires that you select the Use DNS host names box Device Setup Wizard i Pine pech nia about Ghee ete device Thing vak iana Pi tt EPA ar the emt mm W L Use DHS hot rra r Dii the Port Setup bution i ofher han HITE pot G md FTF pat 21 i ued Ponse MEE oe Specifying the IP address of a device When ready click Next to go to the second step of the wizard 4 Ifa password is used for the device type the password for the device s administrator account called an admin or root account on some devices Leave the Autodetect Device option selected Click Next 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 19 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 5 When the device has been detected type the Device License Key DLK for the device in the DLK field Device Setup Wirard EJ Tha same hai kard Hea biker edi iE oi Bh pee Pie Mihe Dra Toppa MAD Bidea 4 AgS fT 10 THR T e E E A T E Pidi Aegis wa Hera off DLE eee ofl h edie hor mete iar ou fi c rw Specifying DLK for the device ip If you have imported DLKs see How to Import Device License Keys
200. e running Test Interface Is Displayed but It Is not Possible to Log In Solutions 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 259 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Start the NetPDA NetCell Server Administrator from the desktop shortcut and verify that the IP address or hostname in the Host IP field points to your Image Server Also make sure that the port number in the Port field matches the port number on which the Image Server is running Make sure that the Image Server is running on the surveillance system Make sure that the user account used when accessing the test interface has been correctly set up on the Image Server and that the user account provides access to the required cameras Installing amp Configuring the NetPDA NetCell Client The NetPDA NetCell Client is installed on the PDA or the cellphone itself by using a PC with the Microsoft ActiveSync synchronization program First you install the NetPDA NetCell Client on the PC then you use ActiveSync to transfer the NetPDA NetCell Client from the PC to the PDA Important for NetCell you must choose the adequate NetCell client for your cellphone s model and operating system Chip If ActiveSync is not installed on the PC you can download the latest version from http www microsoft com downloads e Installing the NetPDA NetCell Client Note Before
201. e separate events occurring a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event button has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e Acamera starts when an event button is clicked in the Monitor application a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds e A camera starts and the lights are switched on when an event button is clicked in the Monitor application a timer event stops the camera after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes To define a timer event for an event button select the required event button in he Defined Events list then click the Add new event button When you click the Add new event button while an already specified event button is selected in the Defined Events list the New Timer window opens allowing you to specify the required timer event hip You may specify several timer events under a single event button However you cannot use a timer event under another timer event e Editing Event Buttons and Timer Events To edit an event button or a timer event specified under an event button select the required event button or timer event in the Defined Events list then click the Edit selected button If you have selected an event button clicking the Edit selected button will open the Edit Event window for editing event buttons If you have selected a timer event clicking the Edit selected
202. e span 1 hour 2 hours or 12 hours should be used in the timeline and whether the newest recordings should be indicated at the top or at the bottom of the timeline You specify this in the Settings control panel Chip Use 1 hour or 2 hour time spans for the best possible overview of recordings Browsing using the timeline browser To browse recordings using the timeline browser click inside the timeline browser and move your mouse up or down without releasing the mouse button Browsing is fast when clicking outside the magnification area and slow when clicking inside the magnification area e Browsing Recordings with the Playback Controls The Viewer s playback controls are used for browsing and playing recordings just like on a video recorder AKIKI p i Sow T o fa a a FAR oLa o Playback controls Click t or m to browse to the oldest or the most recent recordings from the selected camera Click S or z to browse to the previous or next motion sequence from the selected camera 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 144 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Click or to browse to the previous or next image from the selected camera ee z Use Es to start and stop playback When playback is started all cameras in the camera layout will play back recordings Use Sten FA to control the playb
203. e used by the surveillance system for triggering actions Typically most events on the surveillance system are generated automatically For example detected motion can be defined as an event which in turn triggers an action such as recording on a camera A will receive lots of sound notifications If you select Always on the amount of event related sound notifications you are likely to receive will depend on the nature and number of events related to the camera in question Events are configured on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt If you select sound notifications for more than one camera you may also hear more notifications again depending on the surveillance system s event configuration Ghip By default the NetGuard EVS uses a simple sound file for its sound notifications The sound file called Notification wav is located in the NetGuard EVS installation folder If you want to use another wav file as your notification sound simply name the required file Notification wav and place it in the NetGuard EVS installation folder instead of the original file The file Notification wav is used for event as well as motion detection notifications it is not possible to use different sound files for different cameras or to distinguish between event and motion detection notifications e Apply to All The Apply To All button lets you quickly apply the camera settings for the selected camera t
204. eServer Administrator window The button is only available if you have selected the mageServer Administrator window s Restrict user access option button Prerequisites Before you define user rights you should define users You do this by clicking the mageServer Administrator window s User Setup button To define access rights for a particular user do the following in the Define User Rights window 1 Inthe User list select the required user or if groups of users have been imported through Active Directory group 2 Inthe Global User Rights section select the user s group s global i e non camera specific rights e View Live Ability to view the Live tab in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS If a user group does not have this right the Live tab will not be selectable in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS e Browse Ability to view the Browse tab in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS If a user group does not have this right the Browse tab will not be selectable in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS e Setup Ability to view the Setup tab in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS If a user group does not have this right the Setup tab will not be selectable in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS e Edit Shared Views Ability to create and edit views in shared groups in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS Views placed in shared groups can be accessed by every NetGuard NetGuard EVS user for more information about views see Creating Views NetGuard and How to Create and Manage Views NetG
205. each camera Each camera s shortcut number is specified in the Cam Number field A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or special characters and must be no longer than eight digits Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers 3 12345678 Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers A 3 123456789 It is highly recommended that you use a unique camera shortcut number for each camera Note Camera shortcut numbers are only used in the NetGuard EVS In other applications such as the Monitor or the NetGuard the camera shortcuts cannot be used Grip You can also assign shortcut numbers to cameras in the Camera Name and Number window Chip More information about using keyboard shortcuts in the NetGuard EVS is available in Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts Camera Type Lets you select whether the camera on the selected camera channel is Fixed or Moveable e Fixed Camera mounted in a fixed position o Moveable PTZ camera Device Port Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 24 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Lets you select which control port on the video server should be used for controlling PTZ functionality on the camera Port Address Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field Lets you specify port address
206. echoes Fite 5 d ia li Boas Foii Coreen ude Fasia 7 The Export control panel 2 In the Export control panel s Video Feed and Audio Feed lists select the camera and if required microphone you want to export Ghip With the options Current Video Feed s and Current Audio Feed s you can batch export all cameras and microphones in your current view 3 Browse to the required start time for the export and click the Start Time section s Set button 4 Browse to the required stop time of the export and click the Stop Time section s Set button 5 Select required Export Format click the Next button and follow one of the procedures described in the following Note that procedures vary depending on the selected export format Export format AVI file a e Select required Export Path if you keep the default setting the files will be exported to an Exported Images folder on your desktop Select required frame rate Full will export all images to the AVI file Half will reduce the size of the AVI file by only exporting every second image yet still play back in real time speed Select whether timestamps from the surveillance system should be added to the AVI file In the Codec list select the video codec compression decompression technology you want to use for generating the AVI file The Codec list only lists codecs supporting the resolution of the camera hip If available the codecs Indeo Video 5
207. eck the OnSSI website www onssi com for updates at regular intervals in order to make sure you are using the most recent version of OnSSI Software Upgrade Plan SUP As the cornerstone of its support to customers OnSSI offers a Software Upgrade Plan SUP The purpose of the SUP is to provide you with lower cost alternative to standard Software upgrades SUP coverage can easily be purchased together with most new OnSSI products but cannot be purchased as an add on to a previously purchased product During the period covered by the SUP customers are entitled to receive all generally released new versions of their OnSSI software including both interim and major releases changes service packs and any patches for the product Having a valid SUP may easily lead to measurable savings for your organization The standard cost of a product upgrade for example from version X 1 to X 2 is normally 35 of the full product s recommended retail price for a single upgrade depending on the product the whole SUP cost per year is much lower then the above single software upgrade and you will be entitle to receive as many upgraded released in the covered period System Requirements The following are minimum system requirements for running NetDVMS and associated applications e Surveillance System Server Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Server and Advanced Server Windows XP Professional 32 and 64 bit or Windows
208. ed for five days To specify another number of days simply overwrite the value in the Days to log field The current day s activity is always logged even with a value of 0 in the Days to log field The maximum number of days to log is 9999 hip Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 60 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Event Recording Settings As opposed to the general log files which contain information about activity on the surveillance system itself event log files contain information about registered events for more information about events see About Input Events amp Output The Event Recording Settings section lets you specify where to keep event log files and how long for Event log files should be viewed using the Monitor application s Viewer or the NetGuard EVS e Viewer Select the Viewer s Alarm Overview control panel then click the Events button to view the events log Q nstallation dependent feature The Viewer is available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service the Viewer is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences e NetGuard EVS In the
209. ed recordings from audio sources e Create and switch between an unlimited number of views each able to display images from up to 64 cameras from multiple servers at a time Views can be placed in private groups only accessible by the user who created them or shared groups accessible by all NetGuard EVS users connected to the NetDVMS system e Use views private as well as shared on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed e Create special views for widescreen monitors e Use multiple screens as well as floating windows for displaying different views simultaneously e Quickly substitute one or more of a view s cameras with other cameras e View images from several cameras one after the other in a single camera spot a so called carousel e View images from selected cameras in greater magnification and or higher quality in a designated hotspot e Receive and send images through NetMatrix e Include HTML pages and static images e g maps or photos in views e Control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX 360 view cameras e Use digital zoom on live as well as recorded images e Activate manually triggered events also known as event buttons e Activate external outputs e g sirens or lights e Use sound notifications for attracting attention to detected motion or events e Get quick overviews of sequences with detected motion e Get quick overviews of detected events e Quickly search selected areas of camera images fo
210. eeeeeeeseeeeseseeeeees 67 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 2 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual NPUTS EVENTS amp QUTPUTS ac sesnteivzcyestrscrcsaey a eeann enara AEAEE EAEE Sieaciean iestorateseater eu nstomeaatin staqusmnies onsiaontistabiunaemeantameapens 69 ABOUT NPUTS EVENTS amp OUTPUTS seiors nne A E aA NERA 69 O Se a a E A A AA ATNA EA EAE R A E AA ae 70 HOSED WNAWN eee EE E AEEA E O E E TOE O E E OEO 70 Add New Event Window for Devices Capable of Handling One Input Event Only 73 M ltiple INPUT Events VVC OW vss setecctetacedeceevtectecsactcacacssassuatevasaturicaeeitescadteateiwetienanctuashcecpociadeaeeteatunzeone 7 Add New Event Window for Devices Capable of Handling Several Input Events 00 76 Edit Event Window for Editing Input Events ou ee ccccccccsssccesssccesssccsssscessscssssssesseeseeees Ti New Timer VT OW oo sicecescdscetienassedacinsuad sc naseceesbedecdsstus usebtacbateseuuceexb sect sac ouwosedsashcbasaieepntaniolecemaesseactoeezeseadte 78 Add New Output WI GOW svccsiccccsascescascoevseccsesescctesestiaseedeacuseossaiatiadeiadsheevtaematecraduenssagdiedaigetbenstloisadetaedbemsasecte 79 PAC COUT Wy CO ase cates crt caret gate A E E anes na EE N sa EAS 80 Advanced WrNdoW sscuiiesierieei due atest vets apaneteacace sat gnee Geet T 8 Ey TAG DUTON scarce sect E EN EE EN N
211. een NetGuard and NetGuard EVS The NetGuard and NetGuard EVS may initially look quite similar However the two clients are programmed differently they have different installation requirements and one client offers more features than the other Programming Differences Net or Not As opposed to the NetGuard the NetGuard EVS has been developed based on the Net software development platform Net Framework 2 0 downloadable from hitp www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running the NetGuard EVS The Net software development platform allows the interconnection of computers and services for the exchange and combination of data and objects The platform makes extensive use of so called web services which provide the ability to use the web rather than single applications for various services This in turn provides the ability for centralized data storage as well as automated updating and synchronization of information The Net platform enhances software developers ability to create re usable and customizable modules which makes it possible to develop highly flexible software solutions You can therefore expect the Net based NetGuard EVS to be a highly flexible client ready for integration of new features plugins etc However organizations and their requirements are different and some organizations find that the high degree of interconnection of services and computers inherent in a Net based solution is not desir
212. ees Lall Ler lira ig ma pad You furthermore have the option of selecting whether the NetMatrix Monitor application should be available just for you or for anyone using the computer If in doubt select Anyone When ready click Next 5 Follow the next few simple steps in the installation wizard until you are asked to select the setup type that best suits your needs imini hanid iari dl pee Be Be Boe Be bA Beat en i Gobo a dji vo dij pa a ea Ea w d r bhe boria n igi ie ppap hm Cuar re e f you want a shortcut to the NetMatrix Monitor application placed on your desktop automatically keep Add shortcut to desktop selected e f you want the NetMatrix Monitor application to run automatically each time the computer loads Windows keep Add NetMatrix Monitor to Startup group selected When ready click Next twice 6 Click Finish on the last step to complete the installation Configuring the NetMatrix Monitor Application The way you access the configuration window for the NetMatrix Monitor application differs depending on whether you configure the NetMatrix Monitor application for the first time or you want to make changes to the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor application e First Time Configuration To configure the NetMatrix Monitor application for the first time do the following 1 Double click the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configur
213. eless connection to the PDA or cellphone is configured and working correctly You can quickly check the wireless connection by pinging the IP address of the PDA cellphone from a command prompt on the server on which the NetPDA NetCell Server is installed 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 260 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual what is pinging Pinging is a quick way of determining whether an IP address is available you simply send a small amount of data to the required IP address in order to see if it responds The word ping it is said was chosen because it mirrors the sound of a sonar How do I ping To ping an IP address do the following In Windows Start menu select Run In the Open field type cmd and click OK This will open a command prompt window Now type ping followed by the required IP address example ping 123 123 123 123 then press ENTER on your keyboard If the pinged IP address is available you will see a reply message and some simple statistics see example illustration 1 if the IP address does not respond you will typically see a Request timed out message see example illustration 2 CAWNDOWS wyitemd 27cm dex rA pinga 18 108 67 4 mging LH 10 6f 4 with fe betes gf J Fram 10 18 69 4i hates am 1A 1B GF dr hyteast ede u From 1 01f 67 4 hytes am Le 1EY t L i j Far 1
214. ent alarms By clicking alarms in the list you are able to browse recordings from around the time at which the alarms were generated See also the description of Alarm Overview under Browsing Recordings Image Controls Opens the Image Controls control panel in which you have access to digital zoom and interlacing settings See also Digital Image Controls and Optimization Export Opens the Export control panel with which you are able to export entire video and audio sequences in different formats See also Generating Video and Audio Evidence Print Opens the Print control panel from which you are able to print images from the camera selected in the camera layout See also Generating Video and Audio Evidence Smart Search Opens the Smart Search control panel in which you are able to search for motion in one or more selected areas of the view from a particular camera See also the description of Smart Search under Browsing Recordings Send E mail Report Opens the Send E mail Report control panel from which you are able to send evidence via e mail See also Generating Video and Audio Evidence NetTransact Opens the NetTransact control panel from which you are able to specify settings for the NetTransact add on product for handling loss prevention through video evidence combined with time linked POS or ATM transaction data Note The NetTransact toolbar icon is only available if the NetTransact add on product is used wit
215. ent message Displays the string which will be used for the actual package analysis include The field is not as such editable However you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where a new item should be included when you click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons Likewise you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the Remove button The item immediately to the left of the cursor will be removed when you click the Remove button Add Adds the content of the Event substring field to the Event message include field See also the description of the Event substring and Event message includes fields Lets you add a start parenthesis to the Event message include field Parentheses can be used to ensure that semantically related terms are processed together as a logical unit in other words they can be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis Example User001 OR Door053 AND Sunday In the example the two OR terms will be processed first then the result will be combined with the last part of the string In other words the system will first look for any packages containing either of the terms User001 or Door053 then it will take the results and run through them in order to see which packages also contain the term Sunday 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 3
216. eo and Audio Evidence Q nstallation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from the NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content You are able to export entire video and audio sequences in three different formats e AVI file movie clip e Database files you can include the Viewer itself in the export so others can easily view the database files e JPG WAV files image audio clip To export evidence from the Viewer use the following procedure 1 Click the Export icon The Export icon 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 150 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual This will open the Export control panel Wakes Fisted Dri
217. er Administrator window to manage the Image Server s settings access To access the mageServer Administrator window double click the Image Server Administrator desktop shortcut ME image Server SLT aE atia Each section of the mageServer Administrator window is described in the following e Server Configuration Section The Server Configuration section is used for specifying server name and port for enabling optional external access to the server for optional definition of IP address ranges which should be recognized as being local and for specifying a maximum number of remote users allowed to connect simultaneously The Server Configuration section contains the following fields and buttons Field Button Description Name Lets you specify a name for the server By default the name is simply Server You are able to change the default name NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users with rights to configure their clients will see the name of the server when they create views on their client s Setup tab Port Lets you specify a port number to use for the server The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number Enable Outside Select the check box if the server should be accessible from the internet via a Access router or firewall If selecting this option also specify the outside public IP address and port number in the Outside IP Address and Outside Port fields Note When using outside acce
218. er address Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Issue It was not possible to log in to the NetGuard EVS with the specified user name and or password What to do Verify that you have typed your user name correctly then re type your password to ensure it does not contain errors Bear in mind that user names as well as passwords may be case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing Amanda and amanda Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Issue A new version of the NetGuard EVS is available This message is typically accompanied by information about whether an update is recommended or whether it is a requirement for example due to recently introduced features not working in your current NetGuard EVS version The message will typically also contain information about where to download the new version from What to do Follow the advice given in the message Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 173 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Selecting Language In the NetGuard EVS you are able to select between several language versions To select a language do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of the NetGuard EVS s top bar 2 From the menu that appears select Lan
219. er Manual time Time to add Add Delete Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply time It is only possible to archive once per day To add an archiving time to the list specify the required time in the Time to add field then click the Add button To remove an archiving time from the list select the archiving time to remove from the list and click the Delete button Note While archiving takes place cameras for which archiving applies will briefly stop recording one after the other Although the pause is very brief typically less than a second it is therefore recommended that you specify an archiving time that is outside periods in which you expect to record important images Lets you add an archiving time to the Daily archiving time list You specify the required time by selecting the hour minute and second values respectively then clicking the field s up and down buttons to increase or decrease values Chip You may also simply overwrite selected hour minute or second values Adds the archiving time specified in the Time to add field to the Daily archiving time list Removes a selected archiving time from the Daily archiving time list If the Archive Setup window s Enable Archiving check box is selected this section lists cameras for which archiving is possible The section lists all enabled cameras i e cameras which depending on their individual settings may transfer images to t
220. es are available I mage Lets you browse recorded images from the recent database of the selected camera image by image Clicking the left arrow will take you to the image preceding the currently viewed image unless the currently viewed image is the first stored image Clicking the right arrow will take you to the image following the currently viewed 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 277 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual image unless the currently viewed image is the last stored image ip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature Motion Lets you browse images from the recent database of the selected camera in which motion has been detected Clicking the left arrow will take you to the previous image in which motion was detected unless the currently viewed image is the first stored image Clicking the right arrow will take you to the next image in which motion was detected unless the currently viewed image is the last stored image ip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature Sequence Lets you browse sequences from the recent database of the selected camera Clicking the left arrow will take you to the previous sequence If motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in which motion was detected wi
221. ess the surveillance system through very slow connections such as 28 8 Kbps connections using the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server may be advisable The Web Server handles navigation and still image viewing whereas the Realtime Feed Server handles all live and playback feeds Remote users connect to the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server through a regular browser no client software is required Both servers can be started from Windows Start menu if they have not been added to the startup folder when NetDVMS was installed By default the Web Server uses port 81 and the Realtime Feed Server uses port 9513 Note Both servers must be started before they are active and remote users are able to connect to them If remote users should be able to view live images the Monitor application must be running as well e Web Server Configuration To configure the Web Server open the Web Server s Settings window the following way 1 Open Windows Start menu 2 Click All Programs 3 Select NetDVMS gt Web Server The Web Server icon now appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar E Server icon 4 Click the Web Server icon This will open the NetDVMS Web Server window 5 In the NetDVMS Web Server window click the Settings button This will open the Settings window in which you configure the Web Server 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 3
222. ettings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Outputs button Tamms tatting Tv tay Carnet t horus Late Dam Hoo Sada r Thr fa beep a Qi egali bi ma D tosl SF sabe penip Upstate m eo ri E Lin ma a J f F p aaiim F inmi wj r Carr arip tmu E baii Sd Ged e a mages eter be eo en cha E f D h min C Hrm D ihmi FE Mam recente databasa EEN Di kiia b Larp ii Sadaba mhie H badhi g o Mana Paahi ai Lah ie This will open the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 7 Inthe All Outputs list in the window s left side select the required output then click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 120 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Cehpin beltings tor siaine Cara A Deiat Dea Hier Coney Chicas befor He See iT Cer end Nc NetDVMS User Manual This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list which lists all outputs to be automatically triggered when motion is detected by the camera Good to know e You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself If output has been defined on other cameras devices on the NetDVMS system this output will also be selectable in the All Outputs list e An unlimited number of outputs
223. eturn to normal view simply double click the blue image bar again Grip If you have selected reduced image quality for the camera on the Setup tab images from the camera will be displayed in full quality when viewed enlarged e Camera Shortcut Menus By right clicking inside one of a view s camera positions you get access to a shortcut menu 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 200 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Some of the shortcut menu s content may vary from camera to camera depending on the configuration of the selected camera e Copy Available for all cameras Lets you copy the displayed image as a single bitmap image to your clipboard The copied image can then be pasted into other applications such as word processors etc e Camera Only available for single camera view positions not for hotspots carousels or NetMatrix positions Lets you select another camera for display in the view position This way you are able to switch between viewing images from different cameras in the same view position To use this command first select the required server in the first submenu the NetGuard EVS supports viewing of cameras from several servers then select the required camera in the second Submenu Ghip The camera originally displayed in the view position will be listed at the top of the first subme
224. ew Ghip You can easily hangs which cameras are included in your view Either clear an individual camera position by clicking the clear button l then drag another camera to the cleared position or simply overwrite a position by dragging a different camera to the position e Adding Carousels A carousel is used for displaying images from several cameras one after the other in a single view position You are able to specify which cameras to include in the carousel as well as the interval between camera changes To add a carousel to a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s Carousel link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position Chip Note that the position gets a thin green border The green border indicates that the position is used for a carousel the green border will also be evident when using the view on the Browse and Live tabs Thin green border indicates carousel 3 When the carousel position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section Begin by selecting which cameras to include in the carousel In the following example we have selected four cameras Note that you are also able to select all cameras on a server in one go by selecting the check box next to the server icon a a mmg pum e Wool Engine TE m J m m Front Parking Lot MIPEG Carm i Hi iy MPE camita 78 P
225. ew in NetGuard The important thing to remember is that the HTML page should be stored locally on the user s PC To import an HTML page go to NetGuard s Setup tab From the Setup tab s System Overview section drag the HTML Page link to the required position in the required view This will open the Import HTML Page dialog in which you specify the required HTML page You are also able to specify a title for it the title will appear in the title bar of the HTML page when displayed in the view Depending on the navigation features you have included on your HTML page you may often want to import the HTML page into several views in order for the navigation to fully work e System Administrator s Check List NetDVMS system administrators wishing to create and distribute navigation HTML pages to NetGuard users do the following 1 Create the required HTML page The navigation controls in the HTML page must match the views users see in their NetGuards For example in order for a button leading to Viewl to work a view called Viewl must exist If you intend to distribute a navigation HTML page to a group of users the views in which the HTML page will be used should be placed in shared groups 2 Save the HTML page locally on each computer on which it will be used When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Sav
226. ewer s or NetGuard EVS s advanced features image browsing smart search evidence generation etc for archived images as well Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives For archived recordings stored locally or on network drives you simply use the Viewer s or NetGuard EVS s 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 123 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual browsing features for example the timeline browser or the playback controls for finding and viewing the required recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a camera s regular database Exported Archives For exported archives e g archives stored on a CD you must use the Viewer Click the browse button in the Viewer s Database Information control panel to browse for the archive you want to view Once you have specified the required archive this way you can use all of the Viewer s browsing features for navigating the images in the archive Oviewer is installation dependent The Viewer is accessed from the Monitor application which is only available when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service the Viewer will not be available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the
227. f uuu eee cece cccessccesssecesssecesssccessccssssesssscessssceessscessseessseceeas 144 Browsing using FVOUIOM VIEW eect sons cates seen sscce es eoa AE EOE 145 NTS PON CO aarre e REA AE E E A RE AEEA EEA AEE 148 How to Store and Recall VIEWS uu cece ccceccccssscccsssccesssecesssecesssecessccesssccessecsssscesssceesssceessecesssseeeas 148 HOWTO PENCE VOCO oee A A meses oes AE E AEA E 149 How to Send Evidence via E Mail esseessessssresesressressreessressrissrressressrreseressrressressriessressriessressreessrese 149 How to Export Video and Audio EvidenCe esssssesssesssreesressrressressressrressressrressressriessressriessressreessress 150 HOw to View Archived Recordings eessesrnsnanriis nann Ea TES E n 152 REMOTE FC Cs Saas da cscs da acc sae a sence oc tes nc excess ec ceecs es ceszccaeec esas cavessdesaaesatesnsecsceestecsueascoscatesas 152 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 3 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual REMOTE ACCESS OVERVIEW ccccccscsscssecscsssssscssccscescssscssesscessssscssevscesessscssesssesssseeseesssesessesseesacesessesseesessssuevsees 152 PROGRAMMING DIFFERENCES NET OR NOT uu ccccccccsscccessscccessseeceessseccessseeceeseeceesseeccessseeceesseceesseeeeestaeeeens 157 INSTALLATION DIFFERENCES cacsisiassucescorpesnesrcznsctescnetescasiniesdecaedasaiasnsoaasdaedubsucdnaebiecaedaceinbuieadeaishtatdnaen
228. figuring the NetPDA NetCell CleNnt ec ccccsccsssscesssscesssseesseeenees 260 SiG the NetPDA NetCell Chen isnin aaa i 263 Finding Recordings from a Specific Time and Date esessseeeseesresereesrressressrressrersriesrressreessress 268 Finding Recordings from a Specific Event ssesessseseseeesrieereessressrissrreseressrieseressriessressriessressreessress 268 RELUPMING to the Camera List PAGS eiissererericiadreericaiscerionedeni maida iiaia eni aa i dreina a 269 WEB AND REALTIME FEED SERVERS j ccccccscsssssscsecvscsssssecssccssesssescssesscesscsscstecueesesssessesscesestsssevseesesessuevseness 270 Web Server lt eUD engana ene nS nen EE en ee E 271 User AGIAIAISUP AL OM isccecdocieiccensseoccethandideacactesesiacioleasangescasacdeteessesnexanantelacosmemeetsanielabonuasenadolacesunesassactaneseasets 272 Testing the Web Server Configuration cece cccsscccsssecessecesssccesssccssssecessecessecesscesssseeeeeeseas 273 SANO NEW eD S 0 geen ee Re nr me ee E een armen ner eee eee renee 274 SOLONG ME WED SETE eaer dean ete E EE E A 274 shutting Down the Web Servel vrcesscsccestcsex o2secsicosrcesceaadesoctesteossaconteastannenstcanseeaapendeapasanueaneanseentcansenctoiee 274 Starting the Realtime Feed S rVel nue cece cece ccesscccsssecesssecssssecesssccesssecesssecessecessceesecessseeeeseeens 275 Stopping the Realtime Feed Server wou cccccccssscccsssccesssccssssccssssccessecsssccessscesssscessseceeseeeseeeens 275 Shutting Down the
229. file name based on the export start time along the structure yyyymmddhhmmss avi year month day hour minute second example 20050630160430 for a file with a start time of 16 04 30 on 30th June 2005 The name will automatically appear in the AVI File Name field The default file name format is independent of regional settings on your computer You are always able to change the default file name to a name of your choice simply by overwriting the default file name Remember that the file name must include the avi file extension 11 Specify export destination If you select Desktop your exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported mages folder on the desktop of your PC If you select Path you are able to specify a path yourself The exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder under the path you specify example If you specify a path like C My Stuff My Files the exported file will be saved in C My Stuff My Files Exported Images When specifying a path this way the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones if they do not already exist they will be created automatically 12 Click the Export link to begin the export 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 247 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The status bar in the upper part of the export dial
230. furthermore able to use processing order parentheses and two different Boolean operators in the Event message include field by clicking the buttons to the right of the field e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send Email if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the Generic Events window 4 Inthe Generic Events window your newly defined event is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the Generic item to see the listing 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 108 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual xij Corn Coats Thiig eed Ba ee A r ert Click OK to close the Generic Event wi
231. fy a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port should sound for five seconds when triggered Add Mew Ont put EJ Ezina cufpul coneco Har u oome o Output i Keng output tor 190 erh a Enteral upi eaa Son E Tew a ip You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button When ready click OK This will return you to the I O Setup window 4 In the I O Setup window your newly defined output is now listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing VO tiup thr Prei a Ee f i Fhir p t aa QA ee ees Aad nen ae a dipj aT T peal ee S eis a re inhaa ml Click OK to close the I O setup window and return to the Administrator window 5 Inthe Administrator window first select the camera for which the output should be available then click the Settings button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 119 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual This will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 6 Inthe Camera S
232. g for example amanda and Amanda e Password Type your password as specified by your system administrator The password IS case sensitive e Address Type the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator This will typically be the same URL or IP address you used if connecting to the NetGuard through a browser although it may occasionally be a different one e Port Internet connections may use different ports for different purposes Specify the port number your system administrator has asked you to use when logging in to the NetGuard In most circumstances port 80 is used Ghip The vast majority of NetGuard users will always log in to the same address and port number However if you occasionally log in to different addresses and ports or log in with different user names the Previous Logins list lets you select your previously specified logins in which case all you have to do is specify your password 2 Click the Login link After a short wait the NetGuard window will open The NetGuard window has three tabs Live Browse and Setup The Live tab is used for viewing live images from cameras the Browse tab is used for browsing recorded images from cameras and the Setup tab is used for configuring NetGuard Note Depending on your user rights you may not be able to access all three tabs 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 231
233. g for more information 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 192 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Example of an HTML Page with Button Navigation A very quick solution is to create an HTML page with buttons for navigation You are able to create a wide variety of buttons on the HTML page In this example we will just create two types of buttons e Buttons for switching between the NetGuard EVS s views Required HTML syntax lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Views SelectView Viewstatus Groupname Viewname gt Where Viewstatus indicates whether the view is shared or private if the HTML page is to be distributed to several users the view must be shared Example from a real button lt input type button value Go to Shared Groupl View2 onclick SCS Views SelectView Shared Groupl View2 gt This button would allow users to go to a view called View2 in a shared group called Groupl1 e Buttons for switching between the NetGuard EVS s three tabs Live Browse and Setup Bear in mind that depending on their user rights some users may not be able to access all three tabs Required HTML syntax Live tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Application ShowLive gt Browse tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick SCS Application ShowBrowse
234. g individuals with a user account Example 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 162 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual A Adolfo Rodriguez amp Asif Khan 8 Karen Otley Keith Waverley a Wayne Wasser Groups Groups are Active Directory objects that can contain several users In this example the Management group contains three users Management Group Q Adolfo Rodriguez amp Karen Otley a Wayne Massey Groups can contain any number of users By importing a group into NetDVMS you are able to import all of its members in one go The number of groups may vary from organization to organization depending on the structure and requirements of each organization Note that a user can be a member of more than one group For instance Adolfo Rodriguez from our fictitious example above could easily be a member of the organization s Management group as well as of its Sales group and its Staff Social Club group Each of the two methods is described in the following e How to Add a New Basic User To define a new dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication click the User administration window s Add Basic User button specify required user name and password and click OK This will add the user to the User administration window s list of users In the list
235. g it is possible to store recordings beyond the capabilities of the camera s database Field Description O O Max records in Select this option to limit the database size based on a maximum allowed number database of records in the database Specify required maximum number of records in the neighboring field When the maximum number of records in the database is reached the oldest record in the database will automatically be overwritten A database can contain up to 600 000 records Delete records Select this option to limit the database size based on the age of records in the older than database Specify required number in neighboring field and select required unit Minutes Hours or Days from the list When records become older than the specified number of minutes hours or days they will automatically be deleted Note A database can contain no more than 600 000 records regardless of what maximum age has been defined Clear Click button to delete all records stored in the database for the camera in 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 30 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual question Database Database path In case of database failure the following action should be taken Records stored in archived databases will not be affected bee AA maar itor application NKAminictratnar AQMINIStFatol
236. ges contain links it is recommended that links have the target blank attribute example lt a href otherwebpage htm target blank gt Link lt a gt This will make the links open in separate windows which will help you avoid losing view of the NetGuard window itself due to a link opening a web page in the same browser window as the NetGuard This however does not apply if using an imported HTML page for navigation between NetGuard s different views read more about this in Using an HTML Page for NetGuard Navigation To include an HTML page in a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s HTML Page link to the required position in the view When you release the mouse button over the required position the Import HTML Page window opens 2 Inthe Import HTML Page window s URL field type the URL of the required HTML page example http www mywebsite com mywebpage htm Always include the http prefix or If the HTML page is stored locally on your computer specify its location on your computer example C myfiles mywebpage htm or click the Browse link to browse for the required HTML page 3 Inthe Title field you are able to specify a title for the HTML page The title will appear in blue title bar above the HTML page itself when it is displayed in the view 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 237
237. ges to display You will however still be able to access the window by clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows notification area also Known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen Qofaoearus Example only your notification area may have different content Depending on your On Connect settings see the following a hidden NetMatrix Monitor window can automatically be restored to previous size when a connect command is received 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 285 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e On Connect Lets you determine how the NetMatrix Monitor window should react when a connect command is received O Show Alert If selected this setting will show a small alert box in the bottom right corner of your screen when a connect command is received The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds Oo Show Window If selected this setting will automatically restore a NetMatrix Monitor window in hidden mode to previous size when a connect command is received e On Disconnect Lets you determine how the NetMatrix Monitor window should react when a disconnect command is received Oo Show Alert If selected this setting will show a small alert box in the bottom right corner of your screen when a disconnect command is received The alert box will close automat
238. ght clicking inside the NetMatrix Monitor window e Auto Accept All Commands If selected default this setting will make your NetMatrix Monitor application automatically accept all commands received from allowed hosts provided the commands are accompanied by the correct password If this setting is not used a dialog in the NetMatrix Monitor window will be prompt you to accept each received command e Display Camera Info If selected default this setting will show camera information in the NetMatrix Monitor window This allows camera names or camera IP addresses to be displayed even if the NetMatrix Monitor window is running in full screen mode The same image with and without camera information e Keep Video Aspect Ratio If selected default this setting will keep the original aspect ratio of images when the NetMatrix Monitor window is resized If this setting is not used images will be stretched to fill the available space The same image with left and without right original aspect ratio Note how keeping the original aspect ratio often leads to black bars around the images whereas stretching may distort the images slightly e Reconnect On Startup If selected default the NetMatrix Monitor will automatically attempt to connect to the last connected camera when starting If this setting is not used no camera connection will be attempted at startup e Camera Layout Lets you select whether the NetMatrix Monitor wind
239. ghts permit you to create and edit do the following 1 Select any of the NetGuard EVS s tabs 2 Look at the Views section You are able to create and edit views under the top level folders Shared and Private if the top level folders are not marked by a padlock icon If a top level folder is marked by a padlock icon it is protected You can still use any views under the top level folder but you cannot create new views or edit existing views under it Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about your user rights e Creating Private Views Note Views are created on the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab To create your first private view you first create a group under the Private top level group then create the required view within the group 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 175 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual w E AARAA H AE ine 4 If you have created private views before you may create the new view in an existing group or you may create a new group for the view Creating a Group To create a group under the Private top level folder do the following on the Setup tab 1 Inthe Setup tab s Views section select the Private top level folder 2 Click the Create New Group button Create New Group button 3
240. gs for Device Name Camera Name window 2 Inthe Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window click the Event Notifications button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 109 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Carana Settings for yard cam Camera 1 Tet HAT Eaa Honir beur l Tie E bararin pe Second DE marija i l Stem D Esati paiio l Upi me gt r oaa E l fords ee Fo Freon Ej a aja rji F eee by Ep een deta r 0 es E fin tice D Hem I tn event Fs ee ree a lum iE D Deis maar ie thea Catia por E Fogi Her rror E ke cm ol ian hea Fa brg iori ad Gop tk Haan Detection Salini ee a i Daai FTZ Pria Poora This will open the Setup Notifications on Events window In the Setup Notifications on Events window s Available Events list expand the Generic item and select your generic event Then click the gt gt button to move the selected generic event to the Active Events list Setup Hetifications on Events i Geba Faile a ace aa Comma l Click OK in the Setup Notifications on Events window click OK in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window then click the Exit button in the Administrator window Make sure NetDVMS s recording server is running either as the Monitor application or as the recording server service
241. guage then the required language g5 Jaak Setup O keid enp Lares F 3 The NetGuard EVS must be restarted in order for the change to take effect Close your NetGuard EVS then log in again to use the new language version Views Private and Shared Views The way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed in the NetGuard EVS is called a view A view may contain images from up to 64 cameras A NetGuard EVS can handle an unlimited number of views allowing you to switch between various collections of camera images In order to help you maintain an easy overview when you navigate between various views in your NetGuard EVS all views are placed in folders called groups A group can contain any number of views and if required subgroups e Difference between Private and Shared Views Views can be private or shared Private views can only be accessed by the user who created them whereas shared views can be accessed by all NetGuard EVS users connected to the surveillance system server Before you create any views it is important that you are sure about the difference between private and shared views not least because a number of shared views may already exist for NetGuard EVS users in your organization When that is the case you can start using your NetGuard EVS straight away creating further views in your NetGuard EVS will not be necessary unless you want to supplement the shared views with private views of your own If you
242. h DLK manually by using the following procedure to import all received DLKs into NetDVMS in one go Prerequisites The DLKs received in a dlk file must have been saved at a location accessible by the surveillance server for example on a network drive or on a USB stick 1 Open the Administrator window 2 Inthe Administrator window click the Import DLKs button 3 Browse to the location at which you have saved the received dlk file Select the file and click Open All DLKs are now automatically imported and the relevant DLK will automatically appear when you add a device through the Device Setup Wizard Device Administration How to Add a Device Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights In NetDVMS you add devices IP video camera devices or IP video server devices rather than actual cameras This is because devices have their own IP addresses or host names Being IP based NetDVMS primarily identifies units on the surveillance system based on their IP addresses or host names Even though each device has its own IP address or host name several cameras can be attached to a single device and thus share the same IP address or host name This is typically the case with cameras attached to video server devices You can of course configure and use each camera individually even when several cameras are attached to a single device In ad
243. h as a etc within the text string to be analyzed Feta He Fa fe el Beet a D ieda i ha ret cca Deere mh Err ra malig fa See ria Laer ae Tee ea eye Lil e _ Lada The Edit Event window for editing generic events Access You access the Edit Event window for specifying generic events from the Generic Events window by selecting an event from the list then clicking the Edit selected button The Edit Event window for editing generic events is divided into three sections 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 93 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e General Event Settings Section The Edit Event window for editing generic events contains the following fields in the General Event settings section Field Description Event Name Lest you edit the name of the event Each event must have a unique name Note Event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp pE Event Protocol Lets you select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for in order to detect the event e Any Listen for packages using TCP as well as UDP protocol e TCP Listen for packages using TCP protocol only e UDP Listen for packages using UDP protocol only E which port is used NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Ad
244. h your surveillance system For more information about using NetTransact in the Viewer see separate NetTransact documentation Help Lets you view the built in help 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 141 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Setting Up the Viewer s Camera Layout The camera layout is the area of the Viewer in which you view images The camera layout section may display images from up to nine different cameras at a time You can configure the camera layout to suit your exact needs First specify the camera layout s grid size i e how many camera slots you want the camera layout to contain then specify which camera to use in each camera slot Selecting Grid Size To specify how many camera slots you want in the camera layout do the following 1 Click the Settings icon in the Viewer s toolbar ae icon This will open the Settings control panel 2 In the Settings control panel s Layout list select the required camera layout grid 1x1 2x2 3x3 or 4x4 If using 4x4 note that only nine different cameras can be displayed at a time 3 Assign cameras to the camera layout s camera slots as described in the following Assigning Cameras Having specified the required grid size for the camera layout assign cameras to the camera layout s camera slots the following way 4 Click the Database Inform
245. hd m The Define Exclusion Regions window with an exclusion area highlighted in blue Access You access the Define Exclusion Regions window by clicking the Exclude Regions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window e Defining Areas in which Motion Detection Should Be Disabled The Define Exclusion Regions window features a preview image from the camera You define the areas in which motion detection should be disabled in the preview image which is divided into small sections by a grid To define areas in which motion detection should be disabled drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image while pressing the mouse button down Left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section Selected areas are highlighted in blue Ghip Even though areas in which motion detection should be disabled are always highlighted in blue in the Define Exclusion Regions window itself you are able to select a different color for the optional highlighting of areas with disabled motion detection when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Such color selection takes place in the Select Color window e Define Exclusion Regions Window s Buttons and Check Boxes The Define Exclusion Regions window features the following buttons Button Check Description Box Set All Lets you quickly select all grid sections in the preview image This may be advant
246. he Live tab Navigation by Dragging inside I PI X I mages Many IPIX images may be navigated simply by dragging inside the images pa If your mouse pointer changes to a when placed over the images from an IPIX camera navigation by dragging is supported for the camera Refer to the release note for information about supported features for individual IPIX cameras 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 214 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual PTZ Navigation Buttons As an alternative to navigation by dragging inside IPIX images use the navigation buttons in the PTZ Control section to move around the view from the selected IPIX camera The round middle button lets you quickly move the camera to its home i e default position The plus and minus buttons lets you zoom in and out respectively Grip If you mouse has a scroll wheel you can also use the scroll wheel to control the zoom level On many mice clicking the scroll wheel or middle mouse button quickly lets you view the whole image again Presets The Presets list does not apply for navigating recorded images IPI X PTZ Positions You are able to move to a specific position in the IPIX view and then save that position by clicking the Save button When you later want to return to the saved position click the Load button Digital Zoom By selecting the PTZ Control s Digit
247. he Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from the NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content To send evidence from the Viewer via e mail use the following procedure 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 149 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 1 Select the required camera in the camera layout See Using the Viewer and browse to the image you want to send via e mail 2 Click the Send E mail Report icon te The Send E mail Report icon This will open the E mail Report control panel Aeneas repent amp npcompary com Hendir Pleception Camesa 1 06 05 2005 1257 16 Guubppot Test Mp oubpect bat Mestage Mp raci age hest im image Fanai Daea The E mail Report control panel 3 Type the e mail address of the recipient If sending to several recipients separate e mail addresses with a semicolon example aa aa aa bb bb bb 4 Type a subject text for the e mail 5 Verify that the I mage field lists the camera you require 6 Type a message typically a description of the recorded incident 7 Click the Send button How to Export Vid
248. he NetMatrix Monitor will listen for commands on this port By default port 12345 is used You are of course able to specify another port number Used when adding a new NetMatrix Monitor or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the password to be used when communicating with the NetMatrix Monitor NetMatrix triggered live images may also be displayed in NetDVMS users NetGuard EVSs If a NetGuard EVS is used distribution of the NetMatrix triggered live images takes place slightly differently Select check box if the NetMatrix Monitor in question is a NetGuard EVS Removes any content in the Name Address Port Password and NetGuard EVS fields Available only if you have edited the properties of an existing NetMatrix Monitor Updates the properties of the selected NetMatrix monitor with the changes made during editing 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 128 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Add Available only if you have added properties of a new NetMatrix Monitor in the Name Address Port Password and possibly NetGuard EVS fields Adds the new NetMatrix Monitor to the list e Event Tab There are two ways in which NetMatrix triggered images can appear on a NetMatrix Monitor e Another user wants to share important images and sends them from the Monitor application from a NetGuard EVS
249. he surveillance system The section also lists the path to the archiving directory for each camera Ghrip If a particular camera is not listed it is highly likely that the camera is disabled To check if a camera is disabled look for the camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section A disabled camera will be clearly indicated by an icon amp and can be enabled by right clicking the camera name Specifying that Archiving Should Apply for Specific Cameras To specify that archiving should apply for a specific camera select the check box next to the name of the required camera Reception Camera 1 Specifying that archiving should apply for a specific camera Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected cameras Specifying Archiving Locations for Specific Cameras A default archiving location is specified for each camera The default archiving directory called Archives will be located at this location To specify another location for the archiving directory for a camera either click the browse icon next to the path listing for the required camera and browse to the required location or click the default path listing to overwrite it cMpFiles MySurveilancesystem 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 125 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Overwriting an existi
250. he upper part of the window e Image Bars 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 240 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Each camera in the view is identified by an image bar located in the top of each camera image The image bar is blue When you select a particular camera in the view the image bar of the selected camera image becomes a lighter blue Office Camera 1 i a Camera image enlarged detail shows image bar The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar will display the word Live when live images are displayed and the word Stopped if the camera is stopped and live viewing is not possible Each image bar features three colored indicators e Event indicator the leftmost of the three indicators solid yellow Lights up when specific events defined by the surveillance system administrator occur Click anywhere inside the image to reset the event indicator This indicator may appear black if event indication has not been specified for the camera in question of if no specified events have occurred Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Motion indicator the indicator in the middle solid red Lights up when moti
251. hey rapa y che Hee To etl bp ceed yha cei er fbi irua deectory Pl ae Dah Ciri 11 In the Virtual directory field specify the virtual directory in which the NetPDA NetCell Server should be installed on the IIS default virtual directory is PDAServer In the Port field specify the port number you used during IIS configuration default port number is 8080 12 Click Next twice 13 When installation is completed click the Close button e Verifying the NetPDA NetCell Server Installation Before you begin installing and using the NetPDA NetCell Client it is highly recommended that you verify that the NetPDA NetCell ServerA is installed correctly First make sure that the NetDVMS system s recording server i e either the RecordingServer service or the Monitor application and Image Server are running and that a user with access to relevant cameras has been set up on the Image Server Grip You can use NetGuard or NetGuard EVS to verify that the Image Server s user setup works Then do the following 1 Double click the NetPDA NetCell Server desktop shortcut created during the NetPDA NetCell Server installation This will open the NetPDA NetCell Server Administrator dialog POE Saree A ciel ati Image Soror settings Heap iwah re fo Logi tee 0 POA Server settings Toot erenbiedl 2 Inthe lower half of the NetPDA NetCell Server Administrator dialog verify that the Test enabled check box is selected
252. his by typing the required date in the first Start Time field and the time in the second field Grip Instead of manually specifying date and time you may use the Browse tab s Time Navigation features to move to the required start point then click the upper of the Export section s Set buttons This will automatically set the date and time of the viewed image in the Start Time fields 4 Inthe End Time fields specify end date and time for the export You may use the Set button as described above 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 220 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 5 Select the required source from the Source list You may select an individual camera in which case only images from the selected camera will be included in the export or Current View Sources in which case the export will include images from all cameras in the current view for which you have database export rights Grip To quickly select an individual camera you may also simply click the required camera slot in the view 6 Click the Database Export button This will open a separate export dialog Spot Status Start Time 27 september 2006 08 54 23 End Time 27 september 2006 09 09 43 Sources Exsoutrs 2 Camera fv Include Audio Compress Exported Database Encrypt Exported Database Password Repest Password Export Destinat
253. hould be used for a particular preset position In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users select preset positions from a list By moving a preset position up or down in the Preset Positions section s list you can thus determine the sequence in which preset positions are presented in NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s list ja BIC DLE 1 Door 2 Window 3 Gate 4 Desk Wid R Floor Display of preset positions in Monitor Administrators are able to specify the sequence in which available preset positions are displayed in the various applications e Preset Position on Events Section If you have specified input or VMD events event buttons or generic events you are able to make the PTZ camera automatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur To configure the use of preset positions on events click the Setup button This will open the Event window for preset positions on event in which you are able to associate particular preset positions with particular events To use preset positions on event select the Goto preset on event check box e Patrolling Section To configure PTZ patrolling the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between several preset positions click the Setup button to go to the Setup PTZ Patrolling window PTZ patrolling requires that at least two preset positions have been defined 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www on
254. hts sounding sirens or similar if such outputs are available e Events Ability to use the NetGuard EVS s Event Control feature for manually triggering events Note The Event Control feature is available in the NetGuard EVS only e Audio Ability to listen to live sound from the selected camera s audio device available only if camera has audio device attached Note The Audio feature is available in the NetGuard EVS only In the Browse column the following features all selected by default are available e Browse Ability to browse recorded images from the selected camera AVI Export Ability to generate and export evidence as movie clips in the AVI format JPG Export Ability to generate and export evidence as J PG images Database Export Ability to generate and export evidence in database format Note The Database Export feature is available in the NetGuard EVS only e Sequences Ability to use the Sequences feature for browsing images from a selected camera e Smart Search Ability to use the NetGuard EVS s Smart Search feature with which users are able to search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from the selected camera Note The Smart Search feature is available in the NetGuard EVS only Grip Note that some of the features are mutually dependent For example in order have access to PTZ or output features a user must also have access to viewing live images and in order to use AVI and JPG export a use
255. i oi nim aaa a AY elea 2 On the login page specify your Login Name and Password then tap OK to log in 3 When the NetPDA NetCell Client has connected to the NetPDA NetCell Server I mage Server a list of available cameras is displayed From this page you have access to viewing live and recorded playback images 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 264 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Viewing Live Images From the NetPDA NetCell Client s camera list page you have access to viewing live images Camera list page Selecting a Camera for Live Viewing 1 Inthe camera list select the required camera 2 Tap the LIVE button You will now see live images from the selected camera in the NetPDA NetCell Client s regular view in which about half of the display is available for viewing the images If you require a better view of the images you can easily switch to full screen view this is described in the following 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 265 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Full Screen View i When viewing live images in the NetPDA NetCell Client s regular view tap the Full Screen icon to switch to a full screen rotated view ry Pete
256. ically after 10 seconds o Hide Window If selected this setting will automatically send the NetMatrix Monitor window to hidden mode when a disconnect command is received When the window is in hidden mode you still be able to access it by clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows notification area also Known as the system tray 2 When ready click OK e Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix Monitor To change the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor do the following 1 Open the NetMatrix Monitor window Right click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window and select Config from the menu that appears Ful Screen wt Asye On Top Hide wirk 2 Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Password Validation Eg Erie Pascvend o Cancel 3 Click OK This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Each of the window s settings is described in the previous section First Time Configuration 4 Make the required changes and click OK when ready 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 286 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Day to Day Use of the NetMatrix Monitor Application You watch video feeds from connected cameras in the NetMatrix Monitor window e Opening the NetMatrix Monitor Window Depending on configuration the NetMatrix Monitor wi
257. ication Note that all frames from the MPEG stream will be stored in the camera database regardless of whether keyframe only decoding is selected or not Q nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Turns off the blinking green online indicator normally displayed for each camera in the Monitor application Q nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences If selected camera images in the Monitor application will not be stretched to fit the cells in the Monitor application s camera layout Rather images will be displayed with the aspect radio with which they have been recorded This may result in horizontal or vertical black bars appearing around the images from some cameras almost as when viewing a film in the widescreen format on a regular TV screen If selected no e mail alerts will be sent if NetDVMS loses contact with a camera Otherwise e mail alerts
258. ick button to auto detect device type and serial number Device Name Name used to identify the device Chip To enable easy identification of devices it is often a good idea to use a device name that refers to the physical area covered by the cameras attached to the device examples Reception Area Car Park B Entrance Door 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 21 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Camera Settings Device Serial Number Device License Key Enable iPI X iPIX License Key Opens the Camera Settings for Device Name window in which you are able to specify a number of settings for cameras attached to the device including e Port through which PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are controlled e Camera names types and ports Serial number of device usually identical to the 12 character MAC address of the device example 0123456789AF Grip NetDVMS is able to automatically detect serial number as well as device type provided the IP address host name and password of the device have been specified in the P address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number A 16 character license key DLK for the device obtained when registering the software Enables the use of IPIX a technology that allows viewing
259. ick the I O Setup button ke hadi Aminar M Hea 3 Eee This will open the I O Setup window 2 Inthe I O Setup window first select the device on which motion must be detected in order for the event to occur then click the Add VMD Event Motion Detection button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 105 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual This will automatically add a VMD event to the selected device unless the selected device is a video server see below o If the selected device is a video server several cameras may be attached to the device and a separate dialog will prompt you to select the required camera ned eee a gt kee yy a Deets oo foe i ee dl ee J ee Pap i a E in Zarea d keket Yoe terem Cmn i When ready click OK 3 In the I O Setup window your newly defined VMD event will now be listed you may have to click the expand icon in front of the name of the device to see the listing lwo hal Lag chee ee a Ae a Die Ce Cae a Eir ma a H Evei He Coe a Ye EE Click OK to close the I O Setup window and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the VMD event will now be selectable in line with other e
260. icking the Add new event button will open the New Timer window in which you are able to specify timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the event under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred Edit selected Opens the Edit Event window for editing generic events in which you are able to edit the settings for an existing event selected in the Defined events list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 88 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Remove Lets you remove an existing event selected in the Defined events list selected Add New Event Window for Specifying Generic Events The Add New Event window for specifying generic events lets you specify the settings for an event based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols You are able to specify the criteria according to which NetDVMS should analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and whether any notifications should be triggered when the event occurs Ghip TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain special characters such as a etc within the text string to be analyzed CE W Eeee nh Eregi ra Rar B Era nae rE The Add New Event window for specifying generic
261. ieadtdaneansnaenaens 157 Fr ATIRE BB a alla ct cen rn E eee ee re 157 IMAGE SERVER ADMINISTRATION i0sis0csscscsenccnnsaunciendavannsnsaeansdganeseooguoussvascnrsumanetensaioonessduasnussbertaeswspaveaseteneunetonaens 158 ImageServer Administrator WINKOW cece cece ccecccessscccsssecesssccesssecesssccssssccsssscesssseesssecessseesseeeess 158 BYE dT eT as USES oe E STO RE oF ter RE mT SeE tr TPB OT PL OE Nts ee mE Oa Cee ene ee 160 Defining User Access RUS 3st ocicesntanscsoaiinarssacsncsedaisevevonabaididcabevailosurcnavdetavedinatoudtdavtinedoimneseeelencseawateseees 160 Define Local IP Ranges WINKOW 0 0 ccc cceccccsssccesssccssssecesssecessscesssscessssccssssccessscsessceeeeceeseeeeas 161 User Administration WINKOW cece ccccsscccsssccesssccssssccssssccsssscesssscessseccessscecssecessseceessscesssecesseseeseeens 162 ES ST RS N MOON eea E E E E EE A ETA 166 NETGUARD EVS CLIENT susnast ionen nran EEEa O AE EEA KENE EA EANN EEA EEEREN 168 NetGuard EVS INO GUICUO Wircscesscecsscsaceecsectccgestcssgosneosccendeossteanenascansecostosseasiaassteantoeneabisanstasapennaeeeanceonceasacs 168 Downl ad Installation S LOGIN x tcts2s2ccctstccte5 lt 22san5ecseceasceteaaestdusetacetacedecbtesactcadesedesoantesacelasabactenseedeteteda 170 Downloading and Installing NetGuard EVS eeesseseesresesessressrisssressressrressressriessressriessressreessress 170 Logging in tO NetGuard EVS woo cece ccsssscesssecesssecesssscesssecesssecessccsssecessssesssesessese
262. iew to a Floating Window do the following 1 In the Live or Browse tab s Views section right click the required view This will bring up a menu Select View Primary Display Secondary Display 1 Secondary Display 2 2 Inthe menu select Send View To gt Floating Window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 225 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Closing Separate Windows To close a separate view window regardless whether it is shown on the Primary Display as a floating window or on a secondary display simply click the Close button in the right corner of the window s blue top bar G9 In order to allow the maximum possible viewing area the blue top bar of a view sent to Primary Display or a Secondary Display is hidden To show the top bar and get access to the Close button simply move your mouse pointer to the very top of the view e Multiple Window Setup is Stored for Next Login If you have created a multiple window setup for your views the setup will be saved when you log out of the NetGuard EVS The next time you log in you will be asked if you want to use your previous views again including your multiple window setup Note however that this only applies if you log in to the NetGuard EVS on the computer on which you created your multiple window setup Unfortunately you cannot log in to a NetGua
263. ighted 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 35 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between O and 256 in the field next to the Slider to control the noise sensitivity setting Grip If you find the concept of noise sensitivity difficult to grasp try dragging the slider to the left towards the High position The more you drag the slider towards the High position the more of the preview image becomes highlighted This is because with a high noise sensitivity even the slightest change in a pixel will be regarded as motion e Motion Sensitivity The Motion Sensitivity slider determines how many pixels must change in the image before it is regarded as motion The selected motion sensitivity level is indicated by the black vertical line in the motion level indication bar below the preview image The black vertical line serves as a threshold When detected motion is above the selected sensitivity level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive detection As an alternative to using the slider you may specify a value between 0 and 10 000 in the field next to the Slider to control the motion sensitivity setting Color Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administr
264. ighter blue 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 142 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Camera slot enlarged detail shows image bar The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the name of the device to which the camera is connected The device name is displayed first in square brackets followed by the camera name Each image bar also features two colored indicators e Motion indicator the left indicator red Lights up during periods of motion e Online indicator the right indicator green Lights up during periods with recordings Storing and Recalling Views You are able to save particular configurations of the camera layout as so called views and switch between them using the Views menu in the Viewer s menu bar For example you may store one view displaying images from nine cameras and another view displaying images from eight other cameras See How to Store and Recall Views e Browsing Recordings with the Time amp Date Selector Using the time amp date selector it is possible to jump straight to recordings from a specific point in time 08 06 2005 1330 00 Time amp date selector Simply select the required date in the date field and the required time in the time field Grip You are able to overwrite the fields date and time values Having used the data amp time selec
265. ights sirens etc has been set up for the selected camera you are able to trigger the output from the NetPDA NetCell Client To trigger an output select the required output in the Sel output list Returning to the Camera List Page To return to the camera list page tap the Return icon The Return icon is only available when using regular view e Viewing Recorded I mages From the NetPDA NetCell Client s camera list page you have access to viewing recorded images Bee elrc tamra Reception Camera 1 Stairs Camera 1 ack Diar 1 Camera 1 Camera list page Selecting a Camera for Viewing of Recordings 1 In the camera list select the required camera 2 Tap the PLAYBACK button You are now able to browse recorded images from the selected camera 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 267 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Browsing and Playing Back Recorded I mages To browse recorded images tap the Browse buttons KF olfice 1 Camera 1 4 The Browse buttons work just as you are used to from NetDVMS s other client applications From left to right they are Move to first image in camera s database Move to previous sequence Move to previous image Move to next image Move to next sequence Move to last image in camera s database When you have browsed to the point
266. ilable See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Monitor Manager window lets you specify which cameras to include in the Monitor application It also lets you configure the layout of the Monitor application lorbpee Lalan Pata Sev tae bar pale pajam biome F miea FE PP ey M rma ET Monitor Manager window access You access the Monitor Manager window by clicking the Monitor Manager button in the Administrator window Note that the button is only available when the recording server has been installed as an application 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 51 OnSSI On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The Monitor Manager window features a Layout Size list as well as a Configuration section e Layout Size List In the Layout Size list Options are 1x1 2x2 you select the required grid for use in the Monitor application s camera layout 3X3 etc up to an 8x8 grid A 3x3 camera layout grid for example will allow display of up to 9 cameras Selecting a 3x3 camera layout grid e Configuration Section In the Monitor Manager window s Configuration section you select which cameras to display in the camera layout grid You also select whether the Monitor s hot spot and carousel features should be enabled Select Camera Let
267. iles can be generated by NetDVMS e Log File Types Locations and Names NetDVMS is able to generate the following types of log files Administrator Log Files These files log activity in the Administrator A log file is created for each day the Administrator is used By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section Administrator log files are named according to the structure AdminYYYYMMDD log e g Admin20051231 log Monitor Application Log Files These files log activity in the recording server when it runs as the Monitor application A log file is created for each day the Monitor application is used a nstallation dependent These log files are only generated when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service these log files are not generated See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Note however that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings window s Logfile Settings section Monitor log files are named according to the structure MonitorYYYYMMDD log e g Monitor20051231 log Recording Server Servic
268. illance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Creating Shared Views To create your first shared view you first create a group under the Shared top level folder then create the required view within the group If you have created shared views before you may create the new view in an existing group or you may create a new group for the view Creating a Group To create a group under the Shared top level folder do the following on the Setup tab 1 Inthe Setup tab s Views section select the Shared top level folder 2 Click the Create New Group button Create New Group button 3 A new group is created The new group is simply named New Group 4 Overwrite the default name New Group with a group name of your choice You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View within the Group To create a view in a group do the following 5 Inthe Setup tab s Views section make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected 2 Click the Create New View button Create New View button 3 Select the required layout for your new view 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 177 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Example Selecting view layout You are able to select layouts for displaying up to 64 8x8 cameras in a single view Grip Some of the selectable view layouts are
269. in position 2 are always shown and so on The selected number cannot be higher than the total number of NetMatrix positions in the view If the view only contains one NetMatrix position the position must have number 1 if the view contains for example four NetMatrix positions they must be numbered from 1 to 4 e Connection Settings Button only available when the view s NetMatrix position 1 is selected other NetMatrix positions in the view inherit the connection settings specified for position 1 Clicking the Connection Settings button lets you specify the TCP Port and Password used when transferring NetMatrix triggered images from the surveillance server to the NetGuard EVS view By default the TCP port used for NetMatrix is 12345 consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about which port number or password to use 4 Repeat if more NetMatrix positions are required in the view 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 185 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Further Configuration Adjusting Camera Properties In the Setup tab s Properties section you are able to adjust a number of settings for individual cameras Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Setup tab To adjust a camera s properties select the required camera in the view the selected position will be indicated by
270. in time you want to view Lio oc ate recordings from use the Playback buttons 4 ee ee en pm E E i J Te From left to right the Playback buttons are Play backward in time Stop Play forward in time To control the playback speed use the Playback Speed slider Biasa ee f e e a l F E GotoFoem qiz D thip You are also able to control playback by using the navigation E selected date time a buttons on the PDA or cellphone itself Left button starts reverse Date playback right button starts forward playback center button stops n playback and the up and down buttons take you to the next and 20 0920 previous sequence respectively If you are viewing the recorded Time images in the rotated full screen view playback control with the PDA mE EJE aE or cellphone s navigation buttons is automatically rotated to match the view Le Finding Recordings from a Specific Time and Date If you know the exact data and time you want to view recorded images from tap the Go to icon Ea This will display the Goto selected data time page Specify the required date in the Date field and the required time hours minutes seconds in the Time fields then tap OK The playback view will now display an image recorded at the specified time If no recordings are available from the specified time the last image recorded before the specified time will be displayed Finding Recordings from a Specific Event By tapping the Alarms ico
271. indow for editing input events contains the following fields External sensor Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input event is connected to defined Sensor Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for the input connected event should be connected to through Event occurs Lets you select whether the input event should be triggered when the signal on when input the input sensor rises or falls goes e Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is falling 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 77 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question External event Lets you edit the name of the input event name Send e mail if Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs this event occurs AEE eee ck ei eas E Mail setup window Include image Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected from camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Send SMS if Selec
272. indow s list of currently installed programs select NetGuard x x where x x refers to the version number 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions Removing the NetPDA NetCell Software To remove the NetPDA and NetPDA NetCell Client software use the following procedures e NetPDA Removal Procedure 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select NetPDA 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 296 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions e NetPDA NetCell Client Removal Procedure The NetPDA NetCell Client may be removed in two ways either directly from the PDA or from a PC with ActiveSync Removing the NetPDA NetCell Client Directly from the PDA 1 Tap the PDA s Start button 2 Select Settings 3 Select the System tab 4 Select Remove Programs 5 Select PDA Client and tap the Remove button 6 Select Yes when asked if you want to remove the program Removing the NetPDA NetCell Client from a PC with ActiveSync 1 Connect the PDA to the PD on which ActiveSync and the NetPDA NetCell Client software is installed 2 Use Windows Add or Remove Program
273. information about what constitutes the various input events refer to documentation for the sensors and device in question P my list contains event related to motion and or object detection what s this Some devices have their own capabilities for detecting motion and or moving static objects A motion or object detection related input event is very likely to be an option from such a device The settings determining this kind of detection are configured on the device itself typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address For more information refer to the documentation for the device in question Enabled Input Lists enabled input events for the device Event s You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event s list then clicking the gt gt button See description in the following gt gt You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event s list then 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 75 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual clicking the gt gt button to open the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events in which you specify a name for the input event and any e mail or SMS alerts to be associated with it When you click OK in the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input even
274. ing specific cameras you specify this in the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Using Dedicated I O Devices In addition to IP video camera devices and IP video server devices it is possible to add a number of dedicated I O input output devices to NetDVMS see How to Add a Device For information about which I O devices are Supported refer to the release note When such I O devices are added input on the I O devices can be used to generate events in NetDVMS and events in NetDVMS can be used for activating output on the I O devices This means that I O devices can be used in your events based system setup in the same way as a camera I O Setup I O Setup Window The I O Setup window lets you define input events VMD Video Motion Detection events and output for devices on your surveillance system When events occur they can trigger one or more actions e Input events occur when input from an external input unit is received on a device s input port for example when an external sensor detects that a door is opened Some devices also have their own capabilities for detecting motion for detecting moving and or static objects etc configured in the devices own software typically by accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address in which case such detections from the device can also be used as input events e VMD events occur when NetDVMS detects motion on a particular c
275. ing the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations 3 Verify that NetGuards in which the HTML page will be used are locally installed versions If not download and install the NetGuard software on each computer on which the HTML page will be used 4 Import the HTML page into the NetGuard views in which it will be used 5 Test that the navigation controls on the imported HTML page work as intended 6 Enjoy simple and intuitive NetGuard navigation tailored to meet your organization s needs Logging Out of NetGuard To log out of NetGuard simply click the Log Out button in NetGuard s top bar E Log Out button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 252 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual NetPDA NetCell Client amp Server NetPDA NetCell Client amp Server Introduction The NetPDA NetCell Client and NetPDA NetCell Server applications enable remote access to the NetDVMS surveillance system via a PDA Personal Digital Assistant or smartphone via wireless connection Pie Ollie i Camera i ae bit Example Live viewing in the NetPDA Client NetPDA NetCell Server The NetPDA NetCell Server is installed on an Internet Information Services IIS server and is used as a front end to the NetD
276. inistrator window hip There is no feature for editing an already defined IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window However you can simply select the range in question in the Define local IP ranges window s list delete it by clicking the Delete button and then simply add a new range reflecting your requirements 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 161 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual User Administration Window The Image Server s User administration window lets you define NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users pero Beie Ge ders Decne a dak Gree Liner Bed recess ieee l gie eres panl j User administration window Access You access the User administration window by clicking the User Setup button in the mageServer Administrator window You are able to add new users in two ways which may be combined Note however that only one of the ways will work for NetGuard users e Basic user Lets you create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and password authentication for each individual user This method works for NetGuard as well as NetGuard EVS users If the PDA Server is installed this method also works for NetPDA NetCell Client users e Windows user Lets you import individual users or groups of users from Active Directory and authenticate users based on
277. inside the camera layout simply click inside an image to select the camera from which you want to view images in the hot spot e If the hot spot runs in a separate floating window you will see a HotSpot button in the Monitor s control panel When this is the case simply click the HotSpot button to open the separate hot spot window A hot spot in a separate floating window otherwise works just like a hot spot located inside the camera layout Grip The hot spot may also be used for point and click operations on some PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Hot Spot with Carousel Depending on hot spot configuration in the Administrator application the hot spot may automatically display images from all cameras available in the camera layout one after the other with specified intervals This is Known as a carousel When this feature has been enabled a Carousel button appears in the Monitor s control panel To toggle the carousel feature on and off simply click the Carousel button Sending Live I mages to a NetMatrix Monitor Provided one or more NetMatrix Monitors have been installed and configured on your surveillance system 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 132 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual you are able to send live images from the Monitor s camera layout for immediate display on particular NetMatrix Monitors See How t
278. ion Deskion C Path w Include Viewer Program Files F Close On Completion Spot JC Gow Export dialog Date and time format may be different on your computer The export dialog will list the specified start time end time and source 7 If the selected camera s have audio sources attached you are able to include audio in the export by selecting the Include Audio check box if no audio sources are attached the check box will not be available 8 If you want to compress the exported database select the Compress Exported Database check box Compression can reduce the size of the exported database by approximately 10 However the database export process will take considerably longer when compression is used 9 If you want to encrypt the exported database select the Encrypt Exported Database check box If you select encryption specify a password for subsequent decryption of the exported databases and remember to send the password to the recipient separately Note that when encryption is used the database export process as well as subsequent opening of the database in order to view its content will take considerably longer than when no encryption is used 10 Specify export destination in the export dialog s Export Destination section e Desktop If you select Desktop your exported file will be saved in an automatically created Exported Images folder on the desktop of your PC e Path If you select Path you are a
279. ion To use this command first select the required server in the first submenu the NetGuard EVS supports viewing of cameras from several servers then select the required camera in the second Submenu Tip The camera originally displayed in the view position will be listed at the top of the first submenu with the word default after the camera name This helps you quickly switch back to viewing the original camera Tip If camera shortcut numbers have been defined on the surveillance system server you are also able to use keyboard shortcuts for switching between cameras see Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts for more information If camera shortcut numbers have been defined they will appear in brackets before camera names in the shortcut menu e Sound Notifications Not available when browsing already recorded images on the Browse tab e PTZ Presets Not available when browsing already recorded images on the Browse tab e NetMatrix Only available if NetMatrix an integrated product for distributed viewing of live video streams has been configured on your surveillance system Lets you send images from the selected camera to a particular NetMatrix Monitor Note that the NetMatrix command is not available if viewing the camera in a hotspot e Send Camera Only available for single camera view positions not for hotspots carousels or NetMatrix positions Lets you send images from the selected camera position to another single camera posi
280. ion detection sensitivity Ghip By default the NetGuard EVS uses a simple sound file for its sound notifications The sound file called Notification wav is located in the NetGuard EVS installation folder If you want to use another wav file as your notification sound simply name the required file Notification wav and place it in the NetGuard EVS installation folder instead of the original file The file Notification wav is used for event as well as motion detection notifications it is not possible to use different sound files for different cameras or to distinguish between event and motion detection notifications e Sound on Event When images from the camera are viewed on the Live tab it is possible to get a simple sound alert when events related to the selected camera occur Note Being able to use this feature requires that notifications on events have been configured on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Always off Do not use sound alerts when events related to the camera occur e Always on Play a sound alert each time an event related to the camera occurs what is an event An event is a predefined incident occurring on the surveillance system Depending on the surveillance system s configuration events may be caused by input from external sensors connected to cameras by detected motion by data received from other applications or manually through user input Events ar
281. ired position when a position already contains a camera image it will be highlighted with a yellow border when you select it then select a different camera from the Select Camera list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 53 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Recording Server Service Management Service Manager Window Q nstallation dependent window Available only when the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service If the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application the Recorder Manager window is not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences The Recorder Manager window lets you pause resume the Recording Server service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features such as configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Jaccess You access the Recorder Manager window by clicking the Recorder Manager button in the Administrator window Note that the button is only available when the recording server has been installed as a service Recorder Hanaga Eg Pausing the Recording Server service To pause the Recording Server service click the Pause button Resuming the Recording Server service When the service is paused the Recorder Manager window closes The
282. is detected by a camera The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the motion detecting camera To add a motion triggered output do the following 1 In the Administrator window click the I O Setup button he hadis kaimanan This will open the I O Setup window 2 Inthe I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button a AAG Coed aer Peters fhe This will open the Add New Output window 3 Inthe Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 118 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 e Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information e External output name Speci
283. is likely to be different on your server 4 Right click the Default Web Site item and select Properties This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog 5 On the dialog s Web Site tab set the TCP Port number to the number that NetPDA NetCell Server IS going to use the default port for the NetPDA NetCell Server is 8080 then click OK Default Web Site Properties 5 i HTTP Headers Valeb Sie IRAR Fiber Home Direiz eb Sie hieni a ae Degenpteomr ET ET F Adir JAN ray ICP Pori Eon Cire her Ceorpeetietes Trie FF AT TP Keep tire Erabi fe Enable Logging Briye bogiem WC Eended Leg File Feral sal Properties 6 Back in the Internet Information Services dialog verify that IIS are running If IIS are not running start IIS by right clicking the Default Web Site item then selecting Start 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 256 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual NetPDA Installation Having configured the IIS port number you are ready to begin installation of the NetPDA NetCell Server itself 7 On the server insert the NetDVMS software CD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetPDA NetCell Server link Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the NetPDA NetCell Server installation file Setup exe from the locati
284. ist e Startup Scripting It is possible to use scripting to control parts or all of the NetGuard EVS login procedure Examples e If using the authentication methods Basic authentication or Windows authentication you can make the NetGuard EVS login dialog open with pre filled Server address and User name fields in which case the user merely has to enter a password in order to log in e If using Windows Active Directory based authentication you can make the NetGuard EVS connect to the surveillance system automatically based on the user s current Windows login Parameters You are able to use the following parameters ServerAddress 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 196 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Refers to the URL of the Image Server The following example would show the NetGuard EVS s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver Keep in mind that the NetGuard EVS s default authentication type is Windows authentication current user Unless you change this through using the AutheticationType parameter described in the following the login dialog will look like this from the user s point of view i e automatically displaying the name of the current Windows user in the User name field Lame to Siren ONSS I onnet surveitance S
285. it receives it will not have any impact as long as you are sure you type the required characters 8 Close the Telnet window by clicking the close button in its top right corner 9 Goto your Monitor NetGuard or NetGuard EVS If the yellow event notification indicator lights up for the required camera your generic event works as intended Parking Lot Back Side MPEG Camera 1 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 111 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual How to Add a Timer Event Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event generic event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e Acamera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds e Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute an
286. ited amount of text In this example the Very Long Nani button is not large enough to contain a very long name Bear this in mind when naming event buttons e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an image recorded at the time of the event to be included in the e mail alert also check the Include image from camera check box and select the required camera in the list next to the check box e Optional If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send SMS if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts the SMS alert feature must have been set up in the SMS settings window When ready click OK This will return you to the Event buttons window 4 Inthe Event Buttons window your newly defined event button is now listed you may have to click the expand icon i in front of the name of camera or other device to see the listing Qe ret Maat iene Bii r ard Click OK to close the Event Buttons window and return to the Administrator window The defined event button will now be available in the Monitor and NetGuard EVS as described in the beginning of this text Note that individua
287. itor application s PTZ Menu with Pan Tilt Zoom controls for installed PTZ cameras 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 59 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Quick Browse Allows users to use the Monitor application s Quick Browse buttons for browsing newly stored images Note that use of the Quick Browse buttons requires that a Hot Spot is enabled in the Monitor application thip Configuration of user rights may vary from organization to organization However users are typically allowed access to the following features Application Setup Browser PTZ Control and Quick Browse e Patrolling Settings Note Settings in this section are relevant only if you are using PTZ cameras for which patrolling has been set up The regular patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted either manually or when a particular event occurs The Patrolling settings section lets you specify how many seconds should pass before the regular patrolling is resumed after a manual or event based interruption Default is 30 seconds The settings in this section will apply for all installed PTZ cameras ip PTZ patrolling for individual PTZ cameras is configured in the Setup PTZ Patrolling window e Joystick Clicking the Joystick Setup opens the Joystick Setup window in which you are able to configure a joystick for use with PTZ cameras in the M
288. k recorded images from the selected camera based on a date and time you specify in the playback view The pause and start buttons in the playback view lets you pause and start the live feed as required To return to viewing still images from the selected camera click the Still link in the playback view Build AVI file Note Certain user rights may be Starts a wizard with which you are able to create and export an AVI movie clip of selected recordings Such movie clips may for example be used as evidence Print Lets you print the currently viewed image A time stamp will automatically be included with the print You are furthermore able to include your name and a comment if required Go To Lets you jump straight to images from a date and time specified in the field above the Go To button e Quad View The Quad View menu section is used for viewing live images from up to four cameras at a time ah eet mrem i E T a Cale y E Example of quad view You are able to create and save up to ten different quad views To save a quad view click the Save Setup link at the top of the quad view in question Ghrip You are able to give each saved quad view a name of your choice Type the required name in the Quad field at the top of the quad view in question then click the Save Setup link 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 280 O n SS
289. k the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window 3 Inthe Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only the External sensor connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 101 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual dd Hirer Deve Ea ee Be be pe imi Soran ers im Bagh FT kd Dart ocou aa r at pee T Eerik maT rea D Hilai ets De pma f En rapi ecu HEY pEr Sore SS fe eed coer Now specify information in the following fields e Sensor connected through Select the camera device input port on which the input unit is connected Some cameras devices only have a single input port in that case simply select Input ie e Event occurs when input goes Select whether the input event should be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises High or falls Low e External event name Specify a name for the event Note that event names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp e Optional If requiring an e mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs select the Send e mail if this event occurs check box Note that in order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have been set up in the E Mail setup window If requiring an
290. l Server can be installed on a server Internet Information Services 11S and Microsoft Net Framework 1 1 version 1 1 4322 or later must be installed and configured on the server e Installing IIS and Net Framework To Install IIS and Net Framework on the server do the following 11S Installation 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel then Add or Remove Programs 2 Inthe left part of the Add or Remove Programs dialog click Add Remove Windows Components This will open the Windows Components Wizard 3 Inthe wizard s Components list select Internet Information Services IIS and click Next Winds Compancnts Wizard indie Componcett Wi On eid of ore Chere of ig r Te ahi or nena a comperent cick the checkbos 4 dhaded bow maura the onde el ol the comment ual be sided Tabea phate e re click eres 5 Eies Epe cd he rant inhera on Servic a io HS Oy EeSeragueart al detbag tok 20 a aE Mitac Gore 0 0 HE ee ne Deception kachka Web and FTP supper slong sath muppet bor FrontPage Total chek pate nacre Le TDi Palab cer leg ae i ae _ Beste ete C 4 Follow the wizard s instructions to complete the installation NET Framework Verification Net Framework version 1 1 4322 must be installed on the server in order to be able to run the NetPDA NetCell Server Note that later versions of Net Framework may also be present on the server If Net Framework 1 1 as well as one or more later version
291. l event button select the Global entry at the top of the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail or SMS alerts when clicked When you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons your are returned to the Event Buttons window in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list Specifying Camera Specific Event Buttons To specify an event button for a specific camera select the required camera in the Defined Events list then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for adding event buttons in which you specify a name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e mail or SMS alerts when clicked When you click OK in the Add New Event window for adding event buttons your are returned to the Events window for specifying event buttons in which your new event button will appear in the Defined Events list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 84 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Specifying Timer Events When you have specified an event button you are able to associate timer events with the event button Timer events ar
292. l users rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and or events in the NetGuard EVS such rights are defined through the ImageServer Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the event button will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 104 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual How to Add a VMD Event Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously hip If you are specifically looking for information about how to configure motion detection triggered activation of an output device only such as a siren a strobe light etc see How to Add a Motion Triggered Output Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define an event based on NetDVMS detecting motion on a particular camera VMD simply means Video Motion Detection Once the VMD event is defined you will be able to select it when further configuring NetDVMS To add a VMD event do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window cl
293. lance system you must connect to a particular IP address and port number ask your NetDVMS system administrator if in doubt about which IP address and port number to use Log in to the surveillance system the following way 1 Open a Microsoft Internet Explorer browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6 0 or later is required Ghip To find out which Microsoft Internet Explorer version you are using select About Internet Explorer in your browser s Help menu 2 Inthe browser s Address field type http followed by the IP address or hostname of the NetDVMS server you want to connect to You must specify the server s port number after the IP address Use a colon to separate the IP address and the port number Example If the IP address of the server is 123 123 123 123 and its port number is 81 type http 123 123 123 123 81 3 Click the browser s Go button or simply press the ENTER key on your keyboard to go to the IP address you have specified When the connection to the Web Server has been successfully established a login page will appear 4 Access to the Web Server is likely to be restricted When this is the case specify your user name and password 5 If you want to be able to view live images or to be able to browse recorded images select the ActiveX support check box 6 Click the Login button 7 A web page with a menu for selecting cameras navigating images etc will appear 222 Route 59 Sui
294. layed oa Alarm Overview icon By default the list shows motion sequences from the most recent database for the selected camera If you want to view a list of sequences from archived databases as well click the Alarm Overview control panel s Get All button Tat Tet A Ge Al MEAN ee 7 iera OH AS 3 pec 7 hemes Sequence Everts SAG as 3 1 oe 24 frames Pal an rais Ca ei 4 pec B hormaz KEJE eed TT ra FI ere Alarm Overview control panel In addition to listing motion sequences the Alarm Overview control panel can also display a list of occurred events the camera s event log To toggle between viewing a list of motion sequences and a list of occurred events click the Alarm Overview control panel s Sequences and Events buttons To view recordings from the time at which motion was detected or an event occurred select the required sequence event in the list When you select a sequence event in the list the camera layout will display images matching the exact time of the motion detection or event 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 145 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual To view what took place prior to and after the motion detection or event use the timeline browser or playback controls to browse recordings from around the time of the motion detection or event e Browsing Recordings with Smart
295. le this may at first glance seem unnecessary it greatly soeeds up the archiving procedure which is important because all cameras are stopped during archiving Archiving directly to a network drive would mean that archiving time would vary depending on the available bandwidth on the network First storing the archive locally then moving it ensures that the archiving is always performed as fast as possible If archiving to a network drive note the regular camera database must still be stored on a local drive i e a drive attached directly to the computer running the NetDVMS system Archiving Audio If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device will also be archived If the device is a video server with several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 e Storage Capacity Required for Archiving The storage capacity required for archiving depends entirely on the amount of recordings you plan to archive Some organizations want to keep archived recordings from a large number of cameras for several months or years Other organizations may only want to archive images from one or two cameras and they may want to keep their archives for much shorter periods of time Before enabling archiving you should always consider the storage capacity of the local drive containing the default archiving directory to which archives are always moved even though they may immediately after be moved to an archiving location on a netw
296. le to easily integrate your NetDVMS surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc Events based on the analysis of received TCP and or UDP packets are called generic events NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 The Generic Events window lets you manage such events Generic Events Ligh ever A pe fea Daa E i Gaa ETY u Tma ETT fea Des Ei Adina mern Ed imko Fleane palenie OF The Generic Events window access You access the Generic Events window by clicking the Generic Events button in the Administrator window e Generic Events Window s Events List and Buttons The Generic Events window features a Defined events list in which defined TCP and or UDP based events are listed as well a number of buttons used when configuring the events Button Description Add new Lets you define new events event The type of event you are able to define is determined by what you have selected in the Defined events list e When nothing is selected or you have selected the list s Generic item clicking the Add new event button will open the Add New Event window for specifying generic events in which you are able to specify the rules and notification settings for individual TCP and or UDP based events e When an existing event is selected in the list cl
297. lication and manual mode With manual mode you can start a camera i e make it transfer images to NetDVMS from the Monitor even if the camera is not scheduled to be online When manual mode is selected Manual Mode button depressed three buttons the Stop Start button the Start All button and the Stop All button become available enabling you to start and stop cameras manually Note When in manual mode all scheduled camera activity for all cameras including automatic reconnection and any scheduled PTZ patrolling is disabled Use of manual mode may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button Available only when the Manual Mode button is depressed Stops the camera selected in the camera layout When stopped no images are transferred from the camera to NetDVMS Ghrip In the camera layout the selected camera is indicated by a light blue image bar 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 133 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual When the selected camera is stopped the button becomes a Start button Click the Start button to make the camera transfer images to NetDVMS again Start All Available only when the Manual Mode button is depressed Starts all cameras i e makes all cameras transfer images to NetDVMS Stop All Available only when the Manual Mode button is depressed
298. lip and J PEG still image formats e View HTML pages and static images which may be used for intuitively switching between different views in the NetGuard e How does the NetGuard get I mages from the Surveillance System Images viewed by NetGuard users are provided by the Image Server The Image Server runs as a service on the NetDVMS server it does not require separate hardware The NetDVMS system administrator uses the mage Server Administrator to manage NetGuards access to the surveillance system e How can User Rights Affect Use of the NetGuard The rights of individual remote users are specified centrally by the surveillance system administrator The rights of an individual user will determine the user s ability to use NetGuard s features Basically the surveillance system administrator is able to restrict a user s rights to the following e Access to the NetGuard e Access to each of NetGuard s tabs Live Browse and Setup e Ability to use features on NetGuard s tabs e Ability to create views views determine the way in which images from one or more cameras are displayed e Ability to view images from specific cameras The ability to use various features of the NetGuard may therefore vary considerably from user to user Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about your user rights 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page
299. live image area When in full screen view tap anywhere inside the live image area to return to regular view Returning to the Camera List Page To return to the camera list page tap the Return icon The Return icon is only available when using regular view e Logging Out of the NetPDA NetCell Client Before shutting down your PDA or cellphone you must log out of the NetPDA NetCell Client You log out by tapping the Logout icon on the camera list page 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 269 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Web and Realtime Feed Servers Go nstallation dependent features Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server are not available See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences NetDVMS features two alternatives to using the mage Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS for providing remote access to the surveillance system The Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server The Web Server and the Realtime Feed Server do not offer as advanced functionality as the Image Server NetGuard NetGuard EVS neither at the server end nor at the client end However if remote users are to acc
300. ll of the following toolbar icons may be available to you Settings Opens the Viewer s Settings control panel in which you are able to specify settings for ae the camera layout and specify the time span for use in the timeline See also Setting Up the Camera Layout E Single View Switches to a single enlarged view of images from the camera selected in the camera layout 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 140 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual i g hip You may also simply double click a camera in the camera layout to switch between single view and multi view Multi View Switches to multi view displaying all cameras in the selected camera layout view hip You may also simply double click a camera in the camera layout to switch between single view and multi view Database Information Opens the Database Information control panel in which you select the cameras you want displayed in the camera layout See also Setting Up the Camera Layout Motion View Opens the Motion View control panel in which you are able to view a graph displaying sequences with motion The graph is dragable allowing you to browse the sequences See also the description of Motion View under Browsing Recordings Alarm Overview Opens the Alarm Overview control panel in which you are able to view a list of generated motion and ev
301. ll open a separate export dialog The export dialog will list the specified start time end time and camera 6 Inthe export dialog select the required export format AVI movie clip or JPEG still images 7 Select whether to add timestamps from the surveillance system to the exported images If selected timestamps will appear in the corner of the images 1 emam Timestamps arrow indicates actual position Date and time format may be different on your computer 8 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the J PEG format go to step 11 Select required frame rate for the export With the Full option all images between the start and end times will be included in the export with the Half option only every second image will be included yet still play back in real time 9 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the J PEG format go to step 11 In the AVI Codec list select required AVI codec The list will contain the video codecs available on your PC Ghip A video codec is a particular compression decompression technology used when generating video files Your choice of codec will affect the quality and size of the AVI file The Indeo video 5 10 codec if available on your PC generally provides a very good compromise between quality and file size 10 This step applies for export in the AVI format only if using the J PEG format go to step 11 By default the AVI file will get a
302. lue Back Door East wing Gamers a Dark blue camera is not selected eit Cine Sage iri Canara a Light blue camera selected Colored I ndicators Each image bar features three colored indicators e Event indicator the leftmost of the three indicators solid yellow Lights up when specific events defined by the surveillance system administrator occur Click anywhere inside the image to reset the event indicator This indicator may appear black if event indication has not been specified for the camera in question of if no specified events have occurred Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Motion indicator the indicator in the middle solid rediff Lights up when motion is detected in the image Click anywhere inside the image to reset the motion indicator This indicator may appear black if no motion has been detected e Online indicator the rightmost of the three indicators blinking green E Changes state every time a new image is received from the camera Ghip If configured as part of individual cameras properties on the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab event and motion indications can be accompanied by sound notifications See Adjusting Camera Properties for more information e Enlarging I mages from Particular Cameras in a View To enlarge images from a particular camera in a view double click the camera position s blue image bar Double clicking blue image bar enlarges view To r
303. ly Select check box to store all images in which motion is detected On event Note Use of storage on event requires that events have been defined Read more about events in About Input Events amp Output Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when images received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions only Select check box to store all images regardless of motion when an external event occurs and until another external event occurs then select required start and stop events in the Start and Stop lists Number of Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when images seconds received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions pre post only recordings on event You are able to store recordings from periods preceding and following detected motion and or specified events Using such a pre post buffer can be advantageous If for example you have defined that images should be stored when a door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may be important Specify the number of seconds for which you want to store images from before and after the storage conditions are met 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 29 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Example You
304. m Page 127 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Delete Name Address Port Password NetGuard EVS Clear Update To change the properties of an already defined NetMatrix Monitor select the required NetMatrix Monitor make the changes in the fields below the list then click the Update button To remove a NetMatrix Monitor from the list select the unwanted NetMatrix Monitor then click the Delete button You will be prompted to confirm the removal Available only when you have selected a NetMatrix Monitor in the list Clicking the Delete button will remove the selected NetMatrix Monitor You will be prompted to confirm the removal Used when adding a new NetMatrix Monitor or editing the properties of an existing one Type a name for the NetMatrix Monitor The name will appear in various day to day usage situations it is therefore a good idea to use a descriptive and unambiguous name Note NetMatrix Monitor names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp es eco Ge Used when adding a new NetMatrix Monitor or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the IP address of the NetMatrix Monitor thip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard Used when adding a new NetMatrix Monitor or editing the properties of an existing one Specify the port number to be used when sending commands to the NetMatrix Monitor T
305. m server you are able to include NetMatrix content in your NetGuard EVS views Thus when particular events occur or another user wishes to share important occurrences with you live images from particular cameras will automatically appear in your views NetMatrix positions Which events or cameras are used in the NetMatrix setup depends entirely on the surveillance system server s NetMatrix configuration or on what other users wish to share with you you are not able to control this in the NetGuard EVS However you are able to add NetMatrix content to as many view positions as required This way you are able to watch live video from several NetMatrix triggered sources at the same time View example If you create a view with several NetMatrix positions the positions are always ranked When the first image stream is received NetMatrix automatically presents the image stream in the primary NetMatrix position in your view 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 183 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual When the next image stream is received a first in first out principle begins to apply NetMatrix quickly transfers the previously received image stream to your view s secondary NetMatrix position and presents the latest image stream in your view s primary NetMatrix position and so on This way you can always watch the latest
306. mary Display secondary displays and floating windows will be restored 6 After a short wait the NetGuard EVS window will open The NetGuard EVS window has three tabs Live Browse and Setup The Live tab is used for viewing live images from cameras the Browse tab is used for browsing recorded images from cameras and the Setup tab is used for configuring the NetGuard EVS Note Depending on your user rights you may not be able to access all three tabs If You Log in for the First Time Determine Available Views If you have logged in for the first time you need to determine whether any views exist Views determine how images from cameras are displayed in the NetGuard EVS and are thus required in order to be able to use the NetGuard EVS One or more views may already have been created for you or you may need to create views yourself Read more about views including how to determine if any views have already been created for you in Private and Shared Views Logging in on Different Computers Your user settings are stored centrally on the surveillance system server This means that your login can be used on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 172 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Login Error Messages NetDVMS User Manual If a problem or other issue occurs during login to the NetGuard
307. mation control panel to browse for the archive you want to view Once you have specified the required archive this way you can use all of the Viewer s image browsing features for navigating the recordings in the archive Remote Access Remote Access Overview Remote users can access a NetDVMS surveillance system in different ways e With a NetGuard can be installed locally or run from server good selection of standard features Example of NetGuard user interface e With a NetGuard EVS installed locally very feature rich based on the Net platform and thus highly flexible for future integration of plugins etc 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 152 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual S Example of NetGuard EVS user interface e With a regular Microsoft Internet Explorer browser using NetDVMS s built in Web and Realtime Feed Servers offer a very limited feature set recommended only for remote users on very slow connections Whether this remote access method works on you surveillance system depends on how your surveillance system was installed see Administration of Web Server and Realtime Feed Server for more information Example of user interface pro vided through regular browser The way remote access is handled at the surveillance system server end is different depending on remote access
308. mbination should apply e Global When working on any of the NetGuard EVS s three tabs Live Browse and Setup e Browse Mode When working on the NetGuard EVS s Browse tab only e Live Mode When working on the NetGuard EVS s Live tab only e Setup Mode When working on the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab only 6 Click the Assign button This will add the specified shortcut key combination to the Assigned keys list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 191 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Key Lise in Acton B Corirgl Browihe Mode Brovwree Mexi Image D Contro obal Toggle Side Fane Delete Al Goksal Show keyboard setup tl A obel Mose the application Z Corral A Live Hode Camera FTZ Zoom in Example of user defined keyboard shortcuts 7 Click OK hip Your shortcut key combinations are kept as part of your user settings on the NetDVMS server This means that you will be able to use your shortcut key combinations on any computer that has a NetGuard EVS installed provided you log in to the NetGuard EVS with your own user name and password Deleting a Shortcut Key Combination To delete an existing keyboard shortcut from the Assigned keys list simply select the unwanted shortcut in the list then click the Delete button Selecting Language In the NetGuard EVS you are able to select between several language versio
309. me Navigation controls to browse recordings from around the time of the event e Audio If one or more cameras have audio devices attached you are able to listen to recorded audio from a selected audio source when using the NetGuard EVS s Browse tab Note Depending on your user rights access to listening to recorded audio may be restricted To listen to recorded audio select the required audio source in the Audio section s Audio Sources list To temporarily mute the recorded audio simply select the Mute check box Tip You can listen to recorded audio independently of the views cameras you are watching However the recorded audio you will hear will match the point in time you specify through the Browse tab s navigation features e Smart Search Smart search lets you search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from a particular camera Note Smart search cannot be used for images from IPIX cameras Depending on your user rights access to smart search may be restricted How to Use Smart Search To use smart search do the following 1 Select the Browse tab s Smart Search section 2 Select the Smart Search section s Show Grid check box 3 Select the required camera in the view A blue grid overlay will appear on the image from the camera This is the grid you selected in the previous step the grid can be removed by clearing the Show Grid check box Tip For a better view enlarge the camera image by double
310. mework are installed you must register Net Framework in the IIS 10 In Windows Start menu select Run 11 In the Open field type C WINDOWS Framework v1 1 4322 aspnet_regiis exe i where v1 1 4322 refers to the Net Framework version 3 Click OK to register the Net Framework in IIS Grip When IIS and Net Framework have been installed and registered it is a good idea to use Windows Update to check for and download any new service packs or security packs e Installing the NetPDA NetCell Server To Install the NetPDA NetCell Server do the following 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 255 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual IIS Port Configuration Before you begin installing the NetPDA NetCell Server you must configure IIS to use the port number on which the NetPDA NetCell Server is going to run 1 In Windows Start menu select Run 2 Inthe Open field type inetmgr exe and click OK This will display the Internet Information Services dialog 3 Inthe left part of the dialog expand the computer item until you see the Default Web Site item A innate proma deri i mm ihe EE i O 4 Internet Information Services I E JRA local computer Web Sites 2 Default Web Site e TISHelp ie Default SMTP Virtual Server Example only details enlarged for clarity computer name
311. n j you are able to view a list of recordings of detected events occasionally known as alarms for the selected camera oe SO Lise A ieee Soe Se 11385 3 images To view recordings of an event select the required event in the list then tap the SELECT button The list is able to display up to 16 recorded events at a time If the list contains more than 16 recorded events use the Browse buttons to navigate the list laa aa f bo pot 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 268 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The two outer buttons take you to the first last 16 recorded events the two inner buttons take you to the previous next 16 recorded events Full Screen View You will normally see recorded images from the selected camera in the NetPDA NetCell Client s regular view In regular view Only about half of the display is available for viewing the images as the rest of the space is taken up by the navigation controls If you require a better view of the images you can easily switch to full screen view ik T ie a G Ta Tir When viewing recorded images in the NetPDA NetCell Client s regular view tap the Full Screen icon al to switch to a full screen rotated view Chip As an alternative to tapping the Full Screen icon simply tap anywhere inside the regular view s
312. n Windows Start menu 2 Select All Programs 3 Select NetDVMS gt Web Server The Web Server icon now appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar on Server icon 4 Click the Web Server icon This will open the NetDVMS Web Server window If Auto Start was selected when configuring the Web Server the Web Server will automatically start and remote users are able to connect to it If Auto Start was not selected when configuring the Web Server the Web Server must be started manually by clicking the Start server button 5 Web Server and user activity can be monitored in the NetDVMS Web Server window s Log section Stopping the Web Server To stop the Web Server click the NetDVMS Web Server window s Stop server button This will stop the Web Server without shutting it down This means that you will quickly be able to start the Web Server again by clicking the Start server button Shutting Down the Web Server To shut down the Web Server click the NetDVMS Web Server window s Shut down button This will shut down the Web Server and you will have to access it from Window s Start menu in order to start it again When clicking the Shut down button you will be asked to confirm that you want to shut down the Web Server e RealtimeFeed Server Configuration The Realtime Feed Server does not require any configuration apart from its default image quality specified as part of the co
313. n motion is detected Depending on the camera s motion detection sensitivity configured on the surveillance system server this can help reduce CPU usage significantly If the camera s images are only updated on motion users will see the message No motion together with a still image in the camera s view position until motion is detected e Sound on Motion Detection When images from the camera are viewed on the Live tab it is possible to get a simple sound notification when motion is detected e Always off Do not use sound notifications on detected motion e Always on Play a sound notification each time motion is detected on the camera 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 187 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual wit receive lots of sound notifications If you select Always on the amount of motion related sound notifications you are likely to receive will depend on the motion detection sensitivity of the camera in question If motion detection for the camera is highly sensitive you may at times receive very frequent sound notifications The camera s motion detection sensitivity is configured on the surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt If you select sound notifications for more than one camera you may also hear more notifications again depending on the cameras mot
314. n next to a sequence in the list will show you the exact date and time of the first and last image in the sequence as well as the exact date and time of the motion detection event etc triggering the recording Sequences may often begin some seconds before a motion detection event etc and end some seconds after This so called buffer allows you to be able to see what happens immediately before and after an incident the buffer length is determined by the system administrator Expanded sequence indication Date and time format may be different on your computer e Alerts The Browse tab s Alerts section lets you view a list of detected events occasionally known as alerts Listed events are clickable allowing you to quickly jump to the time at which an event occurred How to Get a List of Events To get a list of events do the following 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 212 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 1 Select the required events in the Alerts list You may either select a single event Or all events on a particular camera Or all events on a particular server 2 Click the Get List button This will display a list of detected events You are able to click the listed events to view recordings from the required event in the view Tip To view what took place prior to and after the event use the Ti
315. n saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s desktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations We then imported the HTML page into the required NetGuard EVS views When importing the HTML page we made sure to select Enable HTML scripting in the HTML page s Properties on the Setup tab Properties a Uri C demo html 7 Enable html scripting Selecting Enable HTML scripting ensures that the scripting required for the buttons to work is automatically inserted in the HTML page e Example of an HTML Page with I mage Map Navigation You may also create an HTML page with more advanced content for example an image map allowing users to switch between views In the following example we have kept the two groups and two views from the previous example Instead of using buttons we have created an HTML page with an image of a floor plan and created an image map based on the floor plan Viewed in a browser our HTML page looks like this 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 194 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual p Example of HTM Page Microsof Infiermet Explorer Pal Fee E
316. n to view the events log 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 293 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e NetGuard EVS In the Browse tab s Alerts section select the required event then click the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected Image Server Log Files These files log activity on the Image Server service A log file is created for each day the Image Server is used By default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software Image Server log files are named according to the structure SLog YYYYMMDD log e g ISLog_20051231 log Image Server Audit Log Files These files log NetGuard and NetGuard EVS user activity if audit logging is enabled in the Image Server Administrator A log file is created for each day with remote user activity By default placed in a subfolder named SAuditLog under the folder containing the NetDVMS software Image Server audit log files are named according to the structure is auditYYYMMDD log e g is_audit20053112 log Export Log Files These files log activity regarding database export from the Monitor application s Viewer A log file is created for each day on which export was performed By default exported databases as well as the export log file are placed in an Exported mages folder on the desktop of the computer on which the export was performe
317. n will typically contain controls for compression bandwidth resolution color contrast brightness image rotation and similar Include Date and Time in Image The Camera Settings section may feature an Include Date and Time in Image check box When selected date and time from the camera will be included in images from the camera Grip For consistent synchronization you may if Supported by the camera auto synchronize camera and system time via a time server e Preview Image When adjusting camera settings you are able to view the effect of your settings by clicking the Preview Image button located at the bottom of the window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 34 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Clicking the Preview Image button will provide you with an image from the camera in question as it would look with the settings specified in the Camera Settings section When you have found the best possible camera settings click OK to apply the settings for the camera Adjust Motion Detection Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Adjust Motion Detection window lets you specify motion detection sensitivity for a specific camera Depending on your configuration motion detection sensitivity setting
318. nd install the NetGuard on your computer If you prefer this option see Downloading and Installing the NetGuard Ghip By selecting Remember my settings you can save your preferred access method e g browser mode and automatically use it the next time you connect This requires that your browser s privacy settings allow cookies to check your browser s privacy settings select the Tools menu then Internet Options then the Privacy tab on which privacy settings are determined in the Settings section e Accessing a Locally Installed NetGuard If the NetGuard is already installed locally simply click the NetGuard shortcut to access it Depending on your selections when installing the NetGuard locally the shortcut is typically located in Windows quick launch bar next to the Start button occasionally it may be placed on your desktop NetGuard shortcut icon You may also access a locally installed NetGuard by selecting Start gt All Programs gt NetDVMSNetGuard then selecting either browser or full screen mode e Upon Accessing the NetGuard Logging In When accessing the NetGuard either running it from the NetDVMS server or by opening a locally installed version you will be asked to log in To log in do the following 1 Specify your login information in the following fields e Username Type your user name as specified by your system administrator The user name is case sensitive i e there is a difference between typin
319. nder Output Information in the lower part of the window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 39 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list You are able to determine each output s position among the Monitor s output buttons or NetGuard s and NetGuard EVS s output list by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down buttons located to the right of the list The selected output is moved up one step each time you click the up button Likewise each time you click the down button the selected output is moved down one step To remove an output from the On Manual Control list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in images from the camera rip This feature does not require that a VMD Video Motion Detection event has been defined for the camera in the I O Setup window To select an output for use when motion is detected in images from the camera 3 Select the required output in the All Outputs
320. ndow and return to the Administrator window For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events the generic event will now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS How to test a generic event Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Once you have added a generic event See How to Add a Generic Event a quick and easy way to test your generic event is to first set up an event notification and then use Telnet to send a small amount of data which will trigger the generic event and in turn the event notification What is Telnet Telnet is a terminal emulation program used on TCP IP networks With Telnet you can connect to a server from a computer on the network and execute commands through Telnet as if you were entering them directly on the server Windows includes a client for use with Telnet For this example we have created a generic event called Video Our generic event simply specifies that if the term video appears in a received TCP data package the generic event should be triggered Your generic event may be different but you can still use the principles outlined in the following 1 Inthe Administrator window first select a camera from which you are able to view images in the Monitor or in a NetGuard NetGuard EVS then click the Settings button aa ee ee bee il This will open the Camera Settin
321. ndow may appear on your screen automatically If the NetMatrix Monitor application is not running you can start it by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop You may also find that the NetMatrix Monitor application is running but in hidden mode When the NetMatrix Monitor application runs in hidden mode you will not see the NetMatrixMonitor window until there are images to display You will however still be able to access the window by double clicking the NetMatrixMonitor icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen m Jg 10 35 Example only your notification area may have different content e 1x1and 2x2 View Depending on configuration your NetMatrix Monitor window will display either a 1X1 or a 2x2 view e With 1x1 the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of displaying image feeds from a single camera at a time e With 2x2 the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of showing image feeds from up to four cameras at a time If using 2x2 the image feeds will be inserted in top left to bottom right order according to a first in first out principle Image feeds will remain in the position in which they were loaded when all four positions are used any new image feeds will replace the oldest image feeds A slightly different configuration is also possible in which case new image feeds will always be displayed in the to
322. ne does not match the encrypted part The log file header is not correct This situation is most likely to occur if a user has attempted to delete the beginning of a log file Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 295 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Removal Removing NetGuard EVS To remove NetGuard EVS do the following 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select NetGuard EVS x x where x x refers to the version number 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions Removing NetGuard Bear in mind that NetGuard can be used straight from the surveillance system server without any installation required on your computer Removal of NetGuard is only relevant if NetGuard was downloaded and installed on your computer Ghip To check whether you have a local installation of NetGuard follow steps 1 and 2 in the removal procedure if NetGuard is not listed in the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs NetGuard is not installed on your computer To remove NetGuard do the following 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 In the Add or Remove Programs w
323. ner of the Administrator window s title bar gives you access to a small menu Selecting About Adm from the menu will display a dialog with your system s version number and software license code this is valuable information should you ever need to contact product support 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 17 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Import of DLKs How to Import Device License Keys Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights You must have a Device License Key DLK for every device IP network camera or IP video server installed on your NetDVMS surveillance system Remember that you are allowed to install and use only the number of cameras listed on your organization s license sheet regardless of you number of available DLKs For example a fully used four port video server counts as four cameras even though the cameras are connected through a single device therefore a fully used four port video server will use four licenses System administrators obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process You are able to specify each DLK manually when adding a device through the Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Add Device button in the Administrator window However you can avoid having to specify eac
324. next time you open it the Pause button will have changed to Resume Simply click the Resume button to resume the Recording Server service Recorder Manager Egi Ghip As a security measure the service is furthermore automatically resumed when you close the Administrator application 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 54 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Scheduling Camera Alert Scheduler Window The Camera Alert Scheduler window lets you specify when each camera should be online A camera is online when it is transferring images to the NetDVMS server for processing Name Window You are able to specify whether cameras should be online within specific periods of time or whether they should start and stop transferring images when specific events occur within specific periods of time You are also able to specify if e mail alerts SMS alerts or sound alerts should be triggered if motion is detected during specific periods of time If using PTZ cameras with patrolling you are furthermore able to specify if a certain patrol scheme should be used during specific periods of time By default cameras added to NetDVMS will automatically be online and you will only need to modify the Camera Alert Scheduler window s settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events or if you want
325. nfiguration of the Web Server You are however able to change the port number used by the Realtime Feed Server when communicating with the ActiveX Real Time Client default is port 9513 To change the port number do the following 1 Make sure the Realtime Feed Server is started see Starting the RealtimeFeed Server below 2 Access the Realtime Feed Server window by clicking the Realtime Feed Server icon in the notification area at the far right of the Windows taskbar 3 Stop the Realtime Feed Server by clicking the Stop button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 274 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 4 Change the port number in the Server Port field 5 Locate the file playbackfeed html in the HTML directory under the directory in which the NetDVMS software is installed 6 Edit the file playbackfeed html by changing the port number in the line RTFeed port 9513 to the required port number e RealtimeFeed Server Administrator s Guide to Day to Day Operation Once you run the Realtime Feed Server remote users will be able to connect to it for live image feeds Starting the Realtime Feed Server The Realtime Feed Server may already be running When the Realtime Feed Server is running the Realtime Feed Server icon appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar HE
326. ng path Grip To maximize load sharing and optimize performance distribute archives across your available storage space if possible Note If specifying another archiving location than the default location the location you specify must exist You are not able to create new directories as part of the process If archiving to a network drive the regular camera database must still be stored on a local drive i e a drive attached directly to the computer running the NetDVMS system Archives for the selected camera will be stored in separate subdirectories under the Archives directory at the location you specify The subdirectories will be named according to the following structure Archives CameraMACAddress_ VideoServerChannel DateAndTime Example With the default archiving folder located under C videodata images from an archiving taking place at 23 15 on 1st June 2005 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video server device with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination C videodata Archives 00408c51e181_ 2 2005 06 01 23 15 If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video server device with several channels the video server channel indication in the subdirectory named after the device s MAC address will always be _1 Example 00408c5le181 1 Wis audio archived too If audio is enabled on a device audio from the device will also be archived If the device is a video server wi
327. ning at the selected position Remember to have sufficient positions available in the view Ghip You can always change the cameras in the view Either drag the System Overview section s Clear link to a position in the view to clear the position or simply overwrite a position by dragging a different camera to the position 3 NetGuard users on your surveillance system will now able to access the view in the shared group as from their next login hip In addition to cameras you are able to add static images and HTML pages to views See Further Configuration Using Your Views on Different Computers Your user settings including your private views are stored on the NetDVMS server This means that you are able to use your private views on any computer that has a NetGuard installed provided you log in to NetGuard with your own user name and password Further Configuration In addition to creation of groups and views NetGuard s Setup tab lets you edit existing groups and views The Setup tab furthermore lets you adjust camera settings and set up joystick control for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom Cameras e Which Types of Groups are You Able to Edit Views in Depending on your user rights you may be able to create and edit views in the following types of groups e Private and shared e Private but not shared 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 236
328. nitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from the NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content You are able to view archived recordings in the Viewer alternatively use the NetGuard EVS You are able to use all of Viewer s features browsing smart search evidence export etc for archived recordings as well e Viewing Recordings from Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives For archived recordings stored locally or on network drives you simply use the Viewer s browsing features for example the timeline browser or the playback controls for finding and viewing the required recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a camera s regular database e Viewing Recordings from Exported Archives For exported archives e g archives stored on a CD you click the browse button in the Viewer s Database Infor
329. nly 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 137 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e PTZ Menu s Preset Position Buttons If preset positions have been defined in the Administrator application you are able to move the PTZ camera to the stored preset positions by clicking the preset position buttons displayed in the lower part of the PTZ menu Preset position buttons are grouped into five preset banks A E with up to five preset position buttons 1 5 in each To use preset positions first click a preset bank button A E to display the preset position buttons in the required bank then click the required preset position button 1 5 to move the PTZ camera to the required preset position hip You may use the A E and 1 5 keys on your keyboard to move the PTZ camera to preset positions e Point and Click PTZ Control Point and click control is supported for absolute positioning PTZ cameras as well as some relative positioning PTZ cameras when a hot spot and the PTZ Menu are enabled If the mouse pointer changes to crosshairs when positioned in the hot spot you are able to control the PTZ camera by clicking in the hot spot o 8 Crosshairs The PTZ camera will center on the point you click If you click and hold down the left mouse button then move the mouse up or down you will get access to a zoom slider For s
330. ns To select a language do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of the NetGuard EVS s top bar 2 From the menu that appears select Language then the required language G Joystick Setup D Keyboard Setup Langage F 3 The NetGuard EVS must be restarted in order for the change to take effect Close your NetGuard EVS then log in again to use the new language version Using an HTML Page for Navigation in NetGuard EVS In addition to displaying images from cameras the NetGuard EVS is able to display static images and HTML pages Such HTML pages may be used for intuitively switching between different views in the NetGuard EVS For example you may insert a clickable floor plan of a building and you would be able to simply click a part of the floor plan to instantly switch to a view displaying images from the required part of the building In the following you will see examples of HTML pages for NetGuard EVS navigation a simple HTML page with buttons and a more advanced HTML page with a clickable image map For NetDVMS system administrators wishing to create and distribute such HTML pages to NetGuard EVS users a check list outlining the tasks involved is also provided Chip The NetGuard EVS is highly flexible when it comes to customizing navigation and other features For advanced users it is possible to create approximately 100 different function calls in the NetGuard EVS See NetGuard EVS Scriptin
331. ns on the HTML page e Buttons for switching between NetGuard s views Required HTML syntax lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top changeView Groupname Viewname gt e Buttons for switching between NetGuard s three tabs Live Browse and Setup Bear in mind that depending on their user rights some users may not be able to access all three tabs Required HTML syntax Live tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top selectPane live gt 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 249 NetDVMS User Manual O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Browse tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top selectPane browse Setup tab lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top selectPane setup gt e Buttons for hiding showing NetGuard s standard navigation pane Required HTML syntax Hiding lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showPane false gt Showing lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showPane true gt e Buttons for hiding showing NetGuard s standard title bar Required HTML syntax Hiding lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showTopTitle false gt Showing lt input type button value Buttontext onclick top showTopTitle true gt e Buttons for switching to a particular point in
332. ns the small Recorder Manager window which lets you pause resume the Recording Server service Pausing the service is necessary in order to access some features for example configuration of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras IMPORTANT While the service is paused no video or audio will be recorded Opens the Camera Alert Scheduler window in which you specify online periods for each camera You are also able to specify if cameras should go online when specific events occur e g when a door is opened and if e mail SMS or sound alerts should be used if motion is detected during specific periods of time e g during working hours If using PTZ cameras with patrolling you are furthermore able to specify if a patrol scheme should be used during specific periods of time Qip By default all cameras are online at all times You will only need to modify scheduler settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific times or events or if you want to use specific alerts or a PTZ patrol scheme Opens the General Settings window in which you are able to specify a number of settings related to e Administrator password e User rights e PTZ patrolling pause time out if using PTZ cameras with patrolling e joystick setup for PTZ cameras E mail settings for alerts sent via e mail e SMS settings for alerts sent via SMS e Log file settings e Event recording settings e Other advanced settings such as the ability to disable
333. ntaining the camera s database the size of all camera databases on the drive will be reduced by deleting a percentage of their oldest recordings thus temporarily limiting the size of all databases When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing the original database sizes will be used You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved or adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size Chip Should the database resizing procedure take place you will be informed on screen in log files and if set up through an e mail and or SMS alert e Motion Detection Settings The Motion Detection Settings section contains two buttons for configuring the camera s motion detection Motion Opens the Adjust Motion Detection window in which you are able to specify Detection motion detection sensitivity levels Motion Color Opens the Color window in which you are able to select a color to be used for highlighting detected motion when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Note Highlighting of detected motion in the Monitor application requires that the Show Motion check box in the Camera Monitor Setup section is selected e Exclude Regions Settings The Exclude Regions Settings section contains two buttons for specifying areas in the camera s images in which motion detection should not be used Button Description Exclude Opens the Define Exclusion Regions window in
334. nts from an IPIX camera on the Live or Browse tabs you are able to navigate each viewpoint independently by clicking inside each viewpoint or by using the buttons in the PTZ Control section Apply to All The Apply To All button lets you quickly apply the camera settings for the selected camera to all cameras in the view e Configuring J oystick Control The Setup tab s Joystick Control section lets you configure joystick control of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras J oystick configuration control requires that a joystick is attached to the computer running r Note Even though joystick control is supported for a large number of PTZ cameras not all PTZ cameras may be joystick controlled Refer to the release note for information about joystick support for cameras Click the J oystick Control section s Setup button to access the Joystick Setup window aie bk BP wal The Joystick Setup window The Joystick Setup window s J oystick Axes section lets you configure the axes used for the joystick With a joystick you are typically able to navigate camera images three dimensionally along three axes an X axis a Y axis and a Z axis where the Z axis refers to the depth zoom level 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 239 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Example X Y and Z axes Box Invert y axis Let
335. nu with the word default after the camera name This helps you quickly switch back to viewing the original camera Grip If camera shortcut numbers have been defined on the surveillance system server you are also able to use keyboard shortcuts for switching between cameras see Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts for more information If such camera shortcut numbers have been defined they will appear in brackets before camera names in the shortcut menu as it the case in the example illustration e Sound Notifications Only available for single camera view positions not for hotspots carousels or NetMatrix positions Only available if sound notifications audible notifications triggered when events and or motion occur have been configured for the camera on the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab Lets you temporarily mute sound notifications To turn on sound notifications again simply select Sound Notifications gt Mute again e PTZ Presets Only available for single camera view positions not for hotspots carousels or NetMatrix positions Only available if the selected camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera for which preset positions have been defined Lets you select between the camera s preset positions When you select a preset position the camera will move to the selected position Selecting the preset position Home will move the camera to its default position e NetMatrix Only available for single camera view positions not for hotspot
336. o Send Live Images to NetMatrix Monitors for detailed information e Monitor s Control Panel The Monitor s control panel section contains a number of buttons for controlling the Monitor s features Button Description Viewer HotSpot Carousel PTZ Menu Manual Mode Stop or Start Opens the Viewer with which you are able to browse and play back recordings print images send images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats Note Use of the Viewer may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button Available only when use of a hot spot in a separate floating window has been set up by the system administrator Opens the separate hot spot window Available only when use of the hot spot s carousel feature has been enabled by the system administrator Click to toggle the carousel feature on and off Opens the PTZ menu with which you are able to control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Note The PTZ menu is only functional when the camera selected in the camera layout is a PTZ camera Use of the PTZ menu may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button See a detailed description of the PTZ menu in How to Use the PTZ Menu ip To hide the PTZ menu simply click the PTZ Menu button again Lets you toggle between scheduled mode cameras transferring images to NetDVMS according to a schedule defined in the Administrator app
337. o all cameras in the view 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 188 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Customizing J oystick Setup When a new joystick is detected by the NetGuard EVS a default PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom configuration for the joystick is added automatically However you are able to customize the setup for all joysticks attached to the computer running the NetGuard EVS To customize joystick setup do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of the NetGuard EVS s top bar 2 From the menu that appears select J oystick Setup D keid Setup Langia J The Joystick Setup window appears In the Joystick Setup window select the required joystick in the Selected J oystick list The axes and buttons available on the selected joystick will be listed in the Axis Setup and Button Setup sections respectively Joyvtick telep EJ Deane al yaik l e Joprick CH Pes P ESOP CONTROLLER brasri Presse ton oO Cares Par Y fos Oo O 3 Coweta Oo Ezz Ti Crai Zo Hare Bechara Mev A Burton Shaw ew Eun 1 Ehana bianet ZOE Te Button 3 He Acton Buon 4 He Acton Button 5 He Acton Button 6 Ho Asir Fa itam F Hin deter E of Cici Joystick Setup window displaying available axes i and buttons on a selected joystick
338. og will display the status of the export Ghrip If you are exporting very long sequences export may depending on your selected export settings take a while You can continue to use NetGuard for other purposes while the export process is underway If the Close On Completion check box is selected default the export dialog will automatically close when the export is finished Upon completion you are able to view and distribute the exported file Example AVI file viewed in the Winamp player other common players include the Windows Media Player and the RealPlayer Keyboard Shortcuts You are able to use the following keyboard shortcuts in NetGuard On All Tabs CTRL 1 Go to Live tab CTRL 2 Go to Browse tab CTRL 3 Go to Setup tab CTRL DOWN ARROW Go to the next view in the Views list located in the upper part of the window CTRL UP ARROW Go to the previous view in the Views list located in the upper part of the window On Live Tab Only PLUS SIGN PTZ camera zoom in MINUS SIGN PTZ camera zoom out UP ARROW PTZ camera move up DOWN ARROW PTZ camera move down LEFT ARROW PTZ camera move left RIGHT ARROW PTZ camera move right 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 248 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual HOME numeric PTZ camera move up and left keypad only END numeric keypad PTZ camera move do
339. om the NetDVMS server and accessed by connecting to the server through an Internet Explorer browser See the following descriptions e Accessing a NetGuard Run from Server If you want to run the NetGuard straight from the NetDVMS server open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator When you connect to the NetDVMS server you will see a welcome page In the NetGuard section of the welcome page select between three ways of accessing the NetGuard e Run NetGuard from server in full screen mode Lets you use the NetGuard directly from the NetDVMS server in full screen mode In full screen mode Internet Explorer s usual navigation buttons are not shown which means that more screen space is available for viewing the NetGuard window If selecting this option you may be required to download the file full hta Downloading this file ensures that the NetGuard will work properly in full screen mode 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 230 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Run NetGuard from server in browser mode Lets you use the NetGuard directly from the NetDVMS server in browser mode In browser mode you view the NetGuard just like a regular web page in Internet Explorer e Download and install NetGuard locally Lets you download a
340. ome cameras crosshairs surrounded by a square may be displayed When this is the case you are able to zoom in on an area by dragging a square around the required area in the hot spot For such cameras zoom level is controlled by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while moving the mouse up or down this will display a zoom level slider inside the hot spot e PTZ Patrolling and PTZ on Event PTZ cameras may be set up to move automatically either according to a scheme PTZ patrolling or when particular events occur PTZ On Event This is configured in the Administrator application e With PTZ patrolling the PTZ camera will automatically move between preset positions e With PTZ On Event the PTZ camera will automatically move to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs For example the PTZ camera may move to a preset position covering a door area when a door is opened If PTZ patrolling is enabled for the selected PTZ camera you can pause PTZ patrolling for the camera by clicking the PTZ Menu s Pause Patrol button The button is only available for PTZ cameras for which PTZ patrolling has been enabled Note that pausing applies for the selected camera other PTZ cameras may still patrol Depending on configuration the pause may automatically time out after a while Note PTZ patrolling and PTZ On Event is stopped for all cameras as long as Manual Mode is used to allow cameras to be controlled manually How to Sen
341. on The J oystick Axes section lets you configure the axes used for the joystick With a joystick you are able to navigate PTZ camera images three dimensionally along three axes an X axis a Y axis and a Z axis where the Z axis refers to the depth zoom level Example X Y and Z axes Button Check Description Box Invert y axis Lets you invert the Y axis This way you are able to select whether the PTZ camera should move up or down when you move the joystick towards you and away from you respectively 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 64 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual z axis uses a Lets you specify whether the Z axis should use a relative or an absolute relative positioning scheme positioning scheme This will affect the way you zoom in and out with PTZ camera Default values Resets axes settings letting you use the joystick s default axes settings e Joystick Buttons Section The Joystick Buttons section lets you specify which joystick buttons should be used for particular actions To assign an action to a particular joystick button select the required action in the list then click the required joystick button When a button is assigned to an action the name of the button will be listed together with the name of the action To stop using a particular joystick button for a particular action
342. on is detected in the image Click anywhere inside the image to reset the motion indicator e Online indicator the rightmost of the three indicators blinking green Changes state every time an image is received from the camera e Enlarging I mages from Particular Cameras in a View To enlarge images from a particular camera in a view double click the blue image bar above the image Double clicking blue bar above image enlarges view To return to normal view simply double click the blue image bar again Chip If you have selected reduced image quality for the camera on the Setup tab images from the camera will be displayed in full quality when viewed enlarged 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 241 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Output Control If the selected camera has external outputs defined for example for switching on lights or sounding a siren such outputs can be triggered from NetGuard To trigger an output first select the required camera in the view then select the required output in the Output Control section and click the Fire link e PTZ Control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX technology allowing creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images cameras can be controlled from NetGuard Point and Click Control Many PTZ cameras may be controlled simply by pointing and cli
343. on you have saved it to Chip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button 8 Read and accept the license agreement This will take you to the Image server setup step 03 Metiih Server Image Server solup Pas eri bare oP Adige aed ped pas bon brag Daves bu Riba f kijan a E Pos 9 In the Hostname IP Address field specify the IP address or host name of the NetDVMS server to which the NetPDA NetCell Server should connect Chip If installing the NetPDA NetCell Server on the same server as the surveillance system itself simply specify Localhost Chip If the NetPDA NetCell Server should connect to a master slave system specify the IP address or host name of the master server In the Port field specify the port number used by the surveillance system s Image Server default is port 80 then click Next 10 An Important Note is displayed it is highly recommended that you read it When ready click Next This will take you to the Select Installation Address step 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 257 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual fe Metis Serves Sheoc Insiailation Address ia palaima eel et ee Sa ba Bh Sieg ere eect Pp eiia ip
344. onitor application Q nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences e Logfile Settings The Logfile Settings section lets you specify where to keep the general log files containing information about activity in the Administrator and recording server and how long for Separate log files are generated for the Administrator and recording server Furthermore separate types of recording server log files are generated depending on whether the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application or as a service the Recording Server service See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Logfile Path By default the Administrator and recording server log files are stored in the folder containing the NetDVMS software To specify another location for your log files type the path to the required folder in the Logfile Path field or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder Days to Log A new log file is created every day A log file older than the number of days specified in the Days to log field is automatically deleted By default the log file will be stor
345. onitor window in full screen mode i e completely maximized without any title bar etc To return to regular view simply select Full Screen again Ghip To quickly toggle between viewing the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen or regular view you can also simply double click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window e Always On Top Forces the NetMatrix Monitor window on top of other windows on your screen e Config Lets you access the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Note that before the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window opens you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Pasceord Validation J Enter Pasowand e Hide Window Sends the NetMatrixMonitor window to hidden mode in which you will not see the window until there are images to display You will however still be able to access the window by clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen m d DADA 10 35 Example only your notification area may have different content Notification Area Shortcut Menu By right clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows notification area you get access to another shortcut menu Show Window Config Exit The shortcut menu has the following options e Show Window Restores the NetMatrixMonitor window in either regular or full screen view depending on configura
346. onssi com info onssi com Page 129 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The exclamation mark indicates that there is additional configuration to be done 3 Now right click the event to select which action should take place when the event occurs Alam Contos Display 1 Moton on Meck Door West inal Camera b Delete Motion om Back Do West Wig Camera b Connect Diank then rt Dione You have three actions to choose from e Connect Connect to the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step e Disconnect then connect Disconnect any existing connection to the camera you will specify the actual camera in the next step then connect again This option is useful because NetMatrix Monitors are often able to show live images from more than one event in which case the live images will appear in the NetMatrix Monitor on a first in first out basis Each time a new event occurs the images from the latest event are displayed prominently in a specific position on the NetMatrix Monitor while at the same time the images from the older events are shifted to less prominent positions and eventually pushed out of the NetMatrix Monitor in order to make space for the latest event s images With the Connect option you may thus experience that if images triggered by one event on a camera are already shown on the NetMatrix Monitor images triggered by another event on the same camera would not be
347. ontains the following fields Button related Read only field displaying the name of the camera for which the event will be to specified If the field displays Global the event button will be a global event button available for all cameras Manual event Lets you specify a name for the event button name Send e mail if Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event button is clicked this event occurs Include image Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected from camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is clicked this event occurs Edit Event Window for Editing Event Buttons The Edit Event window for editing event buttons lets you edit the settings for an existing event button Co H The Edit Event window for editing input events Jaccess You access the Edit Event window for editing event buttons from the Event Buttons window by first selecting the required event button in the Defined Events list then clicking the Edit selected button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 86 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Edi
348. or that instance of the carousel begins This is why the carousel appears to be out of sync in reality you are watching two separate instances of the carousel 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 226 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts When working on the NetGuard EVS s Live and Browse tabs a number of simple keyboard shortcuts are available Grip In addition to the standard keyboard shortcuts you are able to assign your own custom shortcut key combinations to particular actions in the NetGuard EVS See Assigning Custom Keyboard Shortcuts The NetGuard EVS s standard keyboard shortcuts are lt camera shortcut number gt ENTER ENTER ENTER lt view shortcut number gt ENTER 6 numeric keypad only View position in regular left and maximized right state Note that the selected view position is always highlighted by a lighter blue top bar Lets you change the camera displayed in the selected view position to the camera with the matching shortcut number Example If the required camera has the shortcut number 6 you would press 6 ENTER Note that camera shortcut numbers may not necessarily be used on your surveillance system Camera shortcut numbers are defined on the surveillance system server ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt
349. ork drive As a rule of thumb the capacity of the local drive should be at least twice the size required for storing the databases of all cameras for which archiving has been specified When archiving data from a camera to external locations including archiving locations on network drives NetDVMS automatically checks that the space required for data to be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space is available at the external location If not the external archive location s oldest data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new data to be archived In short When estimating storage capacity required for archiving consider your organization s needs then plan for worst case rather than best case scenarios e Backing Up Archives Many organizations want to back up recorded images from cameras using tape drives or similar Creating such backups based on the content of camera databases is not recommended it may cause Sharing violations or other malfunctions Instead create such backups based on the content of archives If you have not specified separate archiving locations for separate cameras you could simply back up the default local archiving directory Archives When scheduling a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving time e Viewing Archived Recordings You view archived recordings in the Viewer or NetGuard EVS This way you are able to use all of Vi
350. ory based authentication Provide them with the following information Server Address IP address or hostname of the Image Server plus any port number required In the NetGuard EVS s login dialog users will enter this information in a single field called Server Address so if the IP address is 123 123 123 123 and the port is 80 tell users that the Server Address is 123 123 123 123 80 Authentication In the NetGuard EVS s login dialog users will be asked to select between basic authentication or Windows based authentication Windows based authentication may in turn be based on the currently logged in Windows user o If using basic user name and password authentication tell users that the required authentication is Basic authentication o If using Windows based authentication based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is Windows authentication current user o If using Windows based authentication which should not necessarily be based on the currently logged in Windows user tell users that the required authentication is Windows authentication User name Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication Remember that user names are case sensitive so make it clear to the users if any parts of their user names Should specifically be upper or lower case Password Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication Users should enter their passwords e
351. ote users will be able to manually override the RealtimeFeed Server s default image quality User Administration Accounts and access rights for remote users are configured in the Settings window s User Administration section Unrestricted anonymous remote access is possible however if you want to restrict remote access you must define user accounts i e user names and passwords for the remote users Defining User Accounts To define user names and passwords for remote users click the User setup button This will open the User administration window in which you define individual user names and their associated passwords To add a user click the User administration window s Add user button specify the required user name and password and click OK This will add the user to the User administration window s list of users To remove a user from the User administration window s list of users select the user in the list and click the Delete user button Defining Access Rights Three different types of access right are available e Allow anonymous access Allows unrestricted access users will not have to specify a user name or password to access e Access for predefined users only Allows access only to users you have defined by clicking the User setup button Those users must provide their user name and password when accessing after which they will have access to all available cameras e Restrict user access by camera Allows acces
352. otected features Clicking the Admin Login button opens the Acministrator Login window in which you are able to specify the administrator password and log in to NetDVMS as an administrator When you are logged in as an administrator the Admin Login button changes to Admin Logout Clicking the Admin Logout button will restore any restrictions Lets you access the Administrator application The Administrator application is used for configuring NetDVMS upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras to the system Note Accessing the Administrator application from the Monitor may require certain user rights See the description of the Admin Login button When you close the Administrator application and return to the Monitor the Monitor will be restarted Certain settings notably settings for PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are not configurable when the Administrator application is accessed from the Monitor application To configure such settings you must close the Monitor application and open the Administrator application separately Exits the Monitor closing down the application and thereby stopping the transfer 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 135 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual of images from cameras to NetDVMS You will be asked to confirm that you want to clo
353. otspot useful you can enlarge any image in a view by double clicking the image What makes the hotspot useful is that with a hot spot it is possible to use a low image quality and or frame rate for cameras in the view s regular positions and a high image quality and or frame rate for the hotspot Then only when you select a camera for viewing in the hotspot will it be displayed in high quality and or high frame rate This can really help save bandwidth on the remote connection Hotspots are configured on the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab e NetMatrix NetMatrix is an integrated product that allows distributed viewing of live video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS With a typical NetMatrix configuration live images are automatically presented on the required monitor when defined events occur for example when movement is detected or when another user wishes to share important live images Provided NetMatrix has been configured on the surveillance system server and one or more special NetMatrix positions have been defined for your view you are able to watch NetMatrix triggered live video on the NetGuard EVS s Live tab When particular events occur or when other users wish to share important live images with you live images from particular cameras will automatically appear in your views NetMatrix positions Which events or cameras are used in the NetMatrix setup depends entirely on the surveillance system server s
354. otspot is indicated by a thin orange border e NetMatrix When the selected view contains one or more NetMatrix positions the NetMatrix positions will also appear when you are working on the Browse tab On the Browse tab the NetMatrix positions will simply display images from the cameras with which the NetMatrix positions were last used on the Live tab You are of course able to browse these images using the Browse tab s various navigation features Like on the NetGuard EVS s other tabs a NetMatrix position is indicated by a thin blue border e Timeline Browser The timeline browser displays an overview of periods with recordings from all cameras displayed in your current view The number of timelines displayed in the timeline browser reflects the number of cameras displayed in the view you are using The timeline of the camera selected in the view is highlighted in a lighter color Timeline Browser s Colors The timeline browser uses two colors e Red Recordings with motion e Green Recordings without motion The timeline browser prioritizes recordings with motion higher than recordings without motion If there are recordings with as well as without motion within an interval of one minute the timeline browser will treat the entire interval as an interval containing recordings with motion This is why depending on your individual camera settings you will often see more red than green periods in the timeline browser White Ho
355. our mouse pointer up or down while pressing the SHIFT key on your keyboard Zoom level slider 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 207 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Selecting a zoom level of 0 lets you view the whole image again hip If you mouse has a scroll wheel you can also use the scroll wheel to control the zoom level On many mice clicking the scroll wheel or middle mouse button quickly lets you view the whole image again Viewing Recorded I mages You view recorded video on the NetGuard EVS s Browse tab Note Particular user rights may be required in order to access the Browse tab Depending on your user rights access to browsing images from some cameras may be restricted Date and time formats used when browsing recorded images may vary depending on your computers regional settings Illustrations in this help topic and date and time formats used in these illustrations are thus for guidance only When you select the NetGuard EVS s Browse tab the NetGuard EVS will connect to the NetDVMS server and display recorded video from the cameras in the selected view This way you are able to browse recorded images The Browse tab provides you with a number of advanced features for browsing recorded images In addition to a range of image browsing features the Browse tab also lets you print images and export
356. output buttons for manually triggering output when the camera is selected in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS in the Monitor application and NetGuard e PTZ Preset Positions PTZ cameras only Available only if the camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions button opens PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window in which you are able to specify preset positions and patrolling for the camera 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 33 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Configure Device Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Configure Device window lets you specify image quality settings such as compression resolution etc for a specific camera nasin rues a kapay Lie Hig Tama err Lm H kaa a Ta Gl bai egy A a Example of the Configure Device window with a preview image Jaccess You access the Configure Device window by clicking the Image Quality button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The Configure Device window is divided into a Camera Settings section and a preview image section e Camera Settings Section The Camera Settings sectio
357. ow 4 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list simply select the required output and click the lt lt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 100 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual How to Add an I nput Based Event Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS such as starting or stopping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In the following you will see how to define events based on input received from external input units such as sensors attached to doors windows etc connected to cameras or other devices on a NetDVMS system To add an input based event do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the I O Setup button i H hedig bimini aiar M De E La ime m Fam Coreea i 1 a DE M Heke This will open the I O Setup window 2 Inthe I O Setup window first select the camera or other device to which the input unit is connected then clic
358. ow should run in 1x1 or 2x2 mode Oo In1x1 mode the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of displaying image feeds from a single camera at a time 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 284 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual o In 2x2 mode default the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of showing image feeds from up to four cameras at a time If using 2X2 mode the image feeds will be inserted in top left to bottom right order according to a first in first out principle Image feeds will remain in the position in which they were loaded when all four positions are used any new image feeds will replace the oldest image feeds If you select Insert Camera On Top new image feeds will always be displayed in the top left position while any previously received image feeds will be shifted one position forward and eventually be pushed out e Startup Mode Lets you select how the NetMatrix Monitor window should open when Starting Oo With Full Screen the NetMatrix Monitor window will open in full screen mode i e completely maximized without any title bar etc o With Window the NetMatrix Monitor window will open in regular mode i e as a scalable window with a title bar etc oO With Hidden the NetMatrixMonitor window will load in hidden mode in which you will not see the window until there are ima
359. p _ View Simplified example of views in private and shared groups Before you create any views it is important that you know the difference between views placed in shared and private groups not least because a number of views may already have been created and placed in shared groups for NetGuard users in your organization When that is the case you can start using your NetGuard straight away creating further views in your NetGuard will not be necessary unless you want to supplement the views in the shared groups with views of your own placed In private groups If you want to create views yourself for example if no views in shared groups are available in your organization NetGuard s Setup tab lets you create groups and views and specify which cameras should be included in each view e Are Any Views in Shared Groups Available Especially if you are a first time user of NetGuard you will want to know whether any views have already been created and placed in shared groups for your organization s NetGuard users Typically your surveillance system administrator will have told you if shared groups are used in your organization Alternatively to quickly determine whether any views have already been created and placed in shared groups do the following Note This method requires that your user rights permit you to access NetGuard s Live tab and or Browse tab Most users will have access to at least one of these tabs 1 Goto Net
360. p left position while any previously received image feeds will be shifted one position forward and eventually be pushed out 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 287 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Camera Information Depending on configuration the NetMatrix Monitor window is able to show camera information immediately above images The same image with and without camera information e Image Aspect Ratios Depending on configuration images in the NetMatrix Monitor window can either be displayed with their original aspect ratio or be stretched to fill the available space The same image with left and without right original aspect ratio Note how keeping the original aspect ratio often leads to black bars around the images whereas stretching may distort the images slightly e Toggling between Regular and Full Screen View To quickly toggle between viewing the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen or regular view double click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window e Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix Monitor To change the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor do the following 1 Open the NetMatrix Monitor window Right click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window and select Config from the menu that appears Ful Si z wf Always On Top Config A
361. ping recording on cameras triggering e mail or SMS notifications making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions activating output etc An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously Several types of events exist see About Input Events amp Output In most cases events occur and actions are triggered without the need for human intervention by NetDVMS users System administrators define the criteria for each event for example a certain amount of detected motion or input from a specific sensor when the criteria are met the system interprets it as an event and automatically triggers the required actions However you may also want users to be able to manually force an event to occur For this purpose NetDVMS lets you define event buttons Event buttons let users manually trigger events from the Monitor application and NetGuard EVS In the NetGuard EVS event buttons are actually not buttons instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list See also About Event Buttons for examples of the many ways in which you can use event buttons To add an event button do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the Event Buttons button L hedig Ldeninbisaltae Pir ee af on Coes PR eB Hm 1S La This will open the Event Buttons window 2 Inthe Event Buttons window first select the camera or other device for which you want the event button to be available then click the
362. plication the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from the NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content The Viewer lets you browse and play back recordings from cameras defined by the surveillance system administrator The Viewer also lets you print images send images via e mail and export entire video and audio sequences in a variety of formats access You access the Viewer from the Monitor application by clicking the Viewer button e The Viewer s Toolbar The Viewer s toolbar lets you quickly switch between the Viewer s different features Icons in the toolbar server as shortcuts to the features available from the File and Tools menus in the Viewer s menu bar When you select a feature in the toolbar settings for the feature typically become available in the Viewer s control panel located in the lower part of the window below the camera layout Depending on your rights not a
363. pplication e Triggering of notifications and external output e and more This also applies if you want to edit the settings for an already configured camera 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 25 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window lets you specify settings for a particular camera Example The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window for a PTZ camera Access You are able to access the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in two ways From the Administrator window by selecting a camera in the Device Manager section then clicking the Settings button From the Monitor Manager window by selecting the required camera then clicking the Settings button The Monitor Manager window is only available when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application The Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window contains the following sections and buttons e Framerate Settings The Framerate Settings section lets you specify the camera s recording speeds in the following fields Field
364. ptin Camera i ar iit Grip As an alternative to tapping the Full Screen icon simply tap anywhere inside the regular view s live image area When in full screen view tap anywhere inside the live image area to return to regular view PTZ Control If the selected camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera you are able to control the position of the camera with the NetPDA NetCell Client s PTZ controls To move a PTZ camera tap one of the PTZ control s direction arrows to move the camera in the required direction Tapping the center button will move the PTZ camera to its home i e default position To zoom in and out tap the Zoom icons BEJ Grip You are also able to control the position of the PTZ camera by using the navigation buttons on the PDA or cellphone itself If you are viewing the live images in the rotated full screen view PTZ control with the PDA or cellphone s navigation buttons is automatically rotated to match the view PTZ Preset Positions If PTZ preset positions have been set up for the selected PTZ camera you are able to move the PTZ camera to the preset positions To move a camera to a preset position select the required position in the Sel preset list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 266 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Output Control If manually controlled output such as l
365. quired event To remove an event from the Active Events list select the event in question and click the lt lt button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 41 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera supporting PTZ preset positions the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window lets you view and for many but not all PTZ cameras define preset positions for the PTZ camera The PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window Access To access the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window click the PTZ Preset Positions button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window The button is only available if the camera supports PTZ preset positions Note that if the Monitor application or Recording Server service is running the button will not be available see the description of the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window for information about how to make the button available e Why Use Preset Positions Defined preset positions can be used for making the PTZ camera automatically go to p
366. r image You are able to set the ellipse s X radius Y radius X center and Y center either by specifying the required values directly in the four fields or by using the following buttons to adjust the ellipse Button Description R Decreases the radius of the IPIX view field The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio R Increases the radius of the IPIX view field 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 48 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The ellipse s horizontal X and vertical Y radiuses are changed at the same time keeping the aspect ratio Rx Decreases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Rx Increases the horizontal X radius of the ellipse Ry Decreases the vertical Y radius of the ellipse Ry Increases the vertical Y radius of the ellipse X Moves the ellipse to the left X Moves the ellipse to the right Y Moves the ellipse up Y Moves the ellipse down e Previewing the IPIX View You are able to toggle between previewing the fish eye view and the IPIX rendered view i e the original elliptic view as well as the flattened rectangular view resulting from applying the IPIX algorithm according to your specified values To toggle between the two different types of preview click the Toggle Preview
367. r motion also Known as smart search e Skip gaps during playback of recordings e Configure and use several different joysticks e Print images with optional comments e Copy images for subsequent pasting into word processors e mail etc e Export recordings e g for use as evidence in AVI movie clip JPEG still image and NetDVMS database formats of which the database format can include audio 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 168 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Use pre configured as well as customizable keyboard shortcuts to speed up common actions e Select between a number of language versions independent of language used on main surveillance system e How does the NetGuard EVS get Recordings from the Surveillance System Recordings viewed by NetGuard EVS users are provided by the Image Server The Image Server runs as a service on the NetDVMS server it does not require separate hardware The NetDVMS system administrator uses the mage Server Administrator to manage NetGuard EVS users access to the surveillance system e How can User Rights Affect Day to Day Use of the NetGuard EVS The rights of individual remote users are specified centrally by the surveillance system administrator The rights of an individual user will determine the user s ability to use the NetGuard EVS s features
368. r must have access to browsing recorded images 6 Repeat as required for other users groups what if a user is a member of a group which has different rights than the user itself When this is the case for example when the user Paul himself has been given rights to do A and B whereas the Security Staff group of which Paul is a member has been given rights to do A B and C the sum of the rights will apply for the user Paul in our example would then due to his group membership have rights to do A B and C 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 167 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual NetGuard EVS Client NetGuard EVS Introduction The NetGuard EVS provides remote users with extremely feature rich access to the surveillance system It lets users access multiple servers at a time allowing remote user access across systems The NetGuard EVS must be installed locally on the remote user s computer Chip See system requirements for the NetGuard EVS under System Requirements e What are Remote Users Able to do with the NetGuard EVS With the NetGuard EVS remote users are able to e View live images from cameras on the surveillance system e Browse recordings from cameras on the surveillance system with a selection of advanced navigation tools including a highly intuitive timeline browser e Listen to live or stor
369. ra layout grid You specify the required interval between changes in the Seconds between shifts field e How to Specify which Cameras Should Display I mages in the Monitor To specify which cameras should display images in the Monitor application do the following 1 Inthe Monitor Manager window select a grid size for the camera layout grid e g 3x3 Note that if you want to use a hot spot see description of Monitor Manager window s Configuration section the space required for the hot spot will affect the number of camera positions will be available in the camera layout grid For example a 3X3 grid will normally contain nine camera positions with a 2x2 hot spot however only five camera positions will be available 2 Select a position in the Monitor Manager window s camera layout grid The selected position will be indicated in light gray whereas non selected positions will be dark gray 3 Select the required camera from the Select Camera list An image from the selected camera will be displayed in the selected camera layout grid position If an image from the camera is not yet available a camera icon will appear Note that a disabled camera cannot be selected for more information about disabling enabling cameras see the description of the Administrator window 4 Repeat step 2 3 for other required cameras Grip You are always able to change the camera selection for a position in the layout grid Simply select the requ
370. rator application by selecting it from Windows Start menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the desktop This will only be the case when access to the Administrator application has been password protected e When you click the Admin Login button to access the Administrator from the Monitor application e When access to particular features such as control of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras in the Monitor application has been restricted to administrators only Administrator Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Administrator window the main window in the Administrator application is used by the surveillance system administrator for configuring NetDVMS upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras to the system Access You access the Administrator application by selecting it from Window s Start menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the desktop If the Monitor application is installed and access from the Monitor application is enabled the Administrator application may also be ebrrestr ates accessed from the Monitor application Access to the Administrator application may be password ial atl esktop protected in which case you will be asked to provide the administrator password in the Administrator Login window shortcut The Administrator window fea
371. rator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights The Select Color window lets you select between three colors to be used for highlighting areas with disabled motion detection when images from the camera are viewed in the Monitor application Color changes only have effect in the Monitor application the default blue highlight color will always be used in the Administrator application Access You access the Select Color window by clicking the Region Color button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 38 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name Window In the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window you are able to associate a camera with particular external outputs defined in the O Setup window for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of lights The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as manually through output buttons available in the Monitor application NetGuard and NetGuard EVS in the Monitor application and NetGuard ran pas Samira fs firii Comet 1 Ez ge Di Ea ET i Dpi Te ma 0 f apail Chita F gates The Output Settings for Device Name C
372. rd EVS on another computer and expect to use your multiple window setup on the other computer as well The simple reason for this is that not all computers have extra displays attached If you want to use multiple windows with the NetGuard EVS on more than one computer you must therefore configure your multiple window setup on each computer e Frequently Asked Questions about Multiple Windows How many secondary displays can I use In the NetGuard EVS there is no limitation as such However the number of secondary displays you are able to use is likely to depend on your hardware display adapters etc and your Windows version ti want to close a view sent to Primary Display or a Secondary Display where is the Close button In order to allow the maximum possible viewing area the blue top bar of a view sent to Primary Display or a Secondary Display is hidden To show the top bar and get access to the Close button simply move your mouse pointer to the very top of the view T watch the same carousel in two different windows why is it out of sync A carousel changes cameras at a specific interval configured on the Setup tab Example With an interval of 10 seconds the carousel will show Camera 1 for 10 seconds then Camera 2 for 10 seconds etc The timing begins when you start watching a view containing the carousel When you later begin watching the same carousel in another view perhaps even in another window or another display the timing f
373. re able to zoom in and out using the scroll wheel on your mouse provided your mouse is equipped with a scroll wheel Note On individual mice the scroll wheel may have been reserved for special purposes in which case zooming may not be possible Refer to your mouse configuration manual PTZ Navigation Buttons Alternatively use the navigation buttons in the PTZ Control section to move the selected PTZ or IPIX camera The round middle button lets you quickly move the camera to its home i e default position The plus and minus buttons lets you zoom in and out respectively thip If you mouse has a scroll wheel you can also use the scroll wheel to control the zoom level On many mice clicking the scroll wheel or middle mouse button quickly lets you view the whole image again PTZ Preset Positions If preset positions have been defined for the selected PTZ camera you are able to select such positions from the Presets list Selecting a preset position from the list will make the PTZ camera move to the specified position Preset positions are defined by the system administrator the Presets list will be empty if no preset positions have been defined for the selected PTZ camera I PIX PTZ Positions You are able to move to a specific position in an IPIX view and then save that position by clicking the Save button When you later want to return to the saved position click the Load button Digital Zoom By selecting the PTZ Control s Digit
374. recordings will be analyzed Selecting a long interval will greatly reduce the time required to complete the search However with a long interval the search may not find motion sequences that are shorter than the specified interval 7 In the Boundary Start and Boundary Stop sections specify the period of time to be covered by the search Note that the smart search is always carried out from the time of the image you are viewing and forwards or backwards The information you specify in the Boundary Start and Boundary Stop sections is only used to limit the search 8 Click the Next move forward in time or Previous move back in time buttons to search through images with motion detected in the selected areas within the specified period of time Each image in which motion has been found will be displayed in the camera layout The Smart Search control panel 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 146 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual will show corresponding time information Search Maur Moher bound Tine of Innes CH 2 10 1d oi M Dei W Image Overy M Moonin naz Smart Search control panel displaying search status information For each image found you have the following options in the Smart Search control panel e Deselect Even while viewing images in which motion has been found you are able to adjust the area covered
375. revention through video evidence combined with time linked POS or ATM transaction data with NetDVMS If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service rather than as an application the Monitor application use of NetTransact versions earlier than 2 1 is not supported Lets you access NetTransact configuration Starts the Device Setup Wizard which guides you through the process of adding a new device See also How to Add a Device When you have selected a device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Edit Device button lets you edit settings for the selected device in the Edit device settings window Lets you remove a device selected in the Administrator window s Device Manager section In order to prevent accidental removal of devices you will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the device Lets you specify settings for a selected camera or audio source e Cameras When you have selected a camera in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window in which you specify camera settings e Audio sources When you have selected an audio source in the Administrator window s Device Manager section clicking the Settings button will open the Audio Device Settings window in which you can 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 8
376. riad Pae Dison Dad arre e r E E Cis a bi Eo i p raa M baiah ed ad m Teal hana 1 The Add New Output window Jaccess You access the Add New Output window by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new output event button in the I O Setup window If the device does not support output the button will not be available 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 79 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Add New Output Window s Fields The Add New Output window contains the following fields Field Description External output Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the output event is connected to defined Output Lets you select which of the device s output ports the output is connected to connected on Many cameras only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 Keep output for Lets you specify the amount of time for which the output should be applied Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Example The output should be kept for five tenths of a second External output Lets you specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list name with which users will be able to manually trigger the output e Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in que
377. right of the Available Events list This will copy the selected event to the window s rightmost list in which events associated with the selected preset position are listed When the selected event occurs or when the selected event button is clicked the PTZ camera will automatically move to the required preset position You are able to associate a preset position with more than one event Simply repeat the process for each required association To end the association between a particular preset position and a particular event simply select the required event in the window s rightmost list and click the lt lt button Setup PTZ Patrolling Window Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera the Setup PTZ Patrolling window lets you configure the camera s patrol scheme for PTZ patrolling the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between several preset positions Jaccess To access the Setup PTZ Patrolling window click the Setup button in Patrolling section of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window e Patrol Scheme The Patrol scheme list displays the name of the camera s patrol scheme The name can be changed by clicking the Rename button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 46 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Selecting Preset Positions to Be Used for a PTZ P
378. rity of 999 all events with the priority in question will be triggered 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 94 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Event Rule String Section The Edit Event window for editing generic events contains the following fields and buttons in the Event rule string section Field Button Event substring Lets you specify the individual items that NetDVMS should look out for when analyzing data packages Specify one or more terms then click the Add button to add the specified term s to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis Examples e Single term User001 when added to the Event message include field the term will appear as User001 e Several terms as one item User001 Door053 Sunday when added to the Event message include field the terms will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday When you add several terms as one item appearing as e g User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field everything between the quotation marks must appear together in the package in the specified sequence If the terms must appear in the package but not necessarily in any exact sequence add the terms one by one i e so they will appear as User001 Door053 Sunday in the Event message include field Ev
379. rizontal Line The white horizontal line in the middle of the timeline browser indicates the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layout Time Span Immediately below the timeline browser itself you are able to specify which time span 1 hour 2 hours etc up to 1 day should be used in the timeline and whether the newest recordings should be indicated at the top or at the bottom of the timeline How to Use the Timeline Browser 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 210 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual To browse recordings using the timeline browser click inside the timeline browser and move your mouse up or down without releasing the mouse button Tip If your mouse has a scroll wheel you can also use the scroll wheel for browsing the timelines Tip Browsing is normally quite fast but you are able to slow down the pace by pressing the CTRL key on your keyboard while browsing Note that this does not apply if using your mouse s scroll wheel for browsing Tip If using your mouse scroll wheel for browsing you can quickly change the timeline browser s time Span by pressing the CTRL key on your keyboard while scrolling Tip Double click at any point within a timeline to quickly move to that point in time Hiding and Showing the Timeline Browser The timeline browser is useful but i
380. rom a list Event buttons can be global available for all cameras in the Monitor or tied to a particular camera only available when the camera is selected in the Monitor vest Busa Leg 8 Ate ae T h 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 83 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The Event Buttons window Access You access the Event Buttons window by clicking the Event Buttons button in the Administrator window e Defined Events List The Event Buttons window features a list of specified event buttons When event buttons have been defined you are able to expand elements in the list by clicking to get an overview of all defined event buttons global event buttons as well as event buttons specified for individual cameras Example A Global Sl fl Global event 1 es iy Timer event r fA Back Door Camera 1 A Front Door Camera 1 A Lab IFS Camera 1 H A Office Camera 1 Expanded Defined Event list A global event button with an associated timer event has been specified Also two event buttons have been specified for an individual camera e Specifying Event Buttons and Timer Events To specify an event button first determine whether you want the event button to be available globally or for a particular camera only Specifying Global Event Buttons To specify a globa
381. rom particular hosts should be accepted leave the Allow All Hosts box cleared and do the following to add each required host e Specify the IP address of the host in the field below the large Allowed Hosts box in the right side of the window hip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard e Click the Add button to add the host to the list of Allowed Hosts e Repeat for each required host hip If you later want to remove a host from the list simply select the unwanted host in the list then click the Delete button 5 Now you are able to customize the behavior of your NetMatrix Monitor application you do this by adjusting settings in the window s Run Mode section Ghip The NetMatrix Monitor application is pre configured with typically required behavior 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 283 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual settings marked by default in the following list You do not need to adjust the settings listed in this step unless you want to customize the way your NetMatrix Monitor application should behave consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Always On Top If selected default this setting forces the NetMatrix Monitor window on top of other windows This setting can subsequently be changed from a menu accessible by ri
382. roperties section 5 Inthe Properties section select Enable HTML Scripting Selecting Enable HTML Scripting ensures that the scripting required for your buttons or other navigation features to work is automatically inserted in the HTML page Depending on the navigation features you have included on your HTML page you may often want to import the HTML page into several views in order for the navigation to fully work System Administrator s Check List NetDVMS system administrators wishing to create and distribute navigation HTML pages to NetGuard EVS users do the following 1 Create the required HTML page The navigation controls in the HTML page must match the views users see in their NetGuard EVSs For example in order for a button leading to View1 to work a view called Viewl must exist in users NetGuard EVSs If you intend to distribute the HTML page to a group of users the views in which the HTML page will be used should be placed in shared 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 195 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual groups 2 Save the HTML page locally on each computer on which it will be used When saving the HTML page locally save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined for example in a folder on the user s C drive example C myfolder file htm Saving the HTML page on the user s de
383. rs will not see the E Mail Report button in the Viewer s toolbar e Specifying Recipients You specify the e mail addresses to which e mail alerts should be sent in the Recipient s field If specifying more than one e mail address separate the e mail addresses with semicolons example aa aa aa bb bb bb cc cc cc e Specifying Sender Settings Specify sender information in the following fields e Sender e mail address Type the e mail address you wish to appear as the sender of the e mail alert e Outgoing mail SMTP server name Type the name of the SMTP server which will be used for sending the e mail alerts e Server requires login Select check box if a user name and password is required to use the SMTP server e Username Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the user name required for using the SMTP server e Password Field available only when Server requires login is selected Type the password required for using the SMTP server 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 66 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Specifying Default Subject and Message Texts Specify default subject and message texts in the following fields e Subject text Specify required subject text for e mail alerts e Message text Specify required message text for e mail alerts Note that camera informa
384. s are present on the server Windows default settings may cause a later Net Framework version to be used instead of Net Framework 1 1 4322 To verify change which Net Framework version is used do the following 5 Click Start and select Control Panel 6 Click Administrative Tools 7 Click Internet Information Services 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 254 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 8 Inthe Internet Information Services window s left pane locate and right click the Default Web Site item Wy internet Information Services J local computer Example only content on your server may be different 5 Inthe resulting menu select Properties This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog 6 Select the dialog s ASP NET tab The Net Framework version in use will be indicated in the ASP NET version field 7 If required change the ASP NET version to 1 1 4322 Detivett Web Site Properties E anpli akn HAA Dimi Hiran irmi biy e al Diepe Seely BTF Hini Carpet Emmy ici SEEEN 20 50727 Perera iret re rte rrr errr rr reer errr tt irr etre rre terre rr rrr er rrr available on your server 8 Click OK 9 Close the Internet Information Services and Administrative Tools windows if still open NET Framework Registration When IIS and Net Fra
385. s displayed in the Monitor application will remain static with the note Screen Update OFF displayed across the image from each camera This will free up system resources resulting in improved system performance but will prevent users from viewing any live images through the Monitor application Select this option if the Monitor application is not used on a daily basis e g if the Monitor application is only used when the system administrator adjusts the software configuration 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 61 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Keyframe only decoding Disable Online Indicator Keep Aspect Ratio Don t send e mail on camera failures Don t send SMS on camera failures Add Monitor to Startup group NetDVMS User Manual Q nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences With the MPEG standard keyframes stored at specified intervals record the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames record only pixels that change If selected only MPEG keyframes will be decoded and displayed in the Monitor appl
386. s feature to remove the PDA Client software 3 When removing the PDA Client software from the PC this way ActiveSync will give you the option of removing the NetPDA NetCell Client software from the PDA as well provided the PDA is connected Click the Remove button to remove the NetPDA NetCell Client software from the PDA as well Removing the NetMatrix Monitor Application Prerequisites Before removing the NetMatrix Monitor application make sure the application is not running If the NetMatrix Monitor application is running shut it down by right clicking the NetMatrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area also Known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen then selecting Exit Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor To remove the NetMatrix Monitor application do the following 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select NetMatrix Monitor 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 297 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Copyright Tra
387. s has passed since first detection of motion regardless whether further motion is detected 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 47 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Or e When a certain number of seconds has passed without further detection of motion 3 Specify the required number of seconds for selected option Example You may specify that the PTZ camera should go to the next preset position and resume patrolling when 10 seconds has passed without detection of motion iPIX Camera Configuration Window IPIX is a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced fish eye lens The iPIX Camera Configuration window lets you configure the IPIX functionality of a camera The iPIX Camera Configuration window Jaccess You access the iPIX Camera Configuration window from the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera name window by selecting the Enable iPIX check box and clicking the iPI X Settings button e IPIX View Adjustment The camera s PIX functionality is configured by adjusting its IPIX view field indicated by a green ellipse in the preview image so it encloses the actual image area of the fish eye lens You do this by specifying a number of values which will be used by the IPIX technology for converting the elliptic image into an ordinary rectangula
388. s may determine when recordings from the camera are transferred to the surveillance system when alerts are generated when external outputs such as lights or sirens are triggered etc Motion detection sensitivity is therefore a key element in your NetDVMS surveillance solution and time spent on finding the best possible motion detection settings for each camera may help you later avoid unnecessary alerts etc Depending on the physical location of the camera it may be a very good idea to test motion detection settings under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc The Adjust Motion Detection window JAccess You access the Adjust Motion Detection window by clicking the Motion Detection button in the Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window Configure De The Adjust Motion Detection window features two sliders one for setting Noise Sensitivity and one for setting Motion Sensitivity e Noise Sensitivity The Noise Sensitivity slider determines how much each pixel must change before it is regarded as motion Insignificant changes which should not be regarded as motion are considered acceptable noise hence the name of the slider With a high noise sensitivity very little change in a pixel is required before it is regarded as motion Areas in which motion is detected are highlighted in the preview image Select a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highl
389. s only to users you have defined by clicking the User setup button You are able to restrict those users access to particular cameras and features as described in the following Restricting Defined Users Access When you select the option Restrict user access by camera you are able to restrict defined users access to particular cameras and features in the following way 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 272 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 1 Click the User Access button This will open the Define Camera Access for individual users window Define Camera Acter for individesl utens AF User WF Allows plop baay veg HTTP epee Ales AN const vin HTTP cere Ei tel L t Wiest bp jikil irii Mek a Cees 1 Micy enma 1 Fert Dee Careers Reception Coes 1 fice Carer 1 Fi Cama 1 shan Cares 1 Define Camera Access for individual users window 2 Inthe User list select the required user 3 Inthe Defined Cameras list select the name of each camera to which the user should have access Gnrrip By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting camera names in the Defined Cameras list you are able to select several or all of the listed camera names in one go 4 Click the gt gt button to move the selected camera names to the Viewable by selected u
390. s or carousels Only available if NetMatrix an integrated product for distributed viewing of live video streams has been configured on your surveillance system Lets you send images from the selected camera to a particular NetMatrix Monitor Note that the NetMatrix command is not available if viewing the camera in a hotspot or a carousel e Send Camera Only available for single camera view positions not for hotspots carousels or NetMatrix positions Lets you send images from the selected camera position to another single camera position in an open view including any views you may have open in floating windows or on secondary displays To use this command first select the required destination view in the first submenu then select the required camera position in the second submenu 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 201 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual If some of the positions listed on the second submenu are not selectable it is because the positions are either not in use or used for hotspots carousels or NetMatrix content e Carousels A carousel is used for displaying images from several cameras one after the other in a single view position If a position in one of your views contains a carousel you will be able to recognize it by the following characteristics e It displays images from differen
391. s provided in the following Will remote users access the surveillance system over very slow connections such as 28 8 Kbps connections e Yes Use regular browser access through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server e No Use NetGuard or NetGuard EVS access through the mageServer Is it acceptable to install client software on remote users computers Yes Use NetGuard or NetGuard EVS access through the mageServer No Use NetGuard access through the I mageServer as remote users can run the NetGuard Straight from the NetDVMS server as an alternative to the client being installed on remote users computers Remote access can also be provided through the Web Server RealtimeFeed Server as this does not require any client software but this is only recommended for remote access through very slow connections Will you require a large amount of future flexibility from your remote access solution e Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the ImageServer Due to the way the software has been developed the NetGuard EVS offers a high degree of flexibility for integration of new features plugins etc e No Use NetGuard access through the mageServer Do you require a very feature rich client application e Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the lmageServer The NetGuard EVS offers more features for remote users than the other solutions e No Use NetGuard access through the ImageServer Do you require a large amount of flexibility re remote
392. s the E Mail setup window click the Email Settings button in the Genera Settings window e Enabling E Mail Alerts You enable the use of e mail alerts separately for the Monitor application or Recording Server depending on which has been installed and if applicable the Monitor application s Viewer feature e Enable E Mail Monitor Recording Server Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts when the Monitor application or Recording Server depending on what has been installed is running E mail alerts will then be sent when the following conditions apply o the Monitor or Recording Server is running o motion is detected or an event for which the sending of an e mail alert has been defined occurs o motion is detected or the event occurs within a period of time for which an e mail alert schedule has been defined e Enable E Mail Viewer I nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Select check box to enable the use of e mail alerts in the Monitor application s Viewer feature In effect this will display the E Mail Report button in the Viewer s toolbar enabling users to send evidence via e mail If you clear the check box use
393. s when you manually trigger an event is defined by your surveillance system administrator Ask your surveillance system administrator if in doubt about using manually triggered events in your organization Your surveillance system administrator may occasionally know manually triggered events under the name event buttons How to Manually Trigger an Event To manually trigger an event select the required event in the Event section and click the Activate button The list of selectable events is grouped by server and camera device with which the event is associated Hierarchically global events are displayed immediately under the relevant server e Outputs If external outputs have been defined on your surveillance system for example for switching on lights or sounding a siren such outputs can be triggered from the NetGuard EVS To trigger an output select the required output in the Output section and the click Activate button The list of selectable outputs is grouped by server and camera device to which the output is attached e Audio If one or more cameras have audio devices attached you are able to listen to live audio from a selected audio source when using the NetGuard EVS s Live tab To listen to live audio select the required audio source in the Audio section s Audio Sources list To temporarily mute the live audio simply select the Mute check box Ghrip You can listen to live audio independently of the views camer
394. s you invert the Y axis This way you are able to select whether the camera should move up or down when you move the joystick towards you and away from you respectively z axis uses a Lets you specify whether the Z axis should use a relative or an absolute relative positioning scheme positioning scheme This will affect the way you zoom in and out with camera Default values Lets you use the joystick s default axes settings The Joystick Buttons section lets you specify which joystick buttons should be used for particular actions To assign an action to a particular joystick button select the required action in the list then click the required joystick button When a button is assigned to an action the name of the button will be listed together with the name of the action To stop using a particular joystick button for a particular action select the button action in the list then click the Unselect button To free all joystick buttons from their associated actions click the Unselect All button Viewing Live Images You view live images on NetGuard s Live tab When you select NetGuard s Live tab NetGuard will connect to the NetDVMS server and display live images from the cameras in the selected view e Selecting a View You are able to select a view for display on the Live tab in two ways e By selecting the required view in the Live tab s Views section e By selecting the required view from the Views list located in t
395. s you select a particular camera for use in a particular position in the camera layout grid Select a position in the camera layout grid then select a camera from the list to display images from the selected camera in the selected position Hot Spot Window Lets you select the required hot spot functionality With the hot spot Monitor users are able to select a camera in the Monitor s camera layout grid and view enlarged images from the camera The hot spot may also be used for point and click operations on some PTZ cameras Select between three hot spot options e None No hot spot default e Hot Spot Select required size for the hot spot e In separate window Hot spot is a separate floating window When a hot spot is enabled it will appear as a dark gray field in the camera layout grid unless you have selected the In separate window option 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 52 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Iriparan Tri lE orem CE a eA g bar spe Se pjan i F Mies E e D irmi aoe eee ab ETN a Configuration A 3x3 grid with a 2x2 hot spot defined in the Administrator s Monitor Manager window Carousel Note Use of the carousel feature requires that a hot spot is enabled With the carousel feature you can make the hot spot automatically change between cameras in the Monitor s came
396. screen update in 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 15 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Archive Setup Import DLKs Matrix NetMatrix NetTransact Add Device Edit Device Remove Device Settings order to minimize CPU usage Q nstallation dependent feature Note that some of the settings are only available when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service some of the features are not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Opens the Archive setup window in which you specify NetDVMS s archiving settings Archiving lets you keep recordings for as long as required limited only be the available hardware storage capacity Lets you import all required Device License Keys DLKs in one go thus avoiding the need to specify each DLK manually when adding devices See also How to Import Device License Keys Lets you access NetMatrix configuration NetMatrix is an integrated product for forcing video from any camera to any monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS Not applicable Note The NetTransact button is only available if you are using OnSSI s NetTransact add on product that handles loss p
397. se down the application Note Use with caution Exiting the Monitor will stop recordings Certain user rights may be required in order to be able to close down the Monitor See the description of the Admin Login button e Monitoring Audio If the camera selected in the Monitor s camera layout is recording audio you are able to listen to live audio through speakers attached to the computer running NetDVMS If using a multi port video server device audio will always be attached to the first video input on the device To mute live audio click the Mute Audio button in the Monitor s control panel Recording is not affected by muting audio in the Monitor e Running Out of Disk Space Alert In order to warn you of an impending possibility of losing data the Monitor will prominently display the message Running out of disk space if available disk space on the NetDVMS server goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera Example For a system with ten cameras the alert will show if the available disk space goes below 350 MB 150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras Consult your surveillance system administrator if you see this message Monitor How to How to Use the PTZ Menu Othe Monitor application is installation dependent and available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features
398. ser list 5 If the user in question should be able to play back recordings from the selected cameras select the Allow playback functionality via Web server check box 6 If the user in question should be able to generate AVI movie clips from recordings from the selected cameras select the Allow AVI creation via Web server check box 7 Repeat as required for other users Grip For the remote user s perspective also see Remote Access through Web and RealtimeFeed Servers Testing the Web Server Configuration To test the Web Server open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later is required on the computer running the NetDVMS software and go to the following address http localhost 81 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 273 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Web Server Administrator s Guide to Day to Day Operation Once it has been configured you are able to run the Web Server and remote users will be able to connect to it for image navigation and still image viewing Starting the Web Server The Web Server may already be running When the Web Server is running the Web Server icon appears in the notification area system tray at the far right of the Windows taskbar a Server icon If the icon is not present you must start the Web Server To start the Web Server do the following 1 Ope
399. sers may not notice this at all However the session timeout period will be very evident in some cases for example if you set the Max number of clients value to 1 When this is the case the single allowed NetGuard or NetGuard EVS user logs out four minutes must pass before it will be possible to log in again 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 159 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e User Administration Section Accounts and rights for NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users are configured in the mageServer Administrator window s User Administration section NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users must be defined in this section in order to be able to log in to the surveillance system Defining Users To define NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users click the User Setup button This will open the User administration window in which you define users Defining User Access Rights Having defined users you are able to define whether all users should have access to all NetGuard NetGuard EVS features and all available cameras or whether access should be restricted by user Full Access for All Users To give all users access to all NetGuard NetGuard EVS features and all available cameras select Full access for all users Restricted Access To use restricted access select Restrict user access Then click the User Access button to open the
400. si com Page 73 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only contains the following fields Field Check Description Box External sensor connected to Sensor connected through Event occurs when input goes External event name Send e mail if this event occurs Include image from camera Send SMS if this event occurs 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input event is defined Lets you select which of the device s input ports the sensor used for the input event is connected to Lets you select whether input event should be triggered when the signal on the input sensor rises or falls e Low Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is falling e High Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the sensor and device in question Lets you specify a name for the input event Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the input event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list next to the check box Selec
401. sing the root account occasionally Known as an admin or administrator account Camera Settings for Device Name Window The Camera Settings for Device Name window lets you specify certain information about a device s cameras This is particularly interesting for PTZ cameras and cameras attached to a video server device Camana Tehing dea Yodeo Serre PTZ Caena Sekoken T Cei gi Ga iibe a gi er et E e a FAT AZ hee paniek aah ONN i ET A Mp cadea hesa OOR rE ae CE ee The Camera Settings for Device Name window access You access the Camera Settings for Device Name window by clicking the Camera Settings button in the Edit device settings window The Camera Settings for Device Name window is divided into a P T Z Camera Selection section and a camera list e P T Z Camera Selection Section The P T Z Camera selection section contains the following fields Field Description Some of the Select check box if any of the cameras attached to the video server device is a connected PTZ camera cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom If the check box is not available PTZ is not supported for the device in question cameras P T Z type Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are Pan Tilt Zoom cameras controlled check box is selected through COM1 If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM1 port on the video server device select the required PT
402. sktop or in the user s My Documents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such locations 3 Import the HTML page into the NetGuard EVS views in which it will be used 4 Test that the navigation controls on the imported HTML page work as intended 5 Enjoy simple and intuitive NetGuard EVS navigation tailored to meet your organization s needs NetGuard EVS Scripting For advanced users it is possible to create function calls in the NetGuard EVS Note that the use of scripting will require some familiarity with programming e Viewing a List of Possible Function Calls To view a list of the approximately 100 different function calls you are able to use in the NetGuard EVS do the following on the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s HTML Page link to a position in a view Grip Preferably use a 1X1 view this will give you the best possible overview of the list s content When you release the mouse button over the required position the Open URL window opens a Erta the WAL c psh bo a AT MIL pees on thee riina pas CELS of pour netveodk thes pou wasnt bo piy Oper Erowce Cancel Open URL window 2 In the Open URL window s Open field type about script and click OK This will display the list of function calls Each function call will be listed with a short description of its purpose and you will be able to try out many of the function calls straight from the l
403. ss the router or firewall used must be configured so requests sent to the outside public IP address and port are forwarded to the inside local IP address and port of the server running the Image Server service Outside IP Lets you specify a public IP address for use when the server should be available Address from the internet Outside Port Lets you specify a port number for use when the server should be available from the internet The default port number is 80 You are able to change the default port number 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 158 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Local IP Opens the Define local IP ranges window in which you are able to define IP Ranges address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network Background When a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact IP addresses goes on in the background completely automatically and transparent to users However when a NetGuard or NetGuard EVS on a local network connects to a surveillance system which is also on the local network the Image Server may if different subnets are involved not recognize NetGuard s or NetGuard EVS s IP address as being local When this is the case the Image Server may not return a sui
404. sscesssscesssseeeas 170 Login Emor SSS AS aeaio AES E EE E E EAA 173 ooo e161 alg TE NOU 6 Ea E E E E A E EE 174 VOWS oae a E E E T O E E E T AAT 174 Private and Shared VIEWS 2 cece cccssccesssccsssscessscesssscssssecesssscssssecesssscssssccesseessseeessceessscesssseessseeeas 174 How to Create amp Manage VIEWS ccc ccccccccssscccsssecesssecssssecesssecesssccessccessseesssesesscsesecessseessseeeas 175 HOw to Aad Content TO VIEWS ses ssn ca resets cea ster inina a AE E 179 ELEN SS OTOL ON ene e A E E 186 Adjusting Camera Propertie S sorsinut ETEEN ARa 186 Customizing Joystick S CUNO sseccsccsec see tesncscecmtctaseteacccceautethceareracehondatacetyaccedaendeseeausaaecbaasdadeteeasadiaadat ensueedeks 189 Assigning Custom Keyboard SROrtcuts ccc eee ccecccesssccssssecssssccssssccesssccesssccsssscsesscesssscsesseeeeas 19 Selecting Language cane rn Oe mr EE aE Ce eT ee nnn meer ee 192 Using an HTML Page for Navigation in NetGuard EVS cece cccssccessecesssscesseesssseesseeeens 192 WWE Ole goles ax fc Sarl 01 go eee ren mer mann Etre eo mane nny nC nr nT PO ER tr ene ne cee 196 BY a 6 B E lt n E E A en A E ee eT A 199 UNV HIS WIM AO CSc ete eect sees A A A NAE 199 VIEWING Recorded IMAGES 20 0 cece eee cceeccccsssccessccesssecesssecssssecssssecessecessecessccesssecesseeesssesenssceeseceesseeeas 208 48 6 gal a1 eee 4 0 216 EAEN Aen ner te ame nent nln rene A A A A er roe rear ae ener rere eee 217 Camera Message TOXS
405. ssi com info onssi com Page 45 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Event Window for PTZ Preset Positions on Events Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights Available only when dealing with a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera the Event window for preset positions on events lets you associate particular preset positions with particular events timer events or event buttons You are thus able to make the PTZ camera automatically go to a particular preset position when a particular event occurs Access To access the Event window for preset positions on events click the Setup button in Preset Position on Events section of the PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name Camera Name window e Associating Preset Positions with Particular Events When associating a preset position from a particular PTZ camera with one or more events you are able to select between all events defined on the NetDVMS system you are not limited to selecting events defined on a particular device To associate a particular preset position with a particular event do the following 1 Select the required preset position in the Available Preset Positions list in the left side of the Event window 2 Select the required event in the list of available events the list in the middle of the window 3 Click the gt gt button located to the
406. st item in the field will be removed 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 92 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Notification Settings Section The Add New Event window for specifying generic events contains the following fields in the Notification settings section Field Description Send Email if Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event occurs this event occurs E Mail setu pP WINQOW Include image Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected from camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event is triggered in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs this event occurs When you have specified a new generic event click OK Edit Event Window for Editing Generic Events The Edit Event window for editing generic events lets you edit the settings for an event based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols You are able to edit the criteria according to which NetDVMS should analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and whether any notifications should be triggered when the event occurs Grip TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain special characters suc
407. st one audio source has been attached to a device on the surveillance system When an audio source is associated with a camera audio from the source will automatically be presented when images from the camera are viewed Note that you are able to select an audio source attached to another device than the selected camera To associate an audio source with the selected camera simply select the required audio source from the list For cameras attached to the same device as an audio source the source is automatically selected and cannot be changed e Image Storage Settings The Image storage settings section lets you specify when images received from the camera should be stored in the database You specify this information in the following fields When to store Select when images received from the camera should be stored in the database images in l database e Always Always store all received images in the database e Never Never store any received images in the database Live images will be displayed but since no images are kept in the database users will not be able to browse images from the camera e Conditionally Store received images in the database when certain conditions are met When you select this option specify required conditions in the following fields On motion Available only when the option Conditionally is selected i e when images received from the camera should be stored in the database on certain conditions on
408. stem you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from the NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content To print evidence from the Viewer use the following procedure 1 Select the required camera in the camera layout see Using the Viewer and browse to the image you want to print 2 Click the Print icon t d The Print icon This will open the Print control panel Prev Operator s Hota Ds Digan atc The Print control panel 3 Fill in the Operator s Note Company and Operator fields 4 Click the Print button to print the evidence on your default Windows printer The printed surveillance report will contain the selected image information about camera name image capture time and report print time as well as the specified operator s name and operator s note How to Send Evidence via E mail Q nstallation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if t
409. stion you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Edit Output Window The Edit Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device vas a The Edit Output window Access You access the Edit Output window by selecting the required output in the O Setup window then clicking the Edit selected button e Edit Output Window s Fields The Edit Output window contains the following fields 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 80 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual External output Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the output event is connected to defined Output Lets you edit which of the device s output ports the output is connected to connected on Keep output for Lets you edit the amount of time for which the output should be applied Specify the required amount of time in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Example The output should be kept for five tenths of a second External output Lets you edit the name of the output name e Testing the Defined Output When you have defined settings for the output in question you are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button Advanced Window The Advanced window lets you specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling
410. t Event Window s Fields The Edit Event window for editing event buttons contains the following fields Field Description Button related Read only field displaying the name of the camera for which the event button to has been specified If the field displays Global the event button is a global event button available for all cameras Manual event Lets you edit the name of the event button name Send e mail if Select check box to send an e mail alert when the event button is clicked this event occurs E Mail setup window Include image Available only if the Send e mail if this event occurs check box is selected from camera Select check box to include an image recorded at the time the event button is clicked in the e mail alert then select the required camera in the list below the check box Send SMS if Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is clicked this event occurs 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 87 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Generic Events Generic Events Window Note Access to features in the Administrator application including those described in the following may require administrator rights NetDVMS is able to analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger an event when specified criteria are met This way you are ab
411. t cameras one after the other e It is surrounded by a thin green border Thin green border indicates carousel As with other images you can enlarge images from a carousel by double clicking the blue image bar above the image Carousels are configured on the NetGuard EVS s Setup tab e Hotspot If a view contains a hotspot you are able to select a camera in the view itself or any other view you may have open and view enlarged and or higher quality images from the selected camera in the hotspot When a view contains a hotspot the hotspot is usually but not always located in one of the view s larger positions for example the large position in a 1 7 view If a position in one of your views contains a hotspot you will be able to recognize it by the following characteristics e When you select camera positions in the view your selection is reflected in the hotspot e Itis surrounded by a thin orange border Thin orange border indicates hotspot How to Use a Hotspot 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 202 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 1g must have To use a hotspot simply select a camera position in a view to automatically view the camera s images in the hotspot Advantages of Using a Hotspot The fact that you can often view enlarged images in the hotspot is not in itself what makes the h
412. t check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 74 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Multiple Input Events Window The Multiple Input Events window is used for devices capable of handling several input events It lets you define which of the device s possible input events should be enabled and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input events siti kapiat Pom el Evakhi hpi lmh Wabi s E ei a The Multiple Input Events window Access You access the Multiple Input Events window by clicking the Add new event button in the I O Setup window Note that this only applies when the device selected in the I O Setup window is capable of handling several input events Some devices are capable of handling a single input event only in which case a different window the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only will open when the Add new event button is clicked e Multiple Input Events Window s Fields and Buttons The Multiple Input Events window contains the following fields and buttons Input events Read only field displaying the name of the device on which the input events are for device defined Available Input Lists available input events for the device typically with an input event for rising Event s and falling signals on each of the device s input ports For exact
413. t check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs this event occurs New Timer Window The New Timer window lets you specify the settings for timer events Timer events are separate events triggered by the input event VMD event generic event or event button under which they are defined Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes the following are examples only e Acamera starts recording based on an input event e g when a door is opened a timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds e Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event i e when motion is detected a timer event stops the recording after one minute and another timer event switches the lights off after two minutes Here Theva AF Tin cover a ed iy Dreg T ai faai era eri EELU afer Cee C Mrde Da The New Timer window Jaccess You are able to access the New Timer window in three ways 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 78 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual If dealing with input and VMD events in the O Setup window When you click the plus sign next to a device in the window s Defined
414. t position by clicking the Save button When you later want to return to the saved position click the Load button Grip You may be able to use a joystick for controlling your PTZ and IPIX cameras Joystick control is configured on NetGuard s Setup tab See Further Configuration 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 242 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Viewing Recorded I mages You view recorded images on NetGuard s Browse tab When you select NetGuard s Browse tab NetGuard will connect to the NetDVMS server and display recorded images from the cameras in the selected view This way you are able to browse recorded images The Browse tab provides you with a number of advanced features for browsing recorded images In addition to image browsing features the Browse tab also lets you print images and export AVIs movie clips and J PEGs still images e Selecting a View You are able to select a view for display on the Browse tab in two ways e By selecting the required view in the Browse tab s Views section e By selecting the required view from the Views list located in the upper part of the window e Enlarging I mages from Particular Cameras in a View To enlarge images from a particular camera in a view double click the blue title bar above the image Double clicking blue bar above image enlarges
415. t takes up space in the view When you do not need the timeline browser you can hide it by clicking the small button in the left side of the timeline browser s border The button is located near the timeline browser s white horizontal line To show the timeline browser simply click the button again When the timeline browser is hidden the button will be available in the Browse tab s far right border e Time Navigation The Browse tab s Time Navigation section provides you with controls for browsing and playing back recorded images from the camera selected in the view Master Time Area The Time Navigation section s Master Time area shows the master time and date of the recordings viewed The master time is the time to which all the cameras viewed are tied This means that when you browse recordings all the images you see in the view will in principle be from exactly the same point in time Some cameras however may only record if motion is detected Also there may be no recorded images from one or more cameras in the view matching the specified point in time When this is the case the last image in the camera s database prior to the specified point in time will be displayed in the view The Master Time area also displays the current playback speed example 1 00x indicating real time Browse Buttons The Time Navigation section s browse buttons lets you manually navigate through recordings from the camera selected in the view Previo
416. tO test a generic QVE NE cece ccc cccccccsscesscessccesscesscessecssecesecessecsscesscessscsscessecssecssecesscesseesseceseessees 109 How to Add a Timer Eveni eee ne ee nn na ee enn ee eee ne oe eee ree 112 How to Add a Manually Controlled Output ou eee cccssccssssccesssecsssscssssscssssscesssscesseeeneas 114 How to Add a Motion Triggered Output cece cccesscccssccesssccssssccsssscesssscesssscssssscesesessseeeeas 118 PIA TUNG ares ars teens cn E aseceaneaaecn seta souestncuacaneaeseeiasetvaleaacenesaneansaatte 122 ABOUT ARCHIVING croiser oaa EAA AE ETTER EA E a Ea ONT a 122 PAC SE VV INOW eera E E E EA E EEA E A ETES 124 NETMATRIX ADMINISTRATION sesessssssesssesssessressessresstestssttsstesttesttssttsstts ttes ttes teest ee stes EtSs Etas Eea nesete s reestas reseeesee ees 127 NetMatrix Configuration WINKOW ccccccc cece cccsscccssscccsscecssssecesssccessccesssecesssesessscsesssesessceesecesseeeeas 127 MONITOR APPLICATION MONITOR APPLICATION cccccsssccssssssssssssscssscssssccsssessssscssccssees 131 MONTOR FOW TO ripene ene a sc aicaioen step etwictone AAE EE EE E EE E depot euctatctanettauenehta 136 HOW touse me PITA MoN e E T E TEE A EN 136 How to Send Live Images to NetMatrix MOnitorS eseseseesssesesessresereesrressressrressressriessressreessress 138 I EB E EA E E I E EN E A A E A A E 140 USING THE VIEWER ssocsiiiisaioisscsiciniaoiaioniadi niaaa aaa iaiaaeaia ideaa diiin 140 Browsing using the timeline rOWSe
417. tabase will be deleted e Archive no repair Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera If the database becomes corrupted the contents of the database will be archived 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 31 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Qip An archived corrupt database can be repaired by the Viewer Open the Viewer and attempt to browse the archived recordings from the camera in question Browsing will initially fail but this will make the Viewer start repairing the corrupt database When the contents of the local database for the camera are either deleted or archived the database is reset and will be ready for storing new recordings Note No images can be recorded while the database is being repaired For large installations a repair may take several hours especially if the Repair Scan Delete if fails action involving two different repair methods is selected and the first repair method fast repair fails Note In case recordings for a camera get bigger than expected or the available drive space is suddenly reduced in another way an advanced database resizing procedure will automatically take place e f archives are present on the same drive as the camera s database the oldest archive for all cameras archived on that drive will be deleted e If no archives are present on the drive co
418. table IP address to the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS for further communication between the two Therefore you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the Image Server should recognize as coming from a local network in which case it will respond with a suitable IP address and seamless communication will be possible Max number of You are able to limit the number of NetGuards and NetGuard EVSs allowed to clients connect at the same time Depending on your NetDVMS configuration and the performance of the hardware and network used limiting the number of simultaneously connected clients may help reduce server load If more than the allowed number of simultaneously connected NetGuards NetGuard EVSs attempt to log in only the allowed number of NetGuards NetGuard EVSs will be allowed access Any NetGuards NetGuard EVSs in excess of the allowed number will receive an error message when attempting to log in By default a maximum of ten simultaneously connected NetGuards NetGuard EVSs are allowed To specify a different maximum number of NetGuards NetGuard EVSs allowed to connect at the same time overwrite the value in the Max number of clients field with the required value ip To allow an unlimited number of simultaneously connected NetGuards NetGuard EVSs type 0 zero in the Max number of clients field Note A four minute session timeout period applies for client sessions on the Image Server In many cases NetGuard or NetGuard EVS u
419. te 2 In the Setup tab s Group Control section type a name for the group in the Group Name field then click the New button Your new group will now appear in the Setup tab s Views section with the name you have specified and labeled as Private You are now able to create a view within the group Creating a View in a Private Group To create a view in a private group make sure the group in which you want to create the view is selected in the Setup tab s Views section and do the following 3 Inthe Setup tab s View Control section type a name for the view in the View Name field 2 Click one of the View Control section s seven available New View layouts i a i a Fr P j ala kdk d d CEC EL HE Your new view is automatically added to the selected group oa 1 de eee Ghrip A group whether private or shared can contain an unlimited number of views More than one private and shared group can exist Adding Cameras to the View Having created a view within a group you are able to specify which cameras should be included in the view To add cameras to a view do the following 3 Inthe Setup tab s Views section select the required view When you select a view the layout of the selected view is outlined in the main section of the NetGuard window 2 Inthe Setup tab s System Overview section click the plus sign l next to the required server to view a list of available cameras 3
420. te 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 276 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual kir ee A E Example of remote viewing of images from a surveillance camera The menu is divide into three sections Single View light yellow background Quad View purple background and Help green background The features available in each menu section are described in the following e Single View The Single View menu section is used for handling images from a single camera at a time The following features are available in the Single View menu section Feature Description O Select Camera Lets you select a camera Selection is based either on a simple list of cameras or on a graphic representation of the NetDVMS surveillance system s Monitor application When the graphic representation is used available cameras are indicated by green squares To select a camera click a green square The selected square will be highlighted and a still image from the selected camera will appear next to the menu Blue squares may appear Such blue squares simply indicate that no camera is available in the particular section of the NetDVMS surveillance system s Monitor application Archives Non recent images are typically saved in so called archives The Archives link lets you select and view archived images from the selected camera provided such archiv
421. tection alarm time and end time for each sequence By clicking the list s links you are able to jump to the images matching each sequence s start time first motion detection alarm time and end time Clicking the Overview link lets you quickly jump to a list of the newest sequences in which motion was detected Switches to live view for the selected camera Live view lets you view live images from the selected camera When viewing live images you are able to select between low medium and high image quality The pause button start buttons in the live view lets you pause and start the live feed as required If configured for the selected camera output buttons may also be available Output buttons are used for triggering external output for example for switching on lights sounding a siren etc Ask your NetDVMS system administrator if in doubt 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 279 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual For PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras PTZ navigation buttons will also become available in the live view provided you have the user rights required to control PTZ cameras To return to viewing still images from the selected camera click the Still link in the live view Playback Note Certain user rights may Switches to playback view for the selected camera Playback view lets you play bac
422. th several channels audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1 Set all Selects the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Clicking the Set all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should apply for all cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected cameras Clear all Clears the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section Clicking the Clear all button is thus a quick way to specify that archiving should not apply for any of the cameras listed Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually disabled for the selected cameras Set all paths Copies the selected path listing to all cameras listed in the Select cameras for which the archiving function should apply section If using the same archiving directory for all cameras this can save you having to manually specify identical paths for each camera Example You have specified the path C videodata for a camera To quickly use this path for all cameras select the path listing and click the Set all paths button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 126 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual NetMatrix Administration NetMatrix Configuration Windo
423. than one physical display attached but even when your computer has only one display you can send individual views to separate windows while keeping the NetGuard EVS s main window in the background This way you can watch more than one view at a time You can send views to separate displays or windows from the NetGuard EVS s Live tab as well as its Browse tab e Sending a View to Primary Display Sending a view to Primary Display will show the view in a separate full screen window on your computer s main display Example of a view sent to the Primary Display While you are viewing the separate full screen window the main NetGuard EVS window will be hidden behind it The separate full screen window will only show the selected view none of the Live or Browse tab s other features and it can only show one view at a time Any hotspots carousels NetMatrix positions still images or HTML pages included in the view will work as usual To send a view to Primary Display do the following 1 In the Live or Browse tab s Views section right click the required view This will bring up a menu Select View Secondary Display 1 Secondary Display 2 2 Inthe menu select Send View To gt Primary Display e Sending a View to a Secondary Display Sending a view to a Secondary Display will show the view in a full screen window on another physical display if available The other physical display will only show the selected view none
424. the required view When you select a view the layout of the selected view is outlined in the main section of the NetGuard EVS window 2 Inthe Setup tab s System Overview section click the plus sign next to Cameras then the plus sign next to the required server to view a list of available cameras a Select the required camera from the list and drag the camera to the required position in the view When you have dragged a camera to a position in the view an image from the camera will provided a connection can be established appear in the selected position If a connection cannot be established for example if the surveillance system s recording server is not running the name of the camera will be displayed in the selected position When the camera position is selected you are able to specify its properties in the Setup tab s Properties section see Adjusting Camera Properties for detailed information 4 Repeat for each camera required in the view Grip If you want to use all of the cameras under an server you may simply drag the required server link to the view this will automatically place all of the server s cameras in the view from the selected position onwards Make 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 179 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual sure a Sufficient number of positions are available in the vi
425. the view The position you select will be indicated by a bold border Image Quality The Image Quality setting determines the quality of the images when viewed but also affects bandwidth usage If NetGuard is used over the internet over a slow network connection or if for other reasons you need to limit the bandwidth used by NetGuard image quality can be reduced on the server side by selecting e g Low or Medium Ghrip You can quickly reduce the bandwidth usage for all cameras in the view by reducing the image quality for a single camera then clicking the Apply To All button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 238 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Frame Rate Lets you select a frame rate for the selected camera Default is Unlimited I PIX Split Mode Available only if the selected camera is an IPIX camera IPIX is a technology that allows creation and viewing of 360 degree panoramic images NetGuard supports up to four different viewpoints from a single IPIX camera The IPIX Split Mode list lets you select the required spilt mode e One by One lets you view a single viewpoint e Two by Two lets you view four different viewpoints at a time When viewed on the Live and Browse tabs the IPIX camera will appear as specified with either one or four viewpoints from the same image Ghip When viewing different viewpoi
426. their Windows login This method only works for NetGuard EVS users This method requires that a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller is available on your network Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating systems it identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them Users and if required groups of users are specified centrally in Active Directory In short the benefits of importing user data from Active Directory are that Administrators do not have to create separate user accounts for accessing the surveillance system because user authentication will be handled centrally by Active Directory Administrators can import groups of users in one go if required Users can basically just use their Windows login when accessing the surveillance system no need to memorize separate user names and passwords Prerequisites The Image Server managing the remote access verifies NetGuard EVS users identities using NTLM challenge handshake with a Microsoft Domain Controller In order to be able to import users and groups through Active Directory a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller must be available on your network Consult your network administrator if in doubt User and Group Concepts Active Directory uses the concepts of users and groups Users Users are Active Directory objects representin
427. then click the link below the check box to open the test interface in a browser 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 258 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual iia jm h ai da E E s 2 Pee Ge y a Pee ar morier fer ber FIEL ereer Log in to the test interface by typing the user name and password as set up on the Image Server then click the Login button The test interface will now log in to the Image Server and list all cameras to which the user has access 4 Click one of the camera links in the test interface s left frame If an image the latest recorded image from the selected camera is displayed the NetPDA NetCell Server is installed correctly e NetPDA NetCell Server Installation Troubleshooting The following issues may occasionally occur during or upon installation of the NetPDA NetCell Server For each issue one or more solutions are available NetPDA NetCell Server Cannot Be Installed Solutions Make sure that IIS are installed Make sure that IIS are set up to use the correct port default is port 8080 and that the same port number was used when the virtual directory was specified e Make sure that IIS are running Test I nterface Cannot Be Displayed Solutions Make sure that the Net Framework is registered on the IIS e Make sure that IIS ar
428. thin the sequence If no motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in the sequence Clicking the right arrow will take you to the next sequence If motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in which motion was detected within the sequence If no motion was detected within the sequence you will be taken to the first image in the sequence ip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature End Lets you quickly jump to the oldest or newest image from the recent database of the selected camera Clicking the left arrow will take you to the oldest image in the recent database of the selected camera Clicking the right arrow will take you to the newest image in the recent database of the selected camera Grip To view non recent images from the selected camera try the Archives feature Overview Lets you browse sequences from the recent database of the selected camera in which motion has been detected Overview browsing is based on thumbnail image representations of the sequences Clicking the left arrow provides you with an overview of the previous four sequences in which motion was detected with information about each sequence You are able to jump to a sequence by clicking the thumbnail image representing it 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 278
429. tion e Config Lets you access the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Note that before the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window opens you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 290 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Exit Shuts down the NetMatrix Monitor application Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor A shut down NetMatrix Monitor application can be started again by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop e Shutting Down the NetMatrix Monitor Application Closing the NetMatrix Monitor window by clicking the close button in the NetMatrix Monitor window s title bar will not in itself shut down NetMatrix Monitor application it will merely send the window into hidden mode To shut down NetMatrix Monitor application do the following 1 Right click the NetMatrixMonitor icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen Das 1035 Example only your notification area may have different content Right clicking the notification area s NetMatrixMonitor icon lets you access a shortcut menu Show window Config E
430. tion as well as date and time information is automatically included in e mail alerts e Specifying Image and Interval Options You are able to specify whether e mail alerts should include images and how much time should pass between alerts per camera e Include Image Select check box to include images in e mail alerts When selected a JPG image from the time the triggering event occurred will be attached to each alert e mail e Time btw mails minutes Specify required minimum time in minutes to pass between the sending of each e mail alert per camera Examples If specifying 5 a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of each e mail alert per camera even if motion is detected or events occur in between If specifying O e mail alerts will be sent each time motion is detected or events occur potentially resulting in a very large number of e mail alerts being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore consider the motion detection sensitivity configured for each camera in the Adjust Motion Detection window e Testing Your E Mail Alert Configuration You are able to test your e mail alert configuration by clicking the Test button This will send a test e mail to the specified recipients If Include Image is selected the test e mail will have a test JPG image attached SMS Settings Window The SMS settings window lets you enable and configure the use of SMS alerts Such SMS alerts can automatically be
431. tion in an open view including any views you may have open in floating windows or on secondary displays To use this command first select the required destination view in the first submenu then select the required camera position in the second submenu If some of the positions listed on the second submenu are not selectable it is because the positions are either not in use or used for hotspots carousels or NetMatrix content 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 209 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Carousels When the selected view contains a carousel the carousel will also appear when you are working on the Browse tab A carousel however is only useful when working on the Live tab not when working on the Browse tab On the Browse tab the carousel will simply list the name of the camera it was last displaying on the Live tab Like on the NetGuard EVS s other tabs a carousel is indicated by a thin green border e Hotspot When the selected view contains a hotspot the hotspot will also appear when you are working on the Browse tab Like on the Live tab you are able to select a camera position in a view to automatically view the camera s images in the hotspot You are of course able to browse the hotspot s images using the Browse tab s various navigation features Like on the NetGuard EVS s other tabs a h
432. tire video and audio sequences in three different formats Viewer How to How to Store and Recall Views oO nstallation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance system you may still include a standalone version of the Viewer when exporting database content from the NetGuard EVS including the Viewer in the export will provide recipients for example investigators police authorities etc with a convenient tool for browsing the exported database content You are able to save particular configurations of the Viewer s camera layout as so called views and switch between them using the Views menu in the Viewer s menu bar For example you may store one view displaying images from 16 cameras and another view displaying images from eight other cameras e Storing a View To store your current camera layout as a view do the following 1 Inthe Viewer s menu bar select the Views menu 2 Inthe Views menu select the Add to Views command This will open the Name of View window Hame of View if
433. to log Web server activity in a log file File The log file will be stored in the directory in which the NetDVMS software is installed Days to log Available only if Log Activity to File check box is selected Lets you specify the number of days in which log files should be kept before they are deleted 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 271 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Default is ten days Grip Read more about logging in About Logging Timeout for Lets you specify a number of minutes within which the remote user must have connections been active requested information from the Web Server in order to keep the connection open If the remote user has not been active within the specified time the connection will be closed and the remote user will have to log in again if more information is required from the Web Server Default period is five minutes Realtime feed Note This setting specifically concerns the RealtimeFeed Server quality Lets you specify the default image quality used by the RealtimeFeed Server e Low Low image quality Recommended for slow connections such as modem connections e Medium Medium image quality Recommended for connections of reasonable speed such as ISDN connections e High High image quality Recommended for fast connections such as ADSL or LAN connections Rem
434. to use specific alerts or a specific PTZ patrol scheme Note however that this default may be changed by clearing the Genera Settings window s Create Default schedule for new cameras check box If the check box is cleared subsequently added cameras will not automatically be online in which case online schedules must be specified manually access To access the Camera Alert Scheduler window click the Scheduler button in the Administrator window Tarai i r br ree isp Pet a f f 4s a Dair el C Traa ae mig rap J eai a ae arar ee a eet O ia dh T fa pe D iai a E Al a en rae E pr SO T nie ee er ee er el eS mg En ppa pin alan i ee ti et aaa aaa a nd em el ng E Peo hb m Er erhi 1 Oy gir hie eee he ee rmn Camera Alert Scheduler window e Camera Alert Scheduler Window s Fields and Check Boxes The Camera Alert Scheduler Window features the following fields and check boxes Field Check Description Box Camera Lets you select a particular camera for which to specify or view a schedule in the window s calendar section 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 55 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Mode Select whether to add or delete periods in the calendar section e Set Add periods May also be used to overwrite existing periods e Clear Delete existing periods Online Check the
435. ton to open the Edit device settings window Editing Settings for Cameras To edit the settings for a camera listed in the Device Manager section click the plus sign next to the device to which the camera is attached select the required camera then click the Settings button to open the Camera Settings for Device name Camera Name window ae Back Door East Wing 10 170 69 3 ba Camera a Renaming a Camera To rename a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears Stairs 10 10 69 1 Ta Camel Disabk Edt f This will open the Camera Name and Number window in which you are able to overwrite the existing camera name with a new one Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras Users of NetGuard EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts some of which let the users toggle between viewing different cameras Such keyboard shortcuts include numbers which are used to identify each camera These camera shortcut numbers are specified in the Administrator To assign a shortcut number to a camera right click the camera name in question then select Edit from the menu that appears BR Stairs 10 10 63 1 Ta Camel pisable Edt e 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 13 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual This will open the Camera Name and Number
436. tops playback ip Dragging the playback slider to its leftmost position pauses playback Go To Time The Time Navigation section s Go To Time fields let you quickly jump to a specific point in time Specify required date in the first field and required time in the second field then click the Go link 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 244 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Sequences The Browse tab s Sequences section provides you with an overview of recorded sequences for the camera selected in the view To use the Sequences section select the required camera in the view then click the Sequences section s Get Sequences button Clicking the Get Sequences button will retrieve a list of up to 40 sequences 20 sequences prior to the point in time displayed in the view and 20 sequences following the point in time displayed in the view Each sequence will be listed with date and time as well as the length of the sequence Clicking a sequence in the list will move all images in the view to the time of the sequence If the Preview check box is selected you are able to quickly view each sequence by placing the mouse pointer over the required sequence in the list Clicking the expand icon next to a sequence in the list will show you the exact date and time of the first and last image in the sequence as well as
437. tor to jump to recordings from a specific point in time you are able to use e g the timeline browser or the playback controls to browse through recordings from around the specified point in time e Browsing Recordings with the Timeline Browser The timeline browser displays an overview of periods with recordings from all cameras displayed in your current camera layout The number of timelines displayed in the timeline browser reflects the number of cameras displayed in the camera layout you are viewing The timeline of the camera selected in the camera layout is highlighted 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 143 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Dei 200 Taleb ie era Lae Hie Gay Timeline browser displaying timelines for a camera layout with four cameras The timeline browser uses the following colors Red Recordings with motion Green Recordings without motion Black Periods without recordings Yellow Audio recordings The timeline browser s white horizontal line indicates the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layout The area between the timeline browser s two blue horizontal lines is a magnification of the 30 seconds preceding and following the point in time from which recordings are being displayed in the camera layout You are able to specify which tim
438. transferred to NetDVMS provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default If required you can disable a camera listed in the Device Manager section by right clicking the name of the camera in question See more information under Administrator window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 20 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Edit Device Settings Window The Edit device settings window lets you edit the settings of an already installed device Aiii che Dears a j ra Tr Bane a ari Dewa iiaia usa O The Edit device settings window access To access the Edit device settings window select the required device in the Administrator window s Device Manager section and click the Edit Device button The Edit device settings window is divided into two sections e Identify Video Device Section The Identify Video Device section contains the following fields buttons etc Field Button Device Type Select required device type from list ip NetDVMS is able to automatically detect device type as well as serial number provided the IP address hostname and password of the device have been specified in the IP address DNS Host Name and Root Password fields Simply click the Detect Device button to auto detect device type and serial number Detect Device Cl
439. ts the selected input event is automatically transferred from Available Input Event s list to the Enabled Input Event s list lt lt Lets you move an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list to the Available Input Event s list thus disabling it Edit Lets you edit the settings for an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event s list Add New Event Window for Devices Capable of Handling Several Input Events The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events lets you specify the settings for a particular input event on devices capable of handling several input events kdd Hare wet Fa e or LEES ae M imi mai a papi aan r 1 tg T ged H ih eed cca CEJ e The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events Access You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events by clicking the gt gt button in the Multiple Input Events window e Add New Event Window s Fields The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling several input events contains the following fields Field Check Description Box External event Lets you specify a name for the particular input event name Send email if Select check box to send an e mail alert when the input occurs this event occurs Note In order to be able to use e mail alerts the e mail alert feature must have 22
440. ts are called VMD i e Video Motion Detection events e Finally events may be generated manually by users clicking custom made buttons in NetDVMS Such buttons are called event buttons Specifying Input Events and Output In NetDVMS your main entry point for configuration of input event and output handling is the Administrator window 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 69 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e By clicking the Administrator window s I O Setup button you open the O Setup window in which you are able to specify each individual input event VMD event and output e By clicking the Administrator window s Event Buttons button you open the Event Buttons window in which you are able to specify event buttons for manually triggering events controlled activity e By clicking the Administrator window s Generic Events button you open the Generic Events window in which you are able to specify generic events e By clicking the Administrator window s I O Control button you open the O Control window in which you are able to associate specific events with specific output This way you can for example specify that when motion is detected on a camera typically specified as a VMD event a siren should automatically sound output If you want users to be able to manually activate output when operat
441. tures a Device Manager section as well as a number of buttons providing access to configuration e Device Manager Section The Device Manager section located in the middle of the Administrator window lists all added devices and attached cameras The Device Manager section thus provides you with an overview of your surveillance system 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 12 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Device Manage Be Back Doa 1010693 Ta Cones 1 eis Mestineg Riom 10 10 50 10 Se Comes 1 Ho Camera 2 Ta Canes 3 Ta Cones 4 Detail from the Administrator window s Device Manager section two devices have been added the first device has a single camera attached whereas the second device has four cameras attached Until you have added devices the Device Manager section will be empty Adding Devices You add devices through an intuitive Device Setup Wizard available by clicking the Administrator window s Add Device button see also How to Add a Device When devices have been added they will be listed in the Device Manager section Clicking the plus sign next to a device in the Device Manager section will list cameras attached to the device Editing Settings for Devices To edit settings for a device listed in the Device Manager section select the device then click the Edit device but
442. tween the carousel s camera changes The setting will apply for changes between all the cameras included in the carousel it is not possible to specify particular intervals for changes between particular cameras Grip You are able to use several carousels in a single view e Adding Hotspots With a hotspot users will be able to select a camera in the view and view enlarged and or higher quality images from the selected camera in the view s hotspot For the hotspot you would usually select a one of the view s larger positions for example the large position ina 1 7 view Advantages of Using a Hotspot The fact that you can view enlarged images in the hotspot is not in itself what makes the hotspot useful you can enlarge any image in a view by double clicking the image What makes the hotspot useful is that with a hot spot you can use a low image quality and or frame rate for cameras in the view s regular positions and a high image quality and or frame rate for the hot spot Then only when users select a camera for viewing in the hotspot will it be displayed in high quality and or high frame rate This can really help you save bandwidth on the remote connection Adding the Hotspot To add a hotspot to a view do the following on the Setup tab 1 Drag the System Overview section s Hotspot link to the required position in the view 2 Release the mouse button over the required position Grip Note that the position gets a thin orange bor
443. uard EVS If a user group does not have this right shared groups in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS will be protected indicated by a padlock icon Note Views created in a NetGuard can only be shared with other NetGuard users Views created in a NetGuard EVS can only be shared with other NetGuard EVS users It is not possible to share views across the two types of client e Edit Private Views Ability to create and edit views in private groups in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by the NetGuard NetGuard EVS user who created them for more information about views see Creating Views NetGuard and How to Create and Manage Views NetGuard EVS If a user group does not have this right private 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 166 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual groups in the NetGuard NetGuard EVS will be protected indicated by a padlock icon Denying remote users the right to create their own views may make sense in some cases for example in order to limit bandwidth use thip By clearing the View Live Browse and Setup check boxes you can effectively disable the user s group s ability to use the NetGuard NetGuard EVS for example while the user is on vacation This would typically be a temporary alternative to deleting the user group 3 Inthe User Rights for Camera section s
444. ubenebuaesopesuewbusessommmsesiombiiiebsismeeneaemebeueetacdasmmtsimbsans 13 EDITING SETTINGS FOR DEVICES sicconesesesenonescserupsvensnmmdsoncwopesesemepesonenwpsbiensnmmdbenswepsvesemepeoouebmpebedsnmmdbenewopevesemmmescoenedss 13 EDITING SETTINGS FOR CAMERAS scessecsensssnswsvaseicwenssseeuomenenouewawsiewensoaesewa eSEE wena wouesewasomemebanosouemesseewenemenosememebumebiaseeow 13 EDITING SETTINGS FOR AUDIO SOURCES sieniciireisien aiei Ne E EEEE EEEE EEEE EE RENE 14 DISABLI NG ENABLING CAMERAS AND AUDIO SOURCES 000 sssesececccccccccccccccsssessseecccccecccecececaaaaattssseeeeeeesecs 14 IMPORT OF DEK S uccrcninesanin aa EAEE T ence 18 HOW TO IMPORT DEVICE LICENSE KEYS 000 sccccscscccccccccssscccccsssssssceccsccccecessscccccsssssscccecseceececsssceeccessesescesssees 18 DEVICE ADMINISTRATION HOW TO ADD A DEVICE eeeeeeesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssnssssssssaaas 18 EDIT DEVICE SETTINGS WINDOW oe scesscceonsotceracnateceavaracacain sacceomasnennans ancdbanswacesaiapaseeamacaeenain onaceapiwasenanepnscuapasaeenainoae 21 CAMERA SETTINGS FOR DEVICE NAME WINDOW 000 cceeeceececceecccccececcceccceccccececcecceccceeceeseceeeeeseseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 23 CAMERA ADMINISTRATION ABOUT CAMERA ADMINISTRATION cccccceceeeceeceeeeeceecesecececeeseeeeseeseeseeeeseseeeeeees 25 CAMERA SETTINGS FOR DEVICE NAME CAMERA NAME WINDOW ccccccccccccccccccceeeseeeesssnstccccccceceeeeeees 26 CONFI
445. ubt e Not connected Indicates that it is not possible to connect to the camera for example because the camera itself is disconnected from the network Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Not initialized ndicates that the camera is not in an operative state Consult your surveillance system administrator if the problem persists e The server is running out of disk space Indicates that limited disk space is available on the surveillance system server If more disk space is not made available on the surveillance system server recording will be affected Consult your surveillance system administrator e The server has encountered a database problem Indicates that a database problem has occurred on the surveillance server Consult your surveillance system administrator who will have access to tools for diagnosing surveillance server database problems e The server has lost connection to the camera ndicates that the surveillance server has lost connection to the camera This may be a temporary issue for example due to maintenance Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 223 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Using Multiple Windows The NetGuard EVS supports use of multiple windows This is especially useful if your computer has more
446. uickly lets you view the whole image again e Printing Images With the Browse tab s Print section you are able to print recorded images When you print an image it is automatically included in a small surveillance report in which you are also able to include notes about the recorded incident To print an image do the following 1 Select the required camera from the Print section s Source list Alternatively you may select the camera in the view 2 Select the required date and time by using the controls in the Time Navigation section 3 Click the Print section s Print button This will open the NetGuard EVS Surveillance Report window with a preview of the image to be printed as well as information about camera name image capture time print time and user name of the user printing the image Ghip If you used digital zoom on the image the digitally zoomed area of the image will be printed 4 You also have the option of including a user s note for example a description of the recorded incident 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 216 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 5 Optional If you want to change or verify paper size source and orientation for the printout click the NetGuard EVS Surveillance Report window s Page Setup button to open the Page Setup window EE wes Orgel shen Hagu retes
447. up window first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is connected then click the Add new output event button AT oped a es Pets cour 7 7 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 114 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual This will open the Add New Output window 3 Inthe Add New Output window the External output connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device Now specify information in the following fields e Output connected on Select the camera device output port on which the output unit is connected Many cameras devices only have a single output port in that case simply select Output 1 e Keep output for Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active when triggered in either 1 10 seconds or seconds Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information e External output name Specify a name for the output The name will appear on the button list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output Note that output names must not contain the following characters lt gt amp In the following example we have specified that a siren connected on a camera s Output 1 port shoul
448. urposes while the export process is underway If the Close On Completion check box is selected default the export dialog will automatically close when the export is finished You are now able to distribute the content of the Exported Database folder Grip If you included the Viewer application in the export double clicking the file Browser exe in the Exported Images folder will open the Viewer ready for viewing and browsing the exported database content hip If you included the Viewer application in your export copying all files from the Exported Images folder to the root of a CD or DVD will start the CD DVD automatically when the recipient inserts it Camera Message Texts Message texts may under particular circumstances appear in white letters across one or more of a view s camera positions Se End Example of camera message text Possible messages listed alphabetically are 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 222 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e After Database End Will appear on Browse tab only Indicates that the time selected is after the time of the last recording in the camera s database The last image in the camera s database will be shown in the camera position in order to indicate that recordings from the camera are available but only from a time earlier than the selected time e Befor
449. us image Moves to the image just before the one currently viewed Next image Moves to the image just after the one currently viewed Previous sequence Moves to the first image in the previous sequence Next sequence Moves to the first image in the following sequence First image Moves to the first image in the database for the selected camera Last image Moves to the last image in the database for the selected camera Time Sliders The Time Navigation section s time sliders let you browse recordings simply by dragging the sliders handles Drag to the left to move backwards in time drag to the right to move forward in time Use the upper times slider for fine browsing within a limited period of time use the lower slider for more coarse browsing within longer time spans Playback Slider and Buttons 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 211 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The Time Navigation section s playback slider lets you specify the required playback speed In the slider s middle position playback speed is real time 1 00x Drag the slider to the left for a slower playback speed drag to the right for a faster playback speed An indication of the exact playback speed is displayed in the upper right corner of the Time Navigation section s Master Time area Use the playback buttons to play back recordings
450. ut the button will open the Edit Output window Remove Lets you remove an event selected in the Defined events list selected Advanced Opens the Advanced window in which you are able to specify network settings to be used in connection with event handling which ports to use for FTP alerts and SMTP input output events as well as which polling frequency to use on devices requiring polling Add New Event Window for Devices Capable of Handling One Input Event Only The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only lets you specify the settings for an input event on devices capable of handling one input event only had Hirer Hewat Fa Laer ore erei Pore Do er bad vmi wa te ied pe i lsi 00 Sa ea D bede i h n The Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only Jaccess You access the Add New Event window for devices capable of handling one input event only by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new event button in the O Setup window Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only Some devices are capable of handling several input events in which case a different window the Multiple Input Events window will open when the Add new event button is clicked 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info ons
451. utput events for other devices on the NetDVMS system e The same output may be used for manual control through an output button as well as for automatic triggering when motion is detected Selecting Output for Manual Control You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually through output buttons in the Monitor application or from a list in the NetGuard or NetGuard EVS Output buttons will become available in the Monitor when the camera is selected and the Monitor s Output button is clicked In the NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users will be able to trigger outputs by selecting them from a list To specify an output for manual triggering in the Monitor or NetGuard NetGuard EVS do the following 1 Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for Device Name Camera Name window rip When you select an output in the All Outputs list you can view detailed information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the window 2 Click the gt gt button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 99 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list Note An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way but only the top eight
452. vanced window default is port 1234 Event rule type Lets you select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing received data packages e Match In order for the event to occur the received package must contain exactly the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field and nothing else e Search In order for the event to occur the received package must contain the message specified in the Event rule string section s Event message include field but may also have more content Example If you have specified that the event message should contain the terms User001 and Door053 the event will be triggered if the message includes the terms User001 and Door053 and Sunday Event priority The same data package may be analyzed for different events The ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria for several events The priority must be specified as a number between 0 lowest priority and 1000 highest priority When NetDVMS receives a TCP and or UDP package analysis of the packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority This way when a package matches the criteria for several events only the event with the highest priority will be triggered In case a package matches the criteria for several events with an identical priority e g two events with a prio
453. ve setup window The Archive setup window also lets you specify where archives should be stored for each camera e Benefits of Archiving By default information received from cameras is stored by NetDVMS in a database for each camera The database for each camera see Camera Settings for Device Name Camera Name window is capable of containing a maximum of 600 000 records per day before the oldest records in the database are overwritten With daily archiving the amount of records you are able to store is limited only by the available hardware storage capacity By using archiving you will also be able to back up archived records on backup media of your choice using your preferred backup software e How Archiving Works For each camera for which archiving has been specified the contents of the camera database will be moved to a default archiving directory called Archives This will happen automatically once every day at a time specified by you The default archiving directory is located on the computer running the NetDVMS software by default in the directory containing the NetDVMS software C videodata In the archiving directory separate sub directories for storing archives for each camera are automatically created These sub directories are named after the MAC address of the device to which the camera is connected Since you are able to keep archives spanning many days of recordings further sub directories named after the ar
454. veillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Grip Instead of manually specifying date and time you may use the Browse tab s Time Navigation features to move to the required start point then click the upper of the Export section s Set buttons This will automatically set the date and time of the viewed image in the Start Time fields 3 Inthe End Time fields specify end date and time for the export You may use the Set button as described above 4 Select the required camera from the Source list You must select an individual camera from the list as your source the Current View Sources option only applies when exporting in the database format 5 Click the AVI JPEG Export button This will open a separate export dialog LD pant D AG eA 1 Thards Hyramba a 2006 1 0 3 Fij Aces 216 Camera 1 eee aan Epai Fema i AV Add Treaa ie Yes Franerate Co Ful Digital Zoom E spent re AM Contec Meiza Wate 1 Eyi einai Pekia ODE TAT A 7 Cone Da Compito _ Emt Export dialog Date and time format may be different on your computer The export dialog will list the specified start time end time and camera 6 In the export dialog s Export Type section select the required export format AVI movie clip or J PEG still images 7 Select whether to add timestamps from the surveillance system to the exported images If selected small timestamps will appear in the corner of the images 222 Route
455. veillance system from any place and at any time e Scalable with open architecture based on IP technology with ongoing development and regular updates which gives you long term returns on your surveillance investment e Future safe the IP network approach is the foundation for tomorrow available today NetDVMS consists of a number of components each targeted at specific tasks and user types e The Administrator The main application used by surveillance system administrators for configuring the NetDVMS surveillance system server upon installation or whenever configuration adjustments are required e g when adding new cameras or users to the system e The Recording Server A vital part of the surveillance system recordings are only transferred to NetDVMS while the recording server is running The recording server may be installed in two ways Either as an application the Monitor application or as a service the Recording Server service See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences e The Image Server Handles access to the surveillance system for remote users logging in with the NetGuard NetGuard EVS or NetPDA NetCell The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware it runs as a service on the surveillance system server Surveillance system administrators handle I mage Server configuration including remote users access rights through the Image Server Administrator application
456. velop highly flexible software solutions You can therefore as a rule of thumb expect Net based software to be highly flexible ready for integration of new features plugins etc However organizations and their requirements are different and some organizations find that the high degree of interconnection of services and computers inherent in a Net based solution is not desirable Instead such organizations rely on more classic Windows solutions e Yes Use NetGuard EVS access through the IlmageServer The Net based NetGuard EVS offers more features for remote users than the other solutions Net Framework 2 0 downloadable from http www microsoft com downloads is required on computers running the NetGuard EVS e No Use NetGuard access through the mageServer The NetGuard is not a Net based solution The following table outlines the main differences between the three remote access solutions Remote Access Solutions ata Glance Remote User s Installation Remote User s Feature Set Remote User s Ease of Use System Administrator s Installation 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Regular Browser Access through Web Server RealtimeFeed Server None remote user access system through regular browser Limited Easy to use None the Web Server and RealtimeFeed Server are integrated in NetDVMS NetGuard Access through I mageServer Optional client can be inst
457. vents defined on NetDVMS Chip For video server devices you are able to define a VMD event for each connected camera simply repeat above process 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 106 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual How to Add a Generic Event NetDVMS is able to analyze received TCP and or UDP data packages and automatically trigger an event when specified criteria are met This way you are able to easily integrate your NetDVMS surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources for example access control systems alarm systems etc Events based on the analysis of received TCP and or UDP packets are called generic events NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window default is port 1234 To add a generic event do the following 1 Inthe Administrator window click the Generic Events button ke hedi kaiminka En eee M Hia UU This will open the Generic Events window 2 In the Generic Events window first select the Generic item then click the Add new event button This will open the Add New Event window for specifying generic events 3 Now specify information in the following fields 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 107
458. ver you want to be able to record or view live images from cameras on your surveillance system You typically select this option if you intend to view live and recorded video directly on your surveillance system server for example when the server is placed in your control room or a similar location to which you and trusted users have regular access With this solution NetDVMS s remote access clients can of course still be used for accessing the surveillance system server from remote locations When ready click Next 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 10 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 8 Select required language for the NetGuard one of NetDVMS s remote access clients thip You do not have to select a language version for the NetGuard EVS during installation the NetGuard EVS automatically comes with several languages and users select their individual language versions themselves When ready click Next 9 Follow the next few simple steps in the installation wizard until you are asked to select the setup type that best suits your needs imisi iiia felipe dl H ina Ta b Fe bara Pa Ep A P Ba EA pa rpi m toler Pur Li byd a car dij wak arar m i ea Lz ia ree e If you want shortcuts to NetDVMS s various applications placed on the desktop automatically keep Add shortcut to desktop selected e Availa
459. view To return to normal view simply double click the blue title bar again Ghrip If you have selected reduced image quality for the camera on the Setup tab images from the camera will be displayed in full quality when viewed enlarged e Time Navigation The Browse tab s Time Navigation section provides you with controls for browsing and playing back recorded images from the camera selected in the view Master Time Area The Time Navigation section s Master Time area shows the master time and date of the recordings viewed The master time is the time to which all the cameras viewed are tied This means that when you browse recordings all the images you see in the view will in principle be from exactly the same point in time Some cameras however may only record if motion is detected Also there may be no recorded images from one or more cameras in the view matching the specified point in time When this is the case the last image in the camera s database prior to the specified point in time will be displayed in the view The Master Time area also displays the current playback speed example 1 00x indicating real time 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 243 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Browse Buttons The Time Navigation section s browse buttons lets you manually navigate through recordings from the
460. w NetMatrix is an integrated product that allows distributed viewing of live video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS access You access the NetMatrix Configuration window by clicking the NetMatrix button in the Administrator window The NetMatrix Configuration window has two tabs the Config tab lets you define individual computers on which it should be possible to view NetMatrix triggered content Such computers are known as NetMatrix Monitors the Event tab lets you define which events should trigger which actions in individual NetMatrix Monitors e Config Tab The Config tab is used for enabling NetMatrix functionality and for defining which computers to show NetMatrix triggered live images on Grip See the minimum system requirements for using the NetMatrix Monitor software under System Requirements HelMairir Conlipuratiion I9 Ie ooa NetMatrix Configuration window in this example two NetMatrix Monitors have been defined The NetMatrix Configuration window contains the following fields check boxes and buttons Field Check Description Box Button Enable Select checkbox to enable NetMatrix functionality NetMatrix List of Defined Lists any already defined NetMatrix Monitors i e devices on which NetMatrix NetMatrix triggered images can be shown Monitors 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi co
461. w onssi com info onssi com Page 190 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Assigning Custom Keyboard Shortcuts You are able to assign your own custom shortcut key combinations to particular actions in the NetGuard EVS Ghip The NetGuard EVS also features a small number of standard keyboard shortcuts immediately ready for use See Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts for more information To assign custom shortcut key combinations do the following 1 Click the Show Application Menu button in the right side of the NetGuard EVS s top bar 2 From the menu that appears select Keyboard Setup Gy Joystick Setup ITI Keyboard Setup i tF LEJE F The Keyboard Setup window appears Keyboard Setup Egl Cuntorae kepboand by moyi hana ker bo sira Press Hata key Wipe fe chee i Giota Select schon aya Asay key Rep Lee ri Pete Ok Conc Keyboa rd Setup window 3 When the Keyboard Setup window appears click inside the Press shortcut key field then press the required key combination Note Custom key combinations must begin with CTRL or ALT Example CTRL B i e first pressing the CTRL key then while still pressing the CTRL key pressing the B key This will display the pressed key combination in the Press shortcut key field 4 Inthe Select action list select the required action for the shortcut key combination 5 Inthe Use new shortcut in list select when the shortcut key co
462. where a new item should be included when you click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons Likewise you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the Remove button The item immediately to the left of the cursor will be removed when you click the Remove button Add Adds the content of the Event substring field to the Event message include field the content of which will be used for the actual analysis See also the description of the Event substring and Event message includes fields Lets you add a start parenthesis character to the Event message include field Parentheses can be used to ensure that related terms are processed together as a logical unit in other words they can be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis Example User001 OR Door053 AND Sunday In the example the two terms inside the parenthesis will be processed first then the result will be combined with the last part of the string In other words the system will first look for any packages containing either of the terms User001 or Door053 then it will take the results and run through them in order to see which packages also contain the term Sunday Lets you add an end parenthesis character to the Event message include field AND Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message include field With an AND operator you spe
463. will provided the e mail alert feature has been enabled in the E Mail setup window automatically be sent if NetDVMS loses contact with a camera regardless of any e mail alerts periods defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler window If selected no SMS alerts will be sent if NetDVMS loses contact with a camera Otherwise SMS alerts will provided the SMS alert feature has been enabled in the SMS settings window automatically be sent if NetDVMS loses contact with a camera regardless of any e mail alerts periods defined in the Camera Alert Scheduler window Oi nstallation dependent feature Available only when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the RecordingServer service this feature is not relevant See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Adds the Monitor application to Windows Startup group making the Monitor application open automatically each time Windows is started on the computer 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 62 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual or because they have reached the end of an online schedule in which case Create default If selected default a schedule specifying that the camera is always online i e schedule for transferring images to NetD
464. window in which you are able to specify a shortcut number to be used with the camera Grip More information about using keyboard shortcuts in the NetGuard EVS is available in Using Standard Keyboard Shortcuts Editing Settings for Audio Sources To edit the settings for an audio source listed in the Device Manager section click the plus sign next to the device to which the audio source is attached select the required camera then click the Settings button to open the Audio Device Settings window AR Lab Audio 10 10 50 29 ey Camera 1 A ei Disabling Enabling Cameras and Audio Sources Individual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled meaning that video from cameras and audio from attached microphones is by default transferred to NetDVMS provided that the cameras are marked as online in the Camera Alert Scheduler Window also default If required you can disable individual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager section When a camera or audio source is disabled no images audio will be transferred from the camera audio source to NetDVMS To disable a camera or audio source right click the required camera or audio source in the Device Manager section then select Disable Be Stairs 10 10 63 1 Disable Edit When a camera or audio source is disabled it will be indicated as follows AR Stairs 10 10 69 1 GA Camera Disabled To ena
465. wn and left only PAGE UP numeric PTZ camera move up and right keypad only PAGE DOWN numeric PTZ camera move down and right keypad only 5 numeric keypad PTZ camera move to default position only On Browse Tab Only RIGHT ARROW Move to next image LEFT ARROW Move to previous image PAGE DOWN Move to next sequence PAGE UP Move to previous sequence HOME Move to first image END Move to last image Using an HTML Page for Navigation in NetGuard In addition to displaying images from cameras NetGuard is able to display static images and HTML pages Such HTML pages may be used for intuitively switching between different views in NetGuard For example you may insert a clickable floor plan of a building and you would be able to simply click a part of the floor plan to instantly switch to a view displaying images from the required part of the building In the following you will see examples of HTML pages for NetGuard navigation a simple HTML page with buttons and a more advanced HTML page with a clickable image map For NetDVMS system administrators wishing to create and distribute such HTML pages to NetGuard users a check list outlining the tasks involved is also provided Note The method described here requires a locally installed version of NetGuard e Example of an HTML Page with Button Navigation A very quick solution is to create an HTML page with buttons for navigation You are able to create five categories of butto
466. x Enter fhe mame pou warh bo save tes rd weer re Or Cancel The Name of View window 3 Inthe Name of View window specify a name for the view and click OK 4 The view will now be selectable in the Views menu If storing several different configurations of the camera layout as views you will thus be able to switch between them using the Views menu 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 148 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual e Recalling a View To recall a stored view simply select the required view in the Views menu e Editing or Deleting a Stored View To edit or delete stored views select Organize Views in the Views menu This will open the Views control panel in which you are able to rename views change the sequence in which stored views appear in the menu and delete views How to Print Evidence Q nstallation dependent features The Viewer is only available from the Monitor when the recording server has been installed as an application the Monitor application If the recording server has been installed as a service the Recording Server service the features described in the following will not be available from the Monitor application See Installing the Software for more information about the installation differences Note that if the Monitor application is not installed on your surveillance sy
467. xactly as you have specified them on the Image Server o Users with Basic authentication or Windows authentication will have the option of selecting Remember password which will help them speed up subsequent login procedures Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature Auto login Users will have the option of selecting Auto login in which case the NetGuard EVS will automatically start up and log in with the selected authentication method each time Windows is started for Basic authentication and Windows authentication this will require that Remember password is selected Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 165 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual Define User Rights Window The Image Server s Define User Rights window lets you define access rights for NetGuard and NetGuard EVS users Petia Late Fgh E rn in F imha n Bagh e LF ee k de oa abn Soe ee ome Mpi hee bed 3 a ap a ES E tice Coed Canes BE eai Piet eg es inh he nea i a mun h al oe fab dorks Ceo 1 Erri Cees 8 Fiord Eee l b al i fl fae iF 2 il Lapel lt HZ Fh A EU i t ia ls oe yE a F lat k H aak Cime Define User Rights window Access You access the Define User Rights window by clicking the User Access button in the mag
468. xit 2 From the menu select Exit Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor A shut down NetMatrix Monitor application can be started again by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor Shortcut on your desktop Controlling NetMatrix Monitors from a HTML Page If required it is possible to control one or more NetMatrix Monitors from a HTML web page Note This requires some programming knowledge and is typically done by surveillance system administrators To create a HTML page for connecting cameras to disconnecting cameras from NetMatrix Monitors do the following 1 Create a basic HTML page 2 Copy the javascript file NetMatrixMonitor js from the NetMatrix Monitor folder on the NetDVMS software CD to the folder in which the HTML page to be used for controlling NetMatrix Monitors is located If you downloaded the javascript file NetNatrixMonitor js copy it from the location at which you have saved it Note The javascript file MatrixMonitor js only supports use in Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 Add the following line to the header section of the HTML page lt SCRIPT LANGUAGE Javascript SRC NetMatrixMonitor js gt lt SCRIPT gt 4 Inthe body section of the HTML page you are now able to add links for controlling NetMatrix Monitors Links must be in the following format 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 640
469. xporting Images With the Browse tab s Export section you are able to export recorded images in the AVI movie clip and J PEG still image formats See Exporting Video Evidence for detailed information about exporting recorded images Exporting Video Evidence With NetGuard you are able to quickly generate and export video evidence in the AVI movie clip and J PEG still image formats To export video evidence do the following 1 Select NetGuard s Browse tab 2 Inthe Browse tab s Export section specify start date and time for the export by typing the date in the first Start Time field and the time in the second field Chip Instead of manually specifying date and time you may use the Browse tab s Time Navigation features to move to the required start point then click the upper of the Export section s Set links This will automatically set the date and time of the viewed image into the Start Time fields 3 Inthe End Time fields specify end date and time for the export As was the case with the start date and time end date and time must be in the correct format if specified manually Alternatively use the Set link as described above 4 Select the required camera from the Source list 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 246 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual 5 Click the Export button This wi
470. y click the Log Out button in the NetGuard EVS s top bar Log Out button 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 228 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual NetGuard Client NetGuard Introduction The NetGuard provides remote users with feature rich access to the surveillance system It lets users access multiple servers at a time allowing remote user access across systems The NetGuard may either be installed locally on the remote user s computer or it may be accessed through the internet and run from the NetDVMS server Ghip See system requirements for the NetGuard under System Requirements e What are Remote Users Able to do with the NetGuard With the NetGuard remote users are able to e View live images from cameras on the surveillance system e Browse recordings from cameras on the surveillance system e Create and switch between an unlimited number of views each able to display images from up to 16 cameras from multiple servers at a time Views can placed in private groups only accessible by the user who created them or shared groups accessible by all NetGuard users connected to the NetDVMS server e Control PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom and IPIX 360 view cameras e Activate external outputs e Get quick overviews of sequences with detected motion e Print images e Generate and export evidence in AVI movie c
471. you have selected an action for the axis you want to test simply move the joystick along the required axis to view the effect indicated by a movement of the dark blue bar 5 Inthe Button Setup section specify an action for each required joystick button You select the required action in the Action column Chip To quickly verify that you are configuring the required button simply press the required button on the joystick When the button is pressed a dark blue color will appear in the Button Setup section s Preview column for the button in question Disabling J oystick Use To disable the use of joysticks on your NetGuard EVS select the Joystick Setup window s Disable all joysticks check box Joystick Setup is Tied to User Login on Particular Computer Unlike your views which are simply tied to your user login and can therefore be used on any computer with a NetGuard EVS your joystick setup will be tied to your user login as well as to the specific computer on which you configured the joystick setup This means that your joystick setup will only work on the computer on which is has been configured The simple reason for this is that different computers are likely to have different joysticks attached If you want to use a joystick with the NetGuard EVS on more than one computer you must configure the NetGuard EVS s joystick setup on each computer 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 ww
472. ystem server Note however that to run the NetPDA NetCell Server the following is also required on the surveillance system server o Internet Information Services 11S 5 0 or later o Microsoft Net Framework 1 1 Note that later versions of Net Framework may also be present on the server If Net Framework 1 1 as well as one or more later versions are present on the server Windows default settings may cause a later Net Framework version to be used instead of Net Framework 1 1 To verify change which Net Framework version is used do the following Click Start and select Control Panel Click Administrative Tools Click Internet Information Services In the Internet Information Services window s left pane locate and right click the Default Web Site item a T intemmet Information Services BA local computer Web Sites 2 Defauk SMTP Virtual Server Example only content on your server may be different 5 Inthe resulting menu select Properties This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog 6 Select the dialog s ASP NET tab The Net Framework in use will be indicated in the ASP NET version field 7 If required change the ASP NET version to 1 1 4322 Detant Web Site Propartion aF Til Tabi Hafi Pimi Hore irm birg i ne el 22 ET vem iii a ar each Ti beter File irs dat Oe 2a Fie nat einen Eh 2 E peee C ix i per tony Ha Example only 8 Click OK 9
473. ystems inc C Bae Autherts ater UserName Refers to a specific user name The following example would show the NetGuard EVS s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field and Tommy in the dialog s User name field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password Refers to a specific password The following example would show the NetGuard EVS s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field Tommy in the dialog s User name field and TOmMy5Pa55w0OrD in the dialog s Password field Client exe ServerAddress http ourserver UserName Tommy Password TO0mMy5Pa55w0rD AuthenticationType Refers to one of NetGuard EVS s three possible authentication methods WindowsDefault called Windows authentication current user in the login dialog Windows called Windows authentication in the login dialog or Simple called Basic authentication in the login dialog 222 Route 59 Suite 303 Suffern NY 10901 Tel 845 369 6400 Fax 845 369 8711 www onssi com info onssi com Page 197 O n SS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc NetDVMS User Manual The following example would show the NetGuard EVS s login dialog with http ourserver in the dialog s Server address field Basic authentication selected in the dialog s Authentication field Tommy in the dialog s User name field and TOmMy5Pa55wOrD masked by asterisks in the dialog s Password

Installation and User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents